* 
 
 
 
 //. 
 
 ^ci 
 
 
 Wiist, 
 
 to 
 
 PRINCETON, N. J. 
 
 
 

 ■ I I ’ I ■ i 1 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 I . 
 
 
 
 
 • Jjfti . , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 . - • 
 
 ‘ l 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 , 
 
 , < 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 
 
(ZDamfmtrge: 
 
 $rintefl at tfte ©niDersitp tfress. 
 
 » 
 
THE 
 
 ELEMENTS 
 
 OF 
 
 RIAC GRAMMA 
 
 BY THE 
 
 KEY. GEORGE PHILLIPS, B.D. 
 
 FELLOW AND TUTOR OF QUEENS’ COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 THE SECOND EDITION , 
 
 WITH 
 
 amendments and additions. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 JOHN W. PARKER, WEST STRAND. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLV. 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2019 with funding from 
 Princeton Theological Seminary Library 
 
 https://archive.org/details/elementsofsyriacOOphil 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 The following “Elements of Syriac Grammar” are 
 intended for the assistance of those Students in He¬ 
 brew, who are desirous of extending their studies to 
 the Syriac language. This object may he easily ac¬ 
 complished, in consequence of the close affinity which 
 exists between the two languages, both in their struc¬ 
 ture as well as in the multitude of words which they 
 possess in common. By bestowing therefore a small 
 portion of time and labour on the study of Syriac, the 
 / Hebrew scholar will he sure to obtain a moderate 
 knowledge of the subject. It is indeed so nearly allied 
 to Hebrew, and especially to Chaldee, that after he 
 has read the Chaldee parts of the Bible he may at 
 once proceed to the reading of Syriac. Such being the 
 case, it becomes important that the student should pos¬ 
 sess himself of the assistance which the Syriac affords 
 him for the better understanding of Hebrew; not to 
 mention that by it he will be brought to an acquaint¬ 
 ance with numerous ecclesiastical documents belonging 
 to the early and middle ages, which treat of the creed 
 
 and practice of the Syrian branch of the church of 
 
 h 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 Christ in those times. The Syriac, as a dialect of the 
 Hebrew, must always he regarded as constituting a 
 source of valuable information for the criticism of the 
 Hebrew Bible. By an examination of a Hebrew word 
 as it is used in this language, essential service has 
 been rendered in elucidating many difficult and im¬ 
 portant passages of Holy Writ; and it has been the 
 constant practice of commentators to have recourse to 
 Syriac, whenever the Text of the Old Testament fails 
 to establish satisfactorily the signification of a word. 
 In such case every person allows that a reference to 
 Syriac is one of the legitimate means to be employed 
 in determining the sense of a passage; and although 
 this language is inferior to Arabic in the extent and 
 variety of its literature, it is nevertheless superior as 
 regards its much more intimate connection with the 
 original language of the Bible. 
 
 But the great claim, as it appears to me, which 
 the Syriac has on the attention of that class of per¬ 
 sons, for whose use this book is intended, consists in 
 the Syriac New Testament. The high antiquity of 
 this version, and its use in the early established Syrian 
 church, stamp an importance on it which can be 
 assigned to no other: and if, in addition to these 
 circumstances it be borne in mind, that the Syriac 
 language is so nearly the same as that spoken in 
 Palestine in the first age of Christianity, that by 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 VI1 
 
 many persons it has been termed the vernacular lan¬ 
 guage of our Lord, it must be allowed that the Syriac 
 New Testament possesses a value inferior only to that 
 which belongs to the original, Michaelis, who de¬ 
 voted his great talents to the study of Syriac, and 
 to an examination of the Syriac version, has en¬ 
 deavoured, in his Introduction to the New Testament, 
 to fix the period when that version was made; and 
 after bringing forward many cogent arguments in 
 favour of its high antiquity, has inferred that it must 
 have existed, either at the end of the first or the 
 beginning of the second century. This great age, 
 and its frequent deviation from the common reading 
 in passages of importance, must recommend the use of 
 it to every critic; and the truth is, that it has been 
 more used than all other sources of critical assistance 
 together. 
 
 From these remarks it will obviously appear desir¬ 
 able that the Hebrew scholar should not rest satisfied 
 till he has obtained a knowledge of the Syriac. To 
 afford facility for this attainment was my great in¬ 
 ducement in sending forth, a few years ago, these 
 Elements of Syriac Grammar to the public; and I 
 rejoice that the book, having been favourably received, 
 has afforded me satisfactory proof that the publication 
 has not entirely failed in being useful. The copies 
 
 of the first impression having been sold off, I have 
 
 bz 
 
Vlll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 now the pleasure of presenting a second Edition, con¬ 
 taining many amendments and additions, which have 
 been made for the purpose of adapting the Grammar 
 to the somewhat more advanced state to which Syriac 
 literature has now gradually arrived. The additions, it 
 will he noticed, are scattered throughout the work. 
 At the end are several pieces of Syriac, with a partial 
 analysis subjoined to each, so that they may serve as 
 first lessons for construing; after which the student, 
 I doubt not, will he fully competent to commence 
 translating the Syriac Testament with no other helps 
 than those of his Grammar and Lexicon. 
 
 In introducing these additions the plan of the 
 Grammar has not been at all disturbed, and I think 
 I may cite, as equally applicable to this republication 
 of the book, the words I employed in the preface to 
 the first Edition when speaking of the manner in 
 which it was executed. “ I have endeavoured to be 
 simple in the arrangement, to account for the vowel 
 changes, and the various inflexions of words by the 
 operation of a very few principles, and to exhibit in a 
 concise form the general structure of the language.” 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Introductory Observations ----- l 
 
 The Alphabet - -- -- -- 6 
 
 Vowels - -- -- -- 8 
 
 Diphthongs - - - - - - -12 
 
 Properties and changes of Consonants - — 
 
 Changes of the Vowels - - - - - -16 
 
 The Diacritic Points, Kushoi and Rukok - - - 18 
 
 Ribui - - - - i - - -28 
 
 Linea Occultans, &c. ----- 24 
 
 Marhetono and Mehagyono - - - - - 26 
 
 Other Diacritic Points - - - - 28 
 
 On the pronunciation of certain letters, &c. - - - 29 
 
 Accent - -- -- --80 
 
 Method of expressing numbers - - - - - 81 
 
 Reading Exercises ------ — 
 
 ✓ 
 
 NOUNS -------- 33 
 
 Gender -------34 
 
 Number --------86 
 
 States of Nouns ------ 39 
 
 Adjectives - - - - - - -51 
 
 Numerals - -- -- -- 53 
 
 PRONOUNS -------- 57 
 
 Personal Pronouns ------ — 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns - - - - - 58 
 
 Relative and Interrogative Pronouns - — 
 
X 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Pronominal Affixes - - - - - 59 
 
 Nouns with Affixes - - - - - - 61 
 
 Example of a masc. noun with Affixes - - - — 
 
 Example of a fem. noun with Affixes 65 
 
 VERBS -------- 68 
 
 Tenses, &c. of the Verbs "jooi and /u] - - - 73 
 
 X 
 
 Paradigm of ^. - 78 
 
 Observations on regular Verbs 80 
 
 Verbs which have a guttural for a rad. letter - - - 84 
 
 The Present Tense, &c. ----- 85 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS . 86 
 
 tt ft 
 
 Verbs or .87 
 
 tr 
 
 ... ^ ._ - 90 
 
 rt 
 
 Paradigm of ^- 2 ) ------ 91 
 
 . 92 
 
 94 
 
 tt tr 
 
 Verbs Q-L or « — - - - - - 96 
 
 ft 
 
 ... ------- 99 
 
 tt 
 
 ...S.- -— 
 
 Paradigm of I>OCLO - - - - - -100 
 
 p 
 
 . .104 
 
 Verbs vb..106 
 
 The Objective affixes attached to Verbs - - - 107 
 
 Paradigm of U-O - - - - - -108 
 
 Observations on Objective affixes - - - - 115 
 
 P 
 
 The Verb lh. with affixes - - - - - 117 
 
 » • • « • « 
 
 ... ^ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XI 
 
 Paradigm of the Verb \v 
 Doubly Defective Verbs 
 Quadriliteral Verbs 
 
 PARTICLES 
 Adverbs - 
 Prepositions - 
 
 Conjunctions and Interjections - 
 
 SYNTAX 
 
 Syntax of Nouns 
 Construction of Adjectives 
 
 .Numerals 
 
 Syntax of Pronouns 
 
 ... Verbs 
 ... Prepositions 
 ... Particles 
 
 Enallage of Persons and Number 
 Ellipsis - 
 
 APPENDIX - 
 
 St John’s Gospel, Chap. n. - 
 Analysis - 
 
 Lessons for Construing 
 
 PAGE 
 
 - 118 
 121 
 
 - 122 
 
 124 
 
 125 
 - 126 
 
 127 
 - 182 
 
 134 
 
 - 135 
 
 141 
 
 - 153 
 154 
 
 - 155 
 156 
 
 - 158 
 164 
 
 - 167 
 
 182 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 rAGK 
 
 LINK 
 
 FOR 
 
 n o n 0 0 
 
 READ 
 
 0 0 P P f> 
 
 10 
 
 17 
 
 q 
 
 w 
 
 < 
 
 ]A v y\n 
 
 30 
 
 5 
 
 *0 
 
 sO 
 
 32 
 
 16 
 
 ^1° 
 
 I 
 
 ^-.(.Lolo 
 
 X 
 
 30 
 
 21 
 
 1 
 
 } 
 
 n\ 
 
 50 
 
 6 
 
 , P ,t 7 
 
 (Id (i^j 
 
 X 
 
 sJ O 
 
 .P 7 • P * p 
 
 IW->? to 
 
 X 
 
 O 
 
 72 
 
 15 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 .*OAJ 
 V •• 
 
 131 
 
 0 
 
 after ( CTlt ) 
 
 insert a comma. 
 
 H 
 
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The Syriac language, a branch of the Shemetic family, 
 was the vernacular tongue of Syria for many ages pre¬ 
 viously to the Christian Era, and continued to he so till 
 the period of the Mahometan invasion of the country, 
 when Arabic being introduced as the sacred language 
 of the conquerors, in a short time entirely superseded 
 that which had been heretofore in use. It was also 
 called Aramean, as the country itself had anciently 
 the designation of Aramea or Aram probably, as is 
 supposed from Aram the son of Shem, by whose de¬ 
 scendants it was peopled. This name seems to have 
 obtained in very remote times, being known to Homer, 
 who calls the inhabitants 'Ape/moi, II. n. 783. The 
 word is found in 2 Kings xviii. 26; Isaiah xxxvi. 11; 
 Ezech. iv. 7, and Daniel ii. 4. 
 
 The early history of the Syrians is but little known. 
 With the exception of a few particulars, which may 
 be gathered from Scripture, little can be said about 
 them till the time they were carried away into the 
 kingdom of Assyria. The country of the Syrians was 
 for a long time subjected to the monarchs of Persia; 
 but soon after the conquests of Alexander it got under 
 Greek rule, and became more prominent among the 
 nations. Seleucus, one of Alexander’s generals, after 
 the death of his master, became governor of Babylon, 
 and, tempted by the example of his brother generals, 
 1 
 
2 
 
 INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 he set up for himself, when, after obtaining some vic¬ 
 tories over Antigonus and Nicanor, he took the title 
 of king of Babylon and Media. He continued on the 
 throne till his death, when he was succeeded by his 
 son and so on, the country being ruled by his family 
 for several generations, the last of whom was Antio- 
 chus, who began to reign B. c. 225. This monarch, 
 possessed of great military talents and being very am¬ 
 bitious, soon engaged in the design of extending his 
 kingdom. Accordingly he undertook an expedition 
 against the Parthians, whom he obliged to conclude a 
 peace on very advantageous terms. He afterwards 
 gained victories in Bactria and India. In the year 
 204 B. c. he entered into a league with Philip of 
 Macedon against Ptolemy Epiphanes, the king of 
 Egypt. He defeated the Egyptian general, and re¬ 
 covered all Palestine and Ccelosyria. After this he 
 invaded Asia Minor in the hopes of reducing it also; 
 but the free cities had recourse to the Romans, who 
 soon made a declaration of war against Antiochus, van¬ 
 quished him first at Thermopylae, and afterwards so 
 completely at Magnesia, that the issue of the battle 
 was, that Syria became a Roman province. Such 
 being, in a few words, the history of this country, we 
 might infer that the language would, in the first place, 
 partake of the Persian Idiom; that many terms and 
 phrases would be common to both languages; and thus 
 we find is the case. Again, for the same reason, many 
 Greek and Latin words have crept into the Syriac, as 
 we perceive from the Peshito version of the New Tes- 
 
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 3 
 
 tament, but more especially from writings of a much 
 later date, such, for instance, as the Chronicles of Bar- 
 Hebrseus. Most of these are nouns, some Greek par¬ 
 ticles are introduced; hut very few verbs appear to 
 have a foreign origin. We will subjoin a few ex¬ 
 amples of such terms, both as they appear in the 
 
 Syriac and in the 
 
 original. 
 
 
 
 Persian 
 
 X 
 
 a lance. 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 silver. 
 
 
 pAi) 
 
 . P 
 
 idol. 
 
 
 »x ^ 
 
 Q_0j.rO 
 
 . 
 
 covering of the head. 
 
 .... 
 
 
 rhinoceros. 
 
 
 » P P 7 
 
 .... 
 
 . 
 
 prefect of the treasury. 
 
 
 2. Greek 
 
 Words. 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 TV7 r09, 
 
 ]mk)o4 
 
 T opus. 
 
 *x o 
 
 (JCU.jp 
 
 9 
 
 KCtVCOV 9 
 
 IUXd 
 
 i 
 
 kAcTs. 
 
 
 761/0?, 
 
 l^aa 
 
 / 
 
 7 TVpryOS. 
 
 U^=i 
 
 opyavoVj 
 
 
 yap. 
 
 7.7 
 
 X 
 
 CtVCtJKt /, 
 
 as 
 
 Se\ 
 
 
 3. Latin 
 
 Words. 
 
 
 O H 
 
 velum , 
 
 e 7 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 candela. 
 
 X 
 
 charta , 
 
 ^ 0 X 
 
 IpJpDCUD 
 
 custodes. 
 
 • 0 0 
 
 X 
 
 palatium , 
 
 . P -X 7 
 
 PO^D 
 
 carruca. 
 
 fA.Sn 
 
 cella , 
 
 jIAXoo ^..co] 
 
 speculator. 
 
 1—2 
 
 i 
 
4 
 
 INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The Arabs and Turks, from their connection with 
 the country, have also exercised an influence over the 
 Syriac language. The Crusades, too, were the means 
 of getting some European words, chiefly proper names , 
 introduced into the Syriac; thus we find ,jclo count , 
 ]_i_, prince , marquis. 
 
 IX 
 
 The Syriac and Chaldee are evidently dialects of 
 the same language, their differences being very small, 
 consisting quite as much in the pronunciation as in 
 grammatical inflexions and constructions. See the 
 Preface. The former was spoken in Western Aramea, 
 and the latter in the Eastern, viz. in the province of 
 Babylon, between the Euphrates and the Tigris. 
 
 The most ancient Syriac writings are said to be 
 the apocryphal Letters, which Abgar the king sent 
 to Christ, and our Lord’s answer. There are also those 
 who think that the original of St Matthew’s and St 
 John’s Gospels, and the Epistle to the Hebrews, were 
 written in Syriac. See Irenaeus adv. Haer. hi. Be 
 this as it may, there is no doubt of the very early 
 existence of a Syriac version of this and of the other 
 Gospels, and it is perhaps the oldest document we know 
 of; for the letter of Abgar was most likely written long 
 after the period to which it refers. 
 
 The Syrians, like many other ancient nations, have 
 laid claim to the invention of letters; but those who 
 have investigated this subject, supposing the art of 
 writing to be a mere human invention and not a divine 
 gift, are inclined to assign the discovery either to the 
 Egyptians or Phoenicians. From the Phoenician or 
 
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 5 
 
 Chaldee characters, they suppose the Syriac were de¬ 
 rived, as well as the ancient and modern Arabic. 
 
 There are two sets of Syriac letters, the one being 
 a modification of the other, or both of them having a 
 common original. They are called the Estrangelo and 
 Peshito; the former is found in the oldest MSS., and in 
 many monumental inscriptions. It is written in Syriac 
 which Asseman, in his Bibl. Orient. Tom. 
 vi. p. 378, supposes to be the same as the Greek word 
 (TTpoyyvXos, round; but as roundness is not a charac¬ 
 teristic of this alphabet, J. D. Michaelis and Adler have 
 sought out another etymology, viz. the Arab. a 
 
 writing and gospel. They suppose these letters 
 
 were .employed in copies of the Scriptures, whilst the 
 more simple alphabet, because it could be written with 
 much greater rapidity, was that which was in use for 
 the common purposes of life. See the Appendix. 
 
 The Nestorians use characters partly resembling 
 the Estrangelo, and partly the Peshito; they occupy 
 as it were a middle place between the two alphabets; 
 and persons accustomed to read these, may readily 
 make out the Nestorian. 
 
 It has been very much the practice of Syrians, 
 since Arabic became the spoken language of the 
 country, to write it with Syriac letters. This mode of 
 writing is called after the name of the inventor Car- 
 shunic. 
 
§. 1. The Syrians, in common with many other 
 
 Eastern 
 
 nations, read from the right hand to the left, 
 
 and have the same number 
 
 of letters, which 
 
 are all 
 
 consonants, as the 
 
 Hebrews. 
 
 
 
 The following 
 
 Table exhibits their forms 
 
 , names, 
 
 powers 
 
 and numerical values. 
 
 
 
 Forms. 
 
 Names. 
 
 Powers. 
 
 Numerical 
 
 Values. 
 
 1 
 
 Olaph 
 
 
 ( H unaspirated 
 ( as in humble 
 
 1 
 
 
 Beth 
 
 L^ 
 
 T> 
 
 B Bh (Y) 
 
 2 
 
 % 
 
 Gomal 
 
 
 G 
 
 3 
 
 J 
 
 Dolath 
 
 ai; 
 
 • 
 
 r> 
 
 4 
 
 01 
 
 He 
 
 001 
 
 H 
 
 5 
 
 0 
 
 Yau 
 
 7 
 
 00 
 
 Y or W 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 Zain 
 
 y 
 
 Z 
 
 7 
 
 
 Cheth 
 
 
 Ch 
 
 8 
 
 
 Tetli 
 
 
 T 
 
 9 
 
 
 Yud 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 
 Y in yes 
 
 10 
 
 D 
 
 Copli 
 
 0 
 
 K or C as in care 
 
 20 
 
 
 Lomad 
 
 • 
 
 L 
 
 30 
 
 So 
 
 Mim 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
 40 
 
 J 
 
 Nun 
 
 •X 
 
 V QJ 
 
 N 
 
 50 
 
 £D 
 
 Semkath 
 
 AnVnm 
 
 S 
 
 60 
 
 
 Ee 
 
 A 
 
 
 70 
 
 
 Pe 
 
 
 P Ph (F) 
 
 80 
 
 
 Tsode 
 
 
 Ts 
 
 90 
 
 n 
 
 Kuph 
 
 v£)CLO 
 
 K 
 
 100 
 
 • 
 
 i 
 
 Rish 
 
 • 
 
 R 
 
 200 
 
 
 Shin 
 
 
 Sh 
 
 300 
 
 z 
 
 Thau 
 
 oil 
 
 T or Th 
 
 400 
 
INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 7 
 
 All the letters except the eight ] > cn o ) ^ 5 L 
 may be joined to the following letter of the word. 
 
 The nine letters 
 
 
 
 2 j id a d j terminating 
 
 a word, receive a slight additional stroke, and are 
 
 written ^ 
 
 
 
 4 - *0 
 
 The five 
 
 d 1 k) j i alter their figure at the end of a word, 
 and are called finals. They retain their usual power, 
 but assume the forms ^o, or 
 
 Care must be taken to distinguish between the 
 following letters, which have nearly the same figure, 
 and differ chiefly in their magnitude. 
 
 1 id 5 a 1 ^ 
 
 * • 
 
 1 D 5 jo J ^ ^ 
 
 2) 
 
 One letter is joined to another by a small hori¬ 
 zontal line drawn from its extremity; as, cn in oil. 
 The exceptions to this are ? £ 5 and 2, which when 
 joined to another letter assume the forms r £ - r and A. 
 
 The following compound characters are frequently 
 used. 
 
 Olaph-Lomad 21 for 1] 
 
 Lomad-Olaph 
 
 Lomad-Lomad 
 
 As Letters of the same organ are frequently 
 changed for one another in the process of deriva¬ 
 tion ; Grammarians have divided the whole Alphabet 
 into classes according to the organ of speech by which 
 they are enounced. 
 
8 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 Gutturals 
 
 Linguals 
 
 Palatals 
 
 Dentals 
 
 Labials 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 01 
 
 4 
 
 SD 
 
 O 
 
 vx 
 
 ^ 0 
 
 
 So 
 
 
 z 
 
 The consonants ] o will frequently become quies¬ 
 cent, i.e. lose their power as consonants; as is the case 
 with the Hebrew vn**- 
 
 2 . Vowels. 
 
 It is probable that the quiescent letters ] o were 
 used in the early stages of the language as vowels, 
 and were the only vowels which in those times were 
 known. The consequence was that many words were 
 not sufficiently defined in writing, and that a vowel was 
 often understood, and had to be supplied in speaking. 
 To meet this defect, which existed at one period or 
 another in the whole family of the Shemetic lan¬ 
 guages, a system of punctuation came gradually into 
 use. The first step taken to meet the wants of the 
 reader was the introduction of a point, which by its 
 position, above or below a word, indicated the proper 
 vowel. The employment of it, however, was very par¬ 
 tial, and its primary object, perhaps, was little more 
 than the determining of those words which, without 
 it, would be ambiguous. See Appendix. When this 
 point was first brought into the written Syriac, it is 
 now impossible to ascertain. Many Grammarians have 
 assigned its invention to the school of Edessa; but 
 although historical testimony on this matter is very 
 
VOWELS. 
 
 9 
 
 imperfect, we are nevertheless inclined to go back to 
 a more remote period. It is pretty certain that it, or 
 something equivalent to it, must have been employed 
 in the third or fourth century, and perhaps much before 
 that time; for Ephraim must have used some note of 
 distinction in his comment on Gen. xxxvi. 24. viz. 
 
 7, 7, y Y . .-n n .pp, « P Y Y y-n. p 
 
 p5aiA 
 
 "X 7 \ 1 ) 
 
 A A 0^1? A olo jacuZU? 
 
 I XX 
 
 A. . It is proper to observe here that we find 
 
 D 7 7 
 
 \$n2> in both Testaments , and not as some un- 
 
 skilful persons have thought. In this observation, 
 Ephraim must have had some mark whereby he could 
 
 distinguish from \fn ^ • and it is likely, if we 
 
 had works older than those of Ephraim, we should 
 be able to recognize a mode of distinction in them, 
 and that mode would probably be by the point we are 
 here speaking of. It is quite clear, however, that had 
 this point been as extensively employed as it is capa¬ 
 ble of being, still it would be quite inadequate for 
 the purposes for which it was intended. The precise 
 vowel could not be known by such a mark; and hence 
 Grammarians set themselves to work to devise some 
 other method of more fully defining the sense and 
 pronunciation of words. Now the Greek language and 
 literature were much known to the Syriac scholars of 
 the time to which we have referred, and their atten¬ 
 tion having been brought to the imperfect condition of 
 their vowel system ; and, further, having been able to 
 
10 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 observe the accuracy of the Greek, they perceived that 
 its vowels might he advantageously engaged in the 
 service of their own language. Two modes of repre¬ 
 senting these said vowels were adopted about or nearly 
 at the same time; one was by means of one or two 
 points being placed in different positions, and the 
 other was by writing above or below the word the 
 Greek signs themselves, with some slight change in 
 their forms. This system of punctuation was begun by 
 Theophilus of Edessa, according to Asseman (see his 
 Bibli. Orient. Tom. i. p. 64), and was advanced step 
 by step till it was brought to its present state of per¬ 
 fection. Theophilus died about the year 791 of our 
 era. 
 
 Vowels, by native Grammarians, are called some¬ 
 times by one and sometimes by another of the fol- 
 
 OOOO 0 p 0 0 # 
 
 lowing names : A v A n vocals : letters without 
 
 a word; ]Lo] motions; ) A« m sounds; po¬ 
 
 sitions; Ivoqj points. 
 
 The following Table exhibits their names, powers 
 and forms : 
 
 
 Names. 
 
 Pethocho 
 
 Power. 
 
 a 
 
 Figure. 
 
 Syr. Greek. 
 
 • y 
 
 • 
 
 Alpha 
 
 1 s= ,} 
 
 Revotso 
 
 e 
 
 ID 
 
 • •• 
 
 sD 
 
 Epsilon 
 
 
 Chevotso 
 
 i 
 
 
 JD 
 
 I 
 
 Iota 
 
 iiLQi 
 
 Zekofo 
 
 0 
 
 
 0 
 
 ^D 
 
 Omicron 
 
 Ivr 
 
 Etsotso 
 
 u 
 
 • 
 
 OO QJD 
 • 
 
 ♦X 
 
 QJD 
 
 Upsilon. 
 
VOWELS. 
 
 11 
 
 The points of the vowel Zekofo may coalesce 
 with the point of the letter 5, as, oii Roll-tin. 
 
 x 
 
 The vowel Etsotso is always accompanied with o 
 
 except in the two words ^ cul , M’tul. 
 
 When no vowel is expressed, then as in the 
 Hebrew, a Sheva (or one of its substitutes) will he 
 implied and read accordingly. 
 
 Vowels may he divided into two classes: pure , i. e. 
 those which complete their syllables: and impure , 
 i. e. those which do not complete the syllable with¬ 
 out the addition of a terminating consonant. 
 
 Pure Vowels are 
 
 When followed by 
 a quiescent *) O or _» 
 
 / 
 
 as Ma-lepk. 
 
 Ethekel. 
 
 'Ts 
 
 u. 
 
 • 0 Q 
 
 _ e as K’tho-bo. 
 
 • *X 
 
 o -x vQCLSU Ne-puk. 
 
 Impure Vowels are 
 
 y m. e 7 
 
 _ 7 as in ^ cad. (SoA dda-mo. 
 
 9 9 
 
 _ -x . _Ao Men. 
 
 _ . 12a i-do-tho. 
 
 Final syllables are often, as in Hebrew, anoma¬ 
 lously long, on account perhaps of the accent; as, 
 
12 
 
 VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 > <^ ) ? A-pin, where 1 occurs with two consonants, 
 
 i 
 
 so also A-»l LJL voAj] 7 ^Ajf, &c. 
 
 X H " 
 
 The Greek vowels are more frequently used than 
 the others in modern books. 
 
 3. Diphthongs. 
 
 There are several diphthongs made by the letters 
 Vau and Yud, which losing their own powers coalesce 
 with the preceding vowel and form one syllable. 
 
 Vau makes four diphthongs au , eu, iu , ou. 
 
 The first occurs in the beginning, middle and end 
 of words, and is produced by the vowel v preceding 
 
 o; as, au-kel , he fed , ]SooI Tsau-mo , the fast , 
 
 -7N ^ 
 
 ojcn ho-nau , /AAs* ««?. 
 
 The second e?/, by the vowel ^ preceding a_»; as, 
 ^cno_iAj*|, j Esh-teu, I will drink it. 
 
 ** 'n 'h 
 
 The third in by a chevotso preceding a_*; as, 
 L i . Nsliad-riu 9 he will send him. 
 
 % 
 
 X 
 
 The fourth ou is when o is preceded by another 
 
 o with * x ; as, Shou-do-yo 9 promise. 
 
 Yud makes two diphthongs, ai and oi: ai by ? 
 
 before _>; as, A . G’laith , thou hast revealed: oi is 
 
 effected by before ^; as, w*<ti hoi 9 she. 
 
 4. Properties and Changes of Consonants. 
 
 Consonants possess various properties and undergo 
 certain changes arising from the influence of vowels; 
 or other causes, which we proceed to mention. 
 
PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 13 
 
 The letters ) o j when they are not pronounced, 
 but rest in the sound of the vowel on the preceding 
 letter, are called quiescent. 
 
 Olaph final rests in e or as, K the man , 
 1 ,^ 1 ^ the men: except the four verbs / he was 
 
 y v 
 
 y 7 
 
 7 7 ' 
 
 impure , ]»o he was comforted, he polluted , 
 
 T\ 
 
 he was decorated. 
 
 Olaph in the middle of a word rests in * or 1 ; 
 as, to eat, jio}So to say. Yud is sometimes 
 
 'tS X 
 
 changed into Olaph quiescent in x ; as, ,Z4So to beget , 
 
 'IS X 
 
 for . 
 
 'IS I 
 
 Yud usually rests in ^ or 1 ; as, he begun , 
 
 X 
 
 is, but. 
 
 X is 
 
 Vau deprived of a vowel is for the most part qui¬ 
 escent in x ; as, ^oo_o rise , !>oq2 day. It is also used 
 as the fulcrum, or, as it is technically termed, the 
 
 mater lectionis of this vowel; as, 
 
 'is 
 
 In foreign words Vau is frequently found to be 
 quiescent in the vowel o ; as, sdoP eter , *cdqjo>2 
 
 'IS 
 
 throne. 
 
 The letters ] o when they are placed after an¬ 
 other consonant, which is without a vowel, cannot be 
 pronounced ; hut they are nevertheless written for the 
 sake of orthography or etymology. In such instances 
 these letters are said to be otiose. 
 
 Olaph in the pronouns ^oAj! 7 and ^Aj] 7 , when they 
 
14 
 
 PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 are added to participles for the sake of forming the 
 present tense, is otiose; as, ^Aj] V -Af\ n kot-litun , 
 
 “ i 
 
 and Sa A kot-loten, ye slay, masc. and fem. 
 
 Vau and Yud in the end of a word, when the 
 preceding letter has no vowel, are also otiose; as, 
 
 o tital, they slew, masc. tital, they slew, 
 
 fem. ktid, slay thou , imper. fem. 
 
 Yud is likewise otiose in the pronoun ^Aj] 7 at, 
 
 thou; in certain affixes; as, . * malk, my king, 
 
 ktho-heh, thy hook . And in some substantives 
 
 'is 
 
 and adverbs; as, . ».\« shel, tranquillity, ^Akd, when ? 
 
 'is 'Is 
 
 It is supposed by many grammarians that Yud was 
 pronounced in ancient times, and this supposition derives 
 support from the usage in Arabic and Hebrew; for we 
 
 have which are pronounced chali and akzari; 
 
 we have also in the New Testament pafifiowl, John xx. lb; 
 ra\iOd kou/jli, Mark v. 41 ; and other similar expressions. 
 
 Consonants are sometimes omitted in writing; as, 
 end for especially in compound words; as, 
 
 man for for . ] although. The 
 
 'IS / 7v' 
 
 first radical ^ of Hebrew words sometimes drops off; 
 
 as, ^ one, Heh. in^ * Words which have the middle 
 radical doubled, on many occasions lose one of them; 
 
 thus, and . « ^ he perceived, nest from 
 
 n\ 
 
 Vau and Yud fall off in nearly the same manner 
 and in the same situations as in Hebrew, which may 
 
PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 15 
 
 be immediately observed by inspecting tbe paradigms 
 of tbe classes of verbs beginning with these letters. 
 
 Letters are sometimes added to words for the sake 
 of euphony. Thus, Olaph is prefixed to many words 
 beginning with Yud; as, hand for jvnVo day 
 
 for IsqSo, . 
 
 There are some Greek nouns, which are sometimes 
 written with an Olaph at the beginning and sometimes 
 
 •X 7 1* >x 7 p 7 -n 
 
 without; as, ^coojl^l^cd] Stephen; 
 
 v a_. r ^TDo stadium. 
 
 Olaph prosthetic occurs also in the verbs and 
 
 x 
 
 as, he drunh , and he found. 
 
 X T> 7 \ 
 
 We have also ] •^ hero from Mill, where the 
 Nun seems to be a compensation for the Dagesh forte 
 in Hebrew and Chaldee. In some words of Greek 
 origin there is a duplication of the Nun; as, .ran j m ra 
 synod, for ^cccjJoxd . 
 
 A great number of Hebrew words become Syriac 
 words by the change of one or more of their letters. 
 
 f is changed into 
 
 ? as, 
 
 ini 
 
 T T 
 
 gold. 
 
 . P 7 
 
 x . 
 
 4 - 
 
 ■nx 
 
 rock. 
 
 ’^4 
 
 w . 
 
 i ... 
 
 bw 
 
 snow, 
 
 
 1 . 
 
 Ol ... 
 
 rn 
 
 he run. 
 
 4m 
 
 n . 
 
 | or j ... 
 
 rfci 
 
 T T 
 
 he revealed. 
 
 
 sometimes into 
 
 %£D ... 
 
 T T 
 
 Jlesh, 
 
 flXLCi 
 
 3 . 
 
 • 
 
 3 
 
 • - : 
 
 two. 
 
 is 
 
 n . 
 
 4 ... 
 
 nyn 
 
 T T 
 
 he wandered. 
 
 ]i4. 
 
16 
 
 CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 5. Changes of the Vowels. 
 
 Inflexions of words are in numerous cases ef¬ 
 fected by vowels; certain vowels being selected as 
 characteristic of different forms of the same word. 
 The correspondence between Syriac and Hebrew vowels 
 is as follows: 
 
 Pethocho (?) to Patach (-); as, mnVn . izbn Ms 
 
 The vowel Revotso (f) corresponds generally to 
 the Hebrew as, jaA^Z, TipSfi thou shall visit. 
 
 - 7 \ 
 
 Chevotso (x) to the Hebrew — ; as, ncnv for 
 
 x 
 
 Zekofo to Kamets t ; as, ^ 05 ], LHK man , 
 he revealed. 
 
 Etsotso ( x ) to Cholem, Kametschatuph, Shurek and 
 Kibbuts; as, ]_»5 Q_o, holiness , £Hp; bs all. 
 
 Olaph in the beginning of a word, and also Ee 
 in the same situation, when it is before cn, instead of 
 being according to analogy without a vowel, will receive 
 a vowel, for the most part * or v ; as, for ; 
 
 v * c V 
 
 5CTLL tor 5CTLL. 
 
 • • 
 
 Yud observes the same rule at the beginning of 
 a word, and takes the vowel x ; as, orphan, for 
 
 The foregoing rule holds good also for the letters 
 Olaph, Vau and Yud when they begin a syllable; the 
 vowel in such places is remitted to the preceding letter, 
 
CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 17 
 
 if it has been previously without one; except when 
 the Olaph, Vau or Yud is followed by two consonants 
 in the same syllable. A full exhibition of these prin¬ 
 ciples may be seen by looking at the irregular verbs. 
 
 When two consonants come together at the begin¬ 
 ning of a syllable, which is sometimes the case in 
 the beginning of a word, in consequence of prefixing 
 prepositions or conjunctions not having a vowel; also 
 in the middle of a word from inflexion ; the former 
 consonant will receive a vowel; for the most part T"; 
 
 but also ——-——; as, ]»v>.« A for ]» Vo » ^ in heaven , 
 for )l d ^e letter , for ZZL^oZ] she was 
 
 'IS * 
 
 slain , glory for This is analo¬ 
 
 gous to the Hebrew, when the former of two Shevas 
 coming together in the beginning of a syllable, is 
 generally changed into t . 
 
 Vowels are sometimes cast away: when another 
 syllable is added to a word, the final vowel is cast 
 
 away; as, Z^Q£> the feminine of he visited. But 
 
 is ' 
 
 it is preserved, 1st. if a letter only be added; as, 
 7 ,o^ thou hast visited; 2nd. if the consonant from 
 the analogy of the Hebrew ought to have a Dagesh 
 forte; thus people; in the definite state 
 3rd. the vowels ^ and o are preserved; as, . - o 
 
 iJd; 
 
 • \ 
 
 X X 
 
 Zekofo in nouns of the definite state, when it is 
 followed by ooi is, is changed into Pethocho, so that 
 
 2 
 
18 
 
 CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 it may make a diphthong with o; as, ooi da-go- 
 lau , lie is a liar , for ccn ]1^>; qjoi ho-nau, this is , 
 
 for ocn jiai and this for ooi jjai. 
 
 Transposition of vowels takes place; especially in 
 nouns of one syllable; thus, man, definite state 
 
 holiness , definite state ; many other 
 
 examples will he given in the Chapter on nouns; also 
 the prepositions and ^o?qjd with the prefix 
 
 Lomad become \\A n n^\ and ^olooS, and in certain 
 compounded particles a transposition takes place; as, 
 
 for jiDji until. 
 
 6 . The Diacritic Points, Kushoi and Rutcotc. 
 
 The Syrians have no marks corresponding to the 
 Dagesh forte of the Hebrews; hut they use a point 
 for the letters 
 
 This point when it is situated above a letter takes 
 away the aspiration, and when placed below preserves 
 
 it. In the former case it is called Kushoi , which 
 
 signifies hardness , and in the latter Ruhok, 
 
 softness. In Manuscripts these points are made with 
 red ink. 
 
 Kushoi is used in the above-mentioned letters, 
 when any one of them begins a word; as, son , 
 
 p ? 
 
 man. 
 
 But if one of the letters 
 
 vO 3 o 
 
 be 
 
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND RUKOK. 
 
 19 
 
 prefixed, then the radical receives a Rukok; 
 
 o 7 £> 7 
 
 as, li^b, \ . 
 
 If one of the letters ) o .. be before one of the 
 
 the latter takes the sign Rukok; as, 
 
 i (am) the Creator; | . »V I (am) chosen. 
 
 • ^ 
 
 If the first letter of a noun be without a vowel, 
 then the second will receive a Rukok; as, breaking , 
 
 ]AAj filth, a hank. 
 
 The of father , according to Sciadrensis, 
 has a Rukok when a natural father, but a Kushoi 
 when a spiritual father is meant. See his Grammar, 
 
 P- }y 
 
 Those nouns which have ? to the first letter and 
 consist of four letters, the third takes a Kushoi; as, 
 
 sin, ) K^ a house; if, however, the noun be 
 feminine, then the third letter receives Rukok; as, 
 
 a daughter , a female slave , a garden. 
 
 If the noun consist of five letters, the third has 
 a Kushoi, and the fourth a Rukok; as, A a 
 
 star , l A^Vr) a queen , a generation. There 
 
 • • 
 
 are, however, a few which take a Rukok on the third, 
 and a Kushoi on the fourth; as, ]\ ^ Vn a teacher , 
 
 * In this and the following remarks, when a Kushoi or Rukok 
 is spoken of as attached to a letter, a letter is always 
 
 meant. 
 
 2—2 
 
20 
 
 THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOl AND RUKOK. 
 
 V’r-Q an ape , ] A\lvn a walk or path, fAniiiD an 
 edition. 
 
 Again, with respect to nouns consisting of six 
 letters, the third takes Kushoi, but the fourth and 
 
 pi y o y -j ♦ • v 
 
 fifth Rukok; as, IL,j_q candle , ], .»vn\Z disciple , 
 
 • • 
 
 • • i 
 
 lA^oio knowledge. A few nouns receive Kushoi in 
 
 the fifth; as, ]A^lqdoZ addition , ]/ \_« A\ 7 clothing. 
 
 If v he placed to the second letter of a noun, 
 then the third letter, if it possesses a vowel, will 
 
 take Kushoi; as, 14-^ new 9 splendour , &c But 
 
 if the letter which follows ? be without a vowel, then 
 the one after this will receive Rukok; as, \LJih a 
 
 bird , IAsoqj revenge , ] A\^m foolish. Four, however, 
 
 have a Kushoi on the fourth letter, viz. an 
 
 island , *|/\\ a heifer , IZfru burning , and « 
 
 chariot. 
 
 The letter after % if it be without a vowel, re¬ 
 ceives a Rukok; as, a finger , « foot, 
 
 an ear, ] AVno L wisdom. There are a few exceptions, 
 
 which are mentioned by Sciadrensis. 
 
 When nouns consist of four letters, the first having 
 
 % the third will take Rukok; as, ] A\vn a word , 
 
 * 
 
 )4,.rn a wing. Exceptions are ).n.« 4 darkness , )nni 
 a hole , ]£;! evening , ornament , /m?V, 
 
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND RUKOK. 
 
 21 
 
 If the vowel * be placed on the second letter of 
 a noun, then the third letter, if it have a vowel, re¬ 
 ceives a Kushoi; hut if it be quiescent, then it takes 
 Hukok; also, if after this there conies another letter, 
 
 it receives Kushoi; 
 
 vine, cheese, 
 
 a plant, |v> phlegm, a heifer . 
 
 A letter, which comes after x , whether it has a 
 vowel or not, always takes Rukok; as, ],♦. . i m victory , 
 
 work, ^. vn\ ) a disciple; hut if another letter 
 
 comes between, then the Le xd—i-o receives Kushoi; 
 as, }h]s just, Ua a congregation. 
 
 If a letter of a noun take p, then the following 
 one, whether with or without a vowel, has Rukok; 
 
 as, good, X*ii fruit. 
 
 The letter of a noun which comes after the vowel 
 *, if it he itself without a vowel, receives a Rukok; 
 
 as, beauty, first-born; but if the said 
 
 letter has a vowel, then the point attached to it is 
 
 Kushoi; as, }i>Z<L» silence. 
 
 A letter elided, as there is no compensation by 
 Dagesh, the elision is indicated by Kushoi; as in verbs, 
 
 ^ and q_l and their derivatives; as, ^amZZ 
 
 for ye will slay. 
 
 These points serve for distinguishing several words 
 which have the same letters and vowels; as, 
 
22 
 
 THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND RUKOK. 
 
 disgrace has > hard, and pity has 5 soft; 
 
 p y 
 
 a heap of corn has 5 hard, and }Zo r ^ joy has > soft. 
 
 This is also the case with verbs in many instances; 
 
 In many words, which have been imported into the 
 Syriac from the Greek or some foreign language, the 
 aspirated letters are accustomed to be pronounced in 
 the same way as they are in that language from which 
 
 # y 
 
 they are derived; as, .m >cn ]\n 5 y\aixv$ 9 
 
 X t 
 
 #€ 0 X 070 ?, 1 ,» ^n\ Xa/x 7 rd?: 7 r of the Greeks is in Syriac 
 
 represented by ^ and (p by See on this subject 
 
 Hoffman’s Grammar, pp. 115, 116. In other places, 
 besides those which have been mentioned where Kushoi 
 is found, its usage may be explained by considering it 
 as analogous to that of Dagesh lene in Hebrew. 
 
 According to Amira and the old grammarians, 
 Kushoi never doubles a letter; but on the other 
 hand it must be said that the Eastern Syrians in this 
 respect followed the analogy of the Hebrew: we have 
 also 'Pafifit, Master , John iii. 2, and in the writings 
 of St Paul we have ’A/3/3a, Father . If this duplication 
 be not admitted, then it is important to state that in 
 such cases where it would be implied, the preceding 
 
 7 7 
 
 vowel will complete the syllable; thus, tab-bar 
 
 or ta-bar. 
 
THE DIACRITIC POINTS, RIBUI. 
 
 23 
 
 7. Ribui. 
 
 Many nouns and verbs have the same form in 
 both numbers. In such cases it was found necessary 
 to employ some mark of distinction. For this purpose 
 
 Grammarians have invented the sign Ribui (_o^5) 
 
 x 
 
 consisting of two horizontal* dots (••) placed above the 
 word, to denote the plural number. The following 
 words will illustrate the use of this sign. 
 
 fcbAl orphan, 
 book, 
 
 « >.cno2] teas covered, 
 
 x 
 
 7 
 
 - » he arrived, 
 
 x 
 
 libAl orphans. 
 
 n\ 
 
 books. 
 
 •• y « 
 
 . . ran/ | were covered. 
 
 x 
 
 ••7 
 
 they arrived, (fem.) 
 
 A plural noun ending in ^ or I has no need 
 
 of the sign Ribui; since the number is already in¬ 
 dicated by the termination. 
 
 It is sometimes used with a noun of multitude; 
 
 o 0 
 
 as, a flock of sheep , to distinguish it from 
 a sheep. 
 
 If it be placed over the letter Rish, one of the 
 points coalesces with the point belonging to Rish; 
 
 as, 1 ;o A a herd of oxen . 
 
 Prepositions with pronominal affixes referring to 
 plural nouns receive these points; as, ^oor^ > . 
 
 * Ribui is placed obliquely in ^ and thus, 
 
24 
 
 LINES. 
 
 To this rule there are a few exceptions; as, 
 
 and which are never seen with this sign. 
 
 The numerals, according to some grammarians, do 
 not receive the points except when they are joined 
 
 to pronominal affixes; as, "(ASZ, v aiLi)Z, 
 
 ^A^Z. 
 
 Besides the name wiool, which is given to these 
 points, they are also called by native grammarians, 
 
 }V) •; m positions , ]^n / drops , and "jv-oaj points. 
 
 8. Lines. 
 
 A small line is sometimes found above and some¬ 
 times beneath a letter of a word. 
 
 It is found above a letter principally in the fol¬ 
 lowing instances, 
 
 1 . In abbreviated words; as, ps for ]« .,n holy * 
 
 i 
 
 2 . When letters are used to express numbers; 
 
 13 . 
 
 _ — o 
 
 3. In the Particle of Exclamation o] Of to 
 
 7 
 
 distinguish it from the particle ol or. 
 
 When it is found beneath a letter, it directs 
 that such letter is not read, and is therefore generally 
 called the linea occultans. Thus, Z*i Bath not 
 Barth , a daughter. It is found, 
 
 (l) In nouns with the middle radical doubled; 
 as, )i i vn Manna , ]1\Z a stag. 
 
 ~ 'h 
 
 7o 
 
 * 01 for QJOl that is , occurs frequently in ecclesiastical 
 writings, and especially in the Commentaries of Ephraim Syrus. 
 
LINES. 
 
 25 
 
 ( 2 ) With Olaph in the beginning of a word 
 in many instances; as, . - i ] a man, 
 
 " x “ 
 
 another; especially in the pronoun |i], as 
 
 'TS 
 
 often as it is used in the place of the 
 substantive verb; as, w w i am. 
 
 “ 'IS 
 
 (3) With Dolath when it is without a vowel 
 and placed before Thau; as, 12^*1 new. 
 
 (4) With He in the following cases, 
 
 {a) In affixes; as . .rn nnVn his kings, 
 
 he called him. 
 
 (b) In the verb ]ooi was, when it is redun¬ 
 dant, when it is the logical copula, or 
 when it assists in forming the imperfect 
 and pluperfect tenses; as, looi ^cnoA.,] he 
 
 x 
 
 was, ]ocn , he was visiting, ]ocn nos 
 
 TS 
 
 he had visited. But when it is used in the 
 sense of to be, to exist, the line is not 
 found. 
 
 (c) In the pronouns oot and ^<n, when they 
 
 i 
 
 are put for the logical copula; as, ooi 
 
 'K 
 
 my body is. 
 
 (d) In words derived from the Greek, . . vn nm; 
 
 X “ 
 
 Rome . 
 
 (e) In the verb he gave. 
 
 (5) With uw in when it comes after the 
 
 active participle used as a present tense; 
 as, -j-jd, we create. 
 
26 
 
 LINES. 
 
 (6) With Lomad in some forms of the verb 
 ^1; as, departing, fern. 
 
 is “ 
 
 v v 
 
 (7) With Nun in the four pronouns A/|, 
 
 •x v y 0 
 
 , ,__»Aj] and in some nouns; as, ] Ai > ^rr> 
 the ship. 
 
 (8) Rish in a daughter. 
 
 When a line is found under a letter in a verb 
 of the imperative mood of a passive conjugation, it 
 implies that such letter is deprived of its vowel; as, 
 
 ^guoZ] Ethkatl. 
 
 “ n\ 
 
 9. Marhetono and Mehagyono. 
 
 In many words, when two letters come together, 
 each without a vowel, a line is placed sometimes 
 above and sometimes below the first of these letters. 
 
 In the former case it is called Marhetono , 
 making to run from to run ) and in the latter 
 
 Mehagyono ( ]i > according to Amira from ]^oi 
 
 to meditate; but according to Hoffman and others 
 from the Arab. to connect; for the two letters by 
 this sign are connected and make a syllable. These 
 lines seem to be used only in certain words, and in 
 the first instance for purposes of poetry. The poetry 
 of the Syrians, as appears from the specimens which 
 remain, (see for instance the hymns of Ephraim,) con¬ 
 sisted in having a certain number of syllables in a 
 line; and hence it woidd be convenient, in many cases. 
 
MARHETONO AND MEHAGYONO. 
 
 27 
 
 to give to some words an additional syllable. To in¬ 
 dicate this addition, a line was put beneath the first 
 of the two letters without a vowel, which had the 
 force generally of Revotso, but occasionally of Pethocho; 
 
 as, i- e. a ring; i. e. fear. 
 
 When this additional syllable is in such words not 
 required to complete the measure, the Marhetono is 
 written, and denotes that its letter and the following 
 have no vowels. It corresponds to the Sheva in He¬ 
 brew, except that the latter is employed according to 
 general rules, whilst the former is used only in par¬ 
 ticular words, and in these words only under certain 
 circumstances. Grammarians, however, are not fully 
 agreed as to the primary use and signification of these 
 lines, and it is not now of much consequence, if we 
 cannot make ourselves fully acquainted with them. 
 It is supposed, by some persons, that the Mehagyono 
 is found only when the following letter is 5 ^; 
 
 but to these, others add <n, others oj, and others 
 o ]. Again, whether every word which has one 
 line, must, in a different situation, have the other; 
 or whether some words have only one of the lines 
 and others only the other, it is impossible to say, 
 and happily it is not important to determine. Who¬ 
 ever is curious to know more of this subject, may 
 have his curiosity satisfied by consulting the chapter 
 on these lines in the Syriac Grammar of Sciadrensis, in 
 
 p. . 
 
28 
 
 OTHER DIACRITIC POINTS. 
 
 10. Other Diacritic Points. 
 
 It has been stated, in page 8, that a point was 
 sometimes used which, by its position either above or 
 below the word, would determine the true pronunciation 
 and meaning; when without it and without the vowel 
 points, it would be ambiguous: thus, anil for cnX to 
 
 p 
 
 him; ai^ for oi^ to her. It is also frequently used 
 as a note of Interrogation, Exclamation, Admiration, 
 Command, &c. For a further account of the various 
 offices which this point performs, see the Appendix. 
 
 There are also certain signs for marking the end 
 of a sentence, and subdividing it into clauses, of which 
 the following are the principal. 
 
 (1) At the end of a period are found four points 
 (•:•) or 
 
 (2) Two points placed obliquely from the right 
 hand towards the left, finish a clause, 
 and are equivalent to our colon ; thus, 
 
 •]«^ ]]_kj p When Jesus 
 
 i. 
 
 saw the multitudes. 
 
 These points are sometimes put as a sign 
 of interrogation. 
 
 (3) Two points placed obliquely from the left 
 hand to the right, thus (•*), split the clause 
 into different members, and are equivalent 
 
OTHER DIACRITIC POINTS. 
 
 29 
 
 to our comma or semicolon. They are fre¬ 
 quently placed perpendicularly (•'). 
 
 These points are sometimes found after a 
 long interrogation, see Matt. xii. 10. 
 
 (4) One point frequently ends a period. 
 
 11. On the Pronunciation of certain Letters when they are 
 
 under peculiar circumstances. 
 
 These letters are differently pronounced in different 
 situations. Olaph is pronounced as Yud, 
 
 (1) When it is preceded by another Olaph; as, 
 5]j oyar 9 air. 
 
 (2) When it is followed by another Olaph with- 
 
 00 
 
 out a vowel; as, ]|lk) m'loyo 9 fulness. 
 
 (3) When it is the second letter of the par¬ 
 ticiple peal; as, io] l tso-yem, fasting. 
 
 Vau is pronounced as v when it begins a word or 
 syllable; as, o va 9 o ve, o vi: in other places it has 
 
 'fS ,x 
 
 the sound of u or w. 
 
 Yud in the beginning of a word with the vowel 
 1 is not pronounced. It preserves only the sound of 
 its vowel; as, Inek 9 lie sucked; Ikar 9 lie was 
 
 'TS X I 
 
 heavy. Hence we find that before a Yud of that kind 
 Olaph is sometimes placed, and the vowel belonging 
 
 to the Yud is transferred to the Olaph; thus, a 
 
 X 
 
 hand 9 from the Hebrew T, is written 1^1. The pro¬ 
 nunciation of either word is the same. 
 
30 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 1 when followed by Rukok, or ^ either with a 
 
 p 
 
 Rukok or Kushoi, is pronounced like je; as, Uv^ 
 
 gestho , wool; s'/co, he conquered. Some persons 
 add that i is so pronounced when ^ comes after it; 
 
 as, s'kifo , a cross; & when followed by one of 
 
 the letters j is pronounced like y; as, 
 
 chezdo, mercy; . » A%gi, 1 will multiply. If Z 
 with a Rukok come after ^ or each of these 
 letters has the force of ; as, rehtho , lust; 
 
 IAjdiZ* ezhtho, a ring. 
 
 12. Accent. 
 
 Grammarians have given a few rules for placing 
 the Accent. 
 
 1 . In words of two syllables, if the first sylla¬ 
 ble terminate in a consonant without a vowel, this 
 
 syllable has the accent; as, Rdm-sho, evening; 
 
 gar mo, hone . 
 
 2. If on the contrary the final letter of the word 
 be without a vowel, then the accent is put on the 
 
 second syllable; as, jX I-led , he begat; Po-lced, 
 
 visiting. Should each syllable be formed in that man¬ 
 ner, then each is affected with the accent; as, l 7 cx* 
 Pek-ddth , she has visited. 
 
 3 . In words consisting of more than two syllables, 
 the accent is generally placed on the penultimate; as, 
 
METHOD OF EXPRESSING NUMBERS. 
 
 31 
 
 Po-rdch-tho , bird; ]A^gld]1d Me-kultho , meat; 
 
 'TS 
 
 y ; (n Marth-yo-nu-tho , admonition. 
 
 13. The method of expressing Numbers. 
 
 This is done by the letters and by the assistance 
 of a few marks. Numbers of any magnitude may be 
 expressed, as in the following Table. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 • 
 
 or 
 
 0 
 
 1 
 
 OJ 
 
 4. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 «—t 
 
 
 
 ^0 
 
 J 
 
 s£D 
 
 Vi 
 
 %£) 
 
 S 
 
 J2> 
 
 • 
 
 or 1 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 3 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 01 
 
 9 
 
 0 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 • 
 
 WJ 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 40 
 
 50 
 
 6 o 
 
 70 
 
 80 
 
 90 
 
 100 
 
 • 
 
 5 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 © 
 
 
 ^0 
 
 • 
 
 J 
 
 %£D 
 
 • 
 
 vi 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 <> 
 
 
 
 200 
 
 300 
 
 400 
 
 500 
 
 6 00 
 
 700 
 
 800 
 
 900 
 
 
 
 , 1 
 
 1000 
 
 \ 
 
 2000 
 
 &c. 
 
 i 10,000 
 
 ^2) : 
 
 20,000 
 
 &c. 
 
 Fractions 
 
 are 
 
 written thus, 
 
 1 i 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 A 
 
 | &C. 
 
 
 If it be required to add a smaller number to a 
 greater, that is, to express a number consisting of units, 
 tens, hundreds, &c. the letter indicating the greater is 
 put on the right hand of that indicating the less; thus, 
 235. 
 
 14. Heading Exercises. 
 
 Matth. VI. 9—13. 
 
 7 7 
 
 m.'fs o • • y % • 0 y y + o y •• y ** 
 
 joou \L\L 4 ^ v ao| 
 
 'Ti I 
 
 1 0 -7 .7 7 P «s7 *0 •• 7 * p o *7 p p -n 
 
 ^ v^cn . siZ)| (jl,q .j 
 
32 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 I P ^ P 7 .7 7-7 .7 9 s P -P 07 JO 9 . 
 
 ? f.i a. ( ^-x^o-Ka ^ x_oq_cl_»o .(.iV)Q^ i mom; 
 
 P 7 P P -X 7 7 P — 7 p 7 7 7 
 
 VI l in x ra i \ ^ Vo - ^ O X XX V, Qn • _jlk» 
 
 p * o 7 p * y o *. » 
 
 ]IujOO..»Zo (i-i—KiO lZon\V? w_.cn ^.Ijd ,_Sd 
 
 7\ X X 71 I 7* 
 
 .^x-lnli ioSil 
 
 X 
 
 The same in English Characters . 
 
 A-bun dvash-ma-yo neth-ka-dash sh’moc. Ti-the 
 mal-cu-thoc neh-ve tsev-yo-noc ai-ka-no d’vash-ma-yo 
 oph bar-bo. Hav lan lach-mo d’sun-ko-nan yau-mo-no. 
 Vash-buk lan chau-bain ai-ka-no doph ch’nan sh’vakn 
 l’cha-yo-bain. V’lo tba-lan l’nes-yu-no e-lo pa-tson 
 men bi-sho me-tul d’di-loc hi mal-cu-tho v’chai-lo 
 v’thesh-buch-tho 1’olam ol-min. 
 
 Luke XXII. 63 — 65 . 
 
 7 7 -X .7 . 7.^7 
 
 CTLO 0001 v i. ^Q.« > \ 0001 ,.n 
 
 » " i » ii 
 
 •• 7 . f. 7 . 7 -T> P . 7 77 
 
 W_|01QJ2>| OlA 0001 ,OlA 0001 . x » . X Vnn 
 
 “7 ^ "* ^ 71 
 
 p •• o 7 o o •• P 7 0 *X 7 p 7 p 
 
 ]Z1 i.,^-CQ lAj-J^lo o lV) ]jqjZ| ^r^l 0 
 
 .w_.aioZLl _.^d]o oocn » <=> 1 , .. Vn 
 
 - v 
 
 The same in English Characters. 
 
 V’gav-re da-chi-din vau l’ye-shu m’-vaz-chin vau beh, 
 vam-cha-pen vau leh. V’mo-chen vau leh al a-pau 
 vom-rin eth-na-bo ma-nu m'choc vach-ron-yo-tho 
 za-gi-yo-tho m’gad-pin vau vom-rin a-lau. 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 15. The simplest forms of nouns are those which 
 consist only of the letters composing the root; as, 
 king, sacrifice. Such words are evidently 
 
 ns ns 
 
 in their primitive state. 
 
 The augmented forms will consist of the root 
 augmented by one or more of the letters ] o ^ j Z, 
 
 which to assist the memory may he called wAjoAd) # 
 
 i ns 
 
 Thus, ooirk) an altar from sacrifice; 
 
 * X 
 
 disciple from r VnX he learned. 
 
 ns 
 
 These letters are probably abbreviations of words, 
 and the signification of them qualifies that of the 
 primitive word to which they are united. 
 
 Nouns having (-) with the first radical, and (©1) 
 with the second, are generally nouns signifying persons; 
 
 as, |kxi^5 a friend; whilst those having (ol) with 
 the first radical, or ending in o\ Zo-, ]Zo x , are ab¬ 
 stract nouns; as, holiness , ^ strength. 
 
 Two words are sometimes compounded in sense; 
 as, jl^ uL a voice. Sometimes the two words are 
 
 joined together; as, lord of enmity, i. e. an 
 
 ns 
 
 3 
 
34 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 enemij. A great number of compound words occurring 
 in Scripture may be found by referring to the Lexicons 
 
 p y 
 
 of Schaaf and Castell under the words ]lo| , , 
 
 Aj-D, 1;io, ^5, &C. 
 
 'h 'fs y x 
 
 16 . Gender. 
 
 There are two genders, the masculine and feminine. 
 Of the masculine are, 
 
 (1) The names of men and their offices; as, 
 jxcldqJ^ Luke , ]j<tud priest, ]”Sd| musicians. 
 
 ‘Is 
 
 (2) Names of nations, rivers, and mountains; as. 
 
 Canaan , ,_j? 5 cL Jordan. 
 
 Of the feminine gender are the names of women, 
 the offices of women, countries, cities, and names of 
 the double members of the human body. 
 
 The feminine gender of nouns is also known by 
 the termination. These terminations are )] o] v_», L \ 
 
 x 
 
 as, ml praise , on . [ goodness , ^oL confession , 
 
 ‘is I 
 
 Aik) a part. The nouns not ending with any of 
 the foregoing letters, and not included in the preceding 
 paragraph, are generally masculine. 
 
 Nouns consisting of two syllables, and beginning 
 with a if the first of these syllables have v, then 
 in becoming feminine they add another v to the letter 
 
 which is next but one before Z; as, ) I \ fern. 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 35 
 
 ]AjJLLlo high , ] fem. ]/\ ^ A « vp praised, 
 
 ]A ; Avn fem. ]An - blessed. 
 
 Nouns which begin and end with Zekofo, and 
 which consist of four letters, when they become femi¬ 
 nine, take Revotso upon the second letter, provided 
 
 that one of the letters is not a guttural; as, a 
 
 father , fem. a mother. But if the noun contain 
 
 a guttural letter, then the Revotso is changed into 
 
 Pethoclio; as, fem. an acquaintance, fem. 
 
 a limit. 
 
 Nouns which begin with Zekofo and terminate in 
 , when they become feminine take Chevotso upon 
 the second letter; as, fem. ]2 Lcl» worthy, 
 
 X 
 
 fem. flowing. 
 
 i 
 
 But if they begin with Pethocho and end in ]_*, 
 when they become feminine they take Chevotso upon 
 the second letter and cast away the Pethocho from 
 
 the first; as, f em - ]A . o ^ elected. 
 
 Nouns ending with Zekofo only, and having Pe¬ 
 thocho on the first letter, when they become feminine 
 change the Pethocho from the first letter to the second; 
 
 as, fem. companion: hing, fem. 
 
 . and a few others do not observe this rule. 
 
 The feminine gender of adjectives is derived from 
 the masculine by the addition of *j to the end of 
 
 the latter; thus, ]^l good from ^ masc. Those 
 
 3—2 
 
36 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 ending in ^ quiescent convert it into ^ moveable; 
 as, . . pure , fem. 
 
 A few adjectives insert Yud immediately before the 
 fem. termination; as, 5aLi small, fem. Vo 
 
 -TV 
 
 obedient, fem. ] 1 i \infm Vr> . 
 
 T\ 
 
 Some nouns are used in both genders, and are therefore 
 termed common; such as, ]^ m\ tongue , ]n\ cloud , &c. 
 
 " 7 » 
 
 The rules indeed for distinguishing gender are for the 
 most part the same as in Hebrew. The same words, when 
 occurring in both, have the same gender ; as, *1SD and 
 
 . look, UV and day, are masc.; and 
 
 * _ o y 
 
 earth , 1033 and j « o\ i soul, are fem. 
 
 Words derived from the Greek do not observe the 
 foregoing rules, but generally retain their own gender; as, 
 
 WU? SiaOijKri, fem. 
 
 i i x 
 
 17. Number. 
 
 There are two numbers, the singular and the plural. 
 Masculine nouns make the plural number, 1st. by 
 
 adding ^ to the singular; as, man, men: 
 
 2nd. those words ending in ] or ^ throw away the 
 
 n\ 
 
 "j or and the termination is added; as, boy , 
 
 » boys; plu. reprobated . 
 
 'fs " 7 > 
 
 Nouns of the fem. gender form the plural by 
 changing the termination ] into o* and t into 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 37 
 
 ^6, and v_. into _»; as, ] i . ship, i > ships; 
 
 ^ X T\ X 
 
 similitude , ^aSoj similitudes; AjlLo portion, ^qaId portions; 
 
 •a 
 
 vjl-o? usury, in the plural » o * - 
 
 i ^ 
 
 p »x 
 
 Nouns which terminate in ]Zo, when they become 
 plural, change x into e placed on the Van; as, l2o_o5 
 multitude , plu. multitudes. A few nouns besides 
 
 the p take 7 on the second letter; as, plu. 
 
 l2ds^ prayers; ]2oj-k> hip, plu. ]2o,Lk» . Others, instead 
 of 7 take * upon the first letter; as, iZoi? likeness, 
 plu. }Lo±o >. 
 
 Nouns consisting of three, four, and five syllables, 
 and terminating in lA-i* change the _» x into 1 when 
 they become plural; as, usury, plu. 
 
 Nouns which begin with 7 and end with Yud and 
 Aleph with the vowel p, and which consist of four 
 letters, in the plural transfer 7 from the first to the 
 
 second letter; as, ]» o ^ elect, plu. ). o ^ 
 
 Nouns having p on the first letter and ending with 
 U, in the plural receive the vowel 7 upon the letter 
 
 immediately preceding ; thus, Lord, plu. |Z;1 d . 
 
 Those nouns which commence with a Mem and 
 have 7 either upon the first or second radical, in the 
 plural receive 7 on the letter immediately preceding 
 
 Yud; as, ) I VmVn reprobated, plu. ]1 S.,cn^n . 
 
 Feminine nouns consisting of three, four, and five 
 letters, which end in Z hard, and have p upon the 
 
38 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 letter before Yud, in the plural add another p to the 
 Yud ; thus, ] A > i A n* spiritual, plu. ]A > i An? . 
 
 There are many other changes of vowels which 
 nouns undergo in passing from the sing, to the plu., 
 which will be more particularly noticed in treating on 
 the const, and def. states. 
 
 p 
 
 Feminine nouns terminating in in the plu. 
 between the root and termination, insert either -»; as, 
 
 > place , plu. 1 Also 5 ; 1 2.5ail small , plu. ill5ail ; 
 or o, either in the masc. or fern, gender; as, ]Ajs 
 a companion , plu. ]Zois; ]Asoo| a nation , plu. IZaioj. 
 There are nouns in which <n is inserted in like man- 
 
 P T* 0 p 
 
 ner; as, ps| mother , plu. "jAnioi. 
 
 Many of the Syriac nouns have the masculine form 
 
 p 
 
 in the sing, and fern, in the plural; as, 'physician, 
 
 'Ti 
 
 plu. ; jiciaA throne, 
 
 P 7 •> 
 
 ^acoias. 
 
 There are others which have the fern, form in the 
 sing, and masc. in the plural; as, ]io] 7 ell, plu. . Vr> ] 7 ; 
 
 x 
 
 wall, plu. ; ] AvVr> > tear, plu. ; 1*ss talent , 
 
 7l *Ti ^ *t\ T\ 
 
 plu. ; |_l_» year , plu. 
 
 ^ I X 
 
 Nouns compounded of two words sometimes admit a 
 
 «. p p •• y 
 
 plural in the former; as, |» i » i o sons of man or men; 
 sometimes in the latter; as, |nn , \vn enemies; and some¬ 
 
 phi. ^aiy; 
 
 
 place. 
 
 times in both; as, |1 o A i_s> (daughters of words) words , 
 fables. 
 
NOUNS. 
 
 39 
 
 Some nouns are found in the plural form only; as, 
 ] > Vn * heavens, life, ] 1 Vo water. 
 
 as 
 
 Some nouns have a double form, one masc. and the 
 other fern.; such as, father, plu. and 
 
 x 
 
 There are other nouns which are very irregular ; as, 
 liool nation, plu. ^ 0 ^ 0 ). 
 
 as 
 
 Many words of a Greek origin retain the Greek ter¬ 
 mination in the plural; as, Soy/ua, plu 
 
 Soy/uLctra. Others terminate in *cdo] , soo, *co1, or sq, 
 resembling the termination a? of the Greek accusative 
 
 plural; as, )n . A o ^laOrjKrj, plu. soclo. >A_o SiaOqKas, &c. 
 
 X XI xx 
 
 18. States of Nouns. 
 
 To the absolute and constructive state of nouns, 
 which the Hebrews have, the Syrians add a third, 
 the Definite , or, as it has been more generally called, 
 the Emphatic. This is indicated by the termination, 
 and is equivalent in general to the article n before 
 a Hebrew noun. It happens however that the primary 
 signification of this state has been departed from in 
 many instances, and nouns are found in the def. state 
 when only an indef. sense is intended to be expressed. 
 The rules for passing from one state to another depend 
 either upon the gender, the number, or the final letter, 
 or on more than one of these. First for 
 
 19. Masculine Nouns. 
 
 In the singular number the absolute and con¬ 
 structive states are the same. 
 
40 
 
 STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 The definite state is obtained by the addition of 
 ] to the end of the absolute. Hence the definite 
 state of masculine nouns and the absolute state of 
 feminine nouns have the same form. 
 
 Those nouns ending in 1 in the absolute state, 
 
 in the definite the "j is changed into ]_». 
 
 The constructive state, plural number, is formed by 
 
 y 
 
 changing the termination ^ of the absolute into _ 
 
 X 
 
 and ^ into . . . 
 
 The def. plu. is formed from the absolute by chang¬ 
 ing the termination ^ into ] and ^ into this 
 
 i 'h 'h 
 
 and the preceding rules will he illustrated by some 
 examples, which will presently follow. 
 
 To ascertain the changes of vowels which nouns 
 undergo in their different states of both numbers; or, 
 which is the same thing, given the abs. state sing. num. 
 to find the vowels and their position in the constr. and 
 def. states for both numbers. 
 
 1st. If a word consist of three consonants and a 
 vowel on the second consonant, which is the case with 
 a very large class of nouns, this form is equivalent to 
 one of the old forms of segolate nouns in Hebrew. In 
 
 Syriac these forms are i. the alternate form of 
 
 which is ^40 or ^4o. n. ^40 alt. ^^40 or ^40. 
 
 ^ 'TS IS 
 
 hi. ^q4o alt. Now whenever the noun in its 
 
 primitive form receives a syllabic augment, the alternate 
 
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 41 
 
 t 
 
 form is used; thus, man, def. We have 
 
 therefore only to add the proper termination to the 
 alternate form to obtain the def. state sing, or the abs. 
 const, and def. states plural*. Thus, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Abs. and Constr. 
 
 
 7 
 
 Ir^-* 
 
 7 
 
 morning 
 
 1 
 
 1; ^.CP 
 
 'TS 
 
 ;Aco 
 
 book 
 
 2 
 
 
 • 
 
 servant 
 
 3 
 
 
 'Ti 
 
 wing 
 
 4 
 
 ):^i 
 
 ]jQ-» 
 
 captive 
 
 5 
 
 
 * 
 
 bO(La_^ 
 
 body. 
 
 6 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Def. 
 
 w 
 
 'h 
 
 Constr. 
 
 y v 
 
 Abs. 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 mornings 
 
 1 
 
 ]j_2UCD 
 
 T\ 
 
 
 i^CO 
 
 X ^ 
 
 books 
 
 2 
 
 is 
 
 7 7 
 
 • 
 
 7 
 
 X 
 
 servants 
 
 3 
 
 ]<=^ vn 
 
 ‘T* 'h 
 
 u^in 
 
 I 7\ 
 
 wings 
 
 4 
 
 
 7 7 
 
 ^,ru 
 
 *71 
 
 captives 
 
 5 
 
 
 7 * 
 
 
 bodies. 
 
 6 
 
 Exception. In the vowel remains 
 
 IS 
 
 and def. states plural. 
 
 in its place 
 
 in the 
 
42 
 
 STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 1. In the foregoing examples, that which is marked 
 
 (l) comprehends all those nouns having v on the second con¬ 
 sonant, and remitting it to the first in the process of inflexion; 
 such are . body , . v dust , ^£>1 time , beard. 
 
 2. In the second example, we have those nouns which 
 
 take v in the second consonant, but in inflexion it is changed 
 to ^ and remitted to the first. The truth is, the vowel * is 
 the proper vowel in both places, and the reason of the change 
 is that in such nouns the last letter is a guttural or Rish. 
 
 3. In the third example are included those nouns whose 
 forms are and ; such are ..\vr> king, ^oj.. bone, 
 
 'ts tn 'rs Vi 
 
 Wvn husband, anathema , . m soul. 
 
 4. The fourth example belongs to that class of nouns 
 
 whose forms are and 
 
 7 \ 
 
 5. Nouns having the third radical Olaph, take the forms 
 which are exhibited in the example jrx#; but manifest, 
 
 covered, have their definite forms )_1\^ ]. mn . ]1 1 
 
 boy, makes in the def. plu. as if from the obsolete 
 
 'h 
 
 word . . S l ; we have likewise ] »Vn i as if from )vn « . 
 
 6. All nouns of the forms ^>q_£uQ and ^£q_o are repre¬ 
 sented by the sixth example. 
 
 o y 
 
 herb , def. may be considered as belonging to 
 
 the same class of nouns as The Yud has Chevotso , 
 
 because this letter is never without a vowel when it begins 
 a word. If the last consonant be a guttural or Rish, it is 
 preceded by the vowel Pethocho instead of Revotso ; as, 
 
 month , heap of stones. 
 
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 43 
 
 Such nouns as eye, day , correspond to the 
 
 i 
 
 Hebrew segolate nouns. In these the vowel is changed 
 into ? in the def. state sing., and all the states plu., 
 and this new vowel makes a diphthong with o or 
 thus, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Def. 
 
 
 Abs. and Constr. 
 
 \ 0 7 
 
 4 
 
 eye. 
 
 I 
 
 tea: 
 
 Plural. 
 
 •X 
 
 i>OQ_* day. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Constr. 
 
 Abs. 
 
 
 y y 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 T\ 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 y y 
 
 7 
 
 SOQ-j days. 
 
 X 
 
 2nd. Other classes of nouns 
 
 are the following. 
 
 1. Such nouns 
 inflexion; thus, 
 
 as admit no 
 
 Singular. 
 
 change of vowels 
 
 Def. 
 
 
 Abs. and Constr. 
 
 X 
 
 Plural. 
 
 > • i evil. 
 
 X 
 
 Def. 
 
 Constr. 
 
 Abs. 
 
 1\ I 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 X X 
 
 The vowel Zekofo is immutable, and therefore mono¬ 
 syllables with this vowel are represented by . « . ; as, A £Vp 
 
 x 
 
 portion, book. Nouns also having two or more sylla- 
 
44 
 
 STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 bles, if the penultimate terminate in a consonant, or if the 
 ultimate syllable be perfect without the terminating conso- 
 
 y y y 
 
 nant, belong to this class; as, explanation, , »Vn\ 7 
 
 disciple. Some nouns wanting an absolute state may be re¬ 
 ferred to it; as, |L»*j the stag , j_>5] the lion , the ser¬ 
 
 pent, )lo& death , ]oAid winter, K conversation , for 
 
 the form of the definite state remains in all the parts of 
 their inflexion. Finally, nouns which possess either of the fol¬ 
 lowing forms preserve their vowels immutable, viz. . . \n x (\ r> 
 def. ] 1 \o f\ o 7 \\ > j\ n def. ]1 . (p n. A few nouns appear 
 
 i x 
 
 to correspond with the segolate nouns in Hebrew, but which 
 really belong to this class ; as, A,» carcase , 5o_l] small. 
 
 
 magician. 
 
 2 . Monosyllables, the vowel of which is v or % 
 nouns of many syllables, the last of which is mutable, 
 are exemplified in the following Table. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Def. 
 
 
 Abs. and Constr. 
 
 U 
 
 
 v! 
 
 -A 
 
 species 
 
 0 0 
 
 pouD 
 
 
 l CTLD 
 
 'ft 
 
 Priest 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 7 -X 
 
 Path. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Constr. 
 
 Abs. 
 
 
 nil 
 
 7 
 
 ^-J1 
 
 I 
 
 species 
 
 jjCTUD 
 
 7 P 
 
 w_k_jai2 
 
 v .j-JCrLD 
 
 I 
 
 Priests 
 
 'Ts 
 
 7 -X 
 
 I 
 
 Paths. 
 
STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 45 
 
 The noun son , makes in the plural » i sons; 
 
 x 
 
 as if it were derived from a different root. Also - is 
 peculiar in receiving the consonant oi in the plural ; 
 thus, , ^C7li£L* , ]ots2l» . 
 
 X 
 
 3. Nouns of more than one syllable, terminating 
 in Olaph or Yud may constitute another class. Such 
 are, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Abs. and Constr. 
 
 seen 
 
 ‘Ts 
 
 7 7 
 
 drunlc. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Constr. 
 
 Abs. 
 
 ^ 0 7 7 
 
 7 7 
 
 ns 
 
 0 7 7 
 
 V»A.«So 
 
 7 7 
 
 7 
 
 
 LjkSo . 
 
 A few nouns double the last letter in the plural; 
 but the linea occultans is placed under the first of 
 
 the two letters ; thus, ^al sea , plu. »v>v>' . ; 
 
 X 
 
 ]SqLq£, plu. of people , is also another instance. 
 
 IS - 
 
 20. States of Feminine Nouns. 
 
 In the singular number, the constructive state 
 changes ] of the absolute into 2 ; thus, ]jl» year, AjL® . 
 
46 
 
 STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 Nouns which in the absolute state terminate in 
 cT or in the constructive end in Lo or ; as, qdi 
 
 i x 
 
 victory , constr. Za£i; - . ^4 usury , constr. A > ^ 
 
 I 'h x 
 
 Fern, nouns having a masc. termination; as, 
 
 * 7 * 
 
 belly; those ending in L\ as, Aivn 'portion; make the 
 abs. and constr. states the same. 
 
 The definite state of fern, nouns which have a 
 masc. termination is the same as that of masc. nouns; 
 
 as, belly, def. jroji). 
 
 In the def. state the } of the abs. is changed into 
 
 p 
 
 12; as, ]ho word, def. l‘A\vn. 
 
 If the word in the abs. state terminate in , 
 the Yud becomes quiescent in the def. state, and 
 the preceding consonant takes 1 ; if the termination 
 
 in the abs. be ]o, then Van becomes quiescent in x 
 in the def. Ex. 4, 5. 
 
 Nouns ending in o or make the def. by the 
 
 i 
 
 addition of ]2; those ending in 2 add only ] in the 
 def. 6, 7, 8, 9. 
 
 To avoid the concourse of several consonants 
 without a vowel, or, which is the same thing, to 
 facilitate the pronunciation, a vowel, namely y or 
 
 is placed with the second or third radical; as, lllojj 
 
 c 7 V 
 
 widow, def. lA\vnV| . 
 
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 47 
 
 A few nouns ending in ^ in the abs. masc., in the 
 def. state fem. assume x under the Nun, which is 
 
 followed by ; as, def. fem. com - 
 
 x x 
 
 forter . 
 
 In the plural number the constr. state is derived 
 from the abs. by changing the final ^ into L, and 
 the def. is derived from the abs. by changing . into 
 
 12 . 
 
 The Examples in the following Table will fur¬ 
 ther illustrate what has been here said on the states 
 of fem. nouns. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Constr. 
 
 Abs. 
 
 
 
 ]AXoAn 
 
 A^oAn 
 
 yoAo 
 
 virgin 
 
 1 
 
 0 P 
 
 7 p 
 
 O P 
 
 V 
 
 chariot 
 
 £ 
 
 o 7 
 
 7 7 
 
 p 7 
 
 companion 
 
 3 
 
 X 
 
 &1H 
 
 U24 
 
 girl 
 
 4 
 
 0 -X 7 
 
 )Ln i .>j 
 
 7 7 
 
 o 7 
 
 1C1.IL.JJ 
 
 beast 
 
 5 
 
 0 *x 
 
 1Zq_o5 
 
 is 
 
 i.ao? 
 
 'h 
 
 •X 
 
 'A 
 
 ten thousand, or 
 
 a myriad 6 
 
 P *X p 
 
 •X P 
 
 •X P 
 
 a^> 
 
 division 
 
 7 
 
 1A^3 
 
 I 71 
 
 Aj_£D3 
 
 X 7% 
 
 I 
 
 usury 
 
 8 
 
 p p 
 
 ]L\Sa 
 
 AiSo 
 
 AjAd 
 
 portion 
 
 9 
 
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 48 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Def. 
 
 Constr. 
 
 Abs. 
 
 
 
 0 0 «X 
 
 0 «X 
 
 AXoA^ 
 
 o *X 
 
 virgins 
 
 1 
 
 0 0 o 
 
 P 0 
 
 0 o 
 
 chariots 
 
 2 
 
 op y 
 
 P 7 
 
 Zfj£l>0 
 
 e ■ y 
 
 companions 
 
 3 
 
 
 o t y 
 
 AA^ 
 
 
 girls 
 
 4 
 
 op 7 
 
 }Ln » 
 
 o 7 
 
 Zo > K) 
 
 P 7 
 
 beasts 
 
 5 
 
 0 0 
 
 lZa^5 
 
 “Ts 
 
 Zao3 
 
 ^ao3 
 
 myriads 
 
 6 
 
 o o 7o 
 
 P 7 P 
 
 Zo^ 
 
 o 7 0 
 
 divisions 
 
 7 
 
 ]Aj_o5 
 
 'h 
 
 AZ..o3 
 
 'Ts 
 
 usuries 
 
 8 
 
 p p V 
 
 ]2n ^ Vn 
 
 P 7 
 
 Zn i Vn 
 
 p 7 
 
 portions 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 1. In 
 
 No. l, we have 
 
 an example of those 
 
 nouns 
 
 ending in ] 
 
 which undergo no change 
 
 of vowels in 
 
 their 
 
 different states; such are, ] m 
 
 » o m7. ] 
 
 X 
 
 v » ^ an eaa , 
 
 X 
 
 m. 0 *x 
 
 circumcision. 
 
 2. Nouns which assume an additional vowel in the 
 def. state singular. 
 
 3. This example represents nouns in which the vowel 
 on the 1st. rad. of the abs. sing, is removed to the 2nd. 
 rad. in the def. They partake of the character of segolate 
 nouns in Hebrew. 
 
 4. 5. In these examples we have nouns whose termi¬ 
 nations are and ]o. A few nouns belonging to the latter 
 cast away the vowel of the 1st. rad. in the def. state sing.; 
 
 as, blow , def. 
 
STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 49 
 
 6. This is an example of nouns ending in o > which 
 preserve their vowels unchanged, and in which no new vowel 
 
 is introduced; as, n .\ .. liberty , n!ni equality , o A 
 
 7. Nouns represented by o are such as receive 
 
 another vowel in the plu., viz. v or *, which is placed on 
 the 2nd rad.; as, o i prophecy , Q.. 1 AX 0 war. 
 
 i 
 
 8. This is the model of nouns the abs. state of which 
 
 ends in In the plural Yud quiescent is changed into 
 
 i 
 
 Yud moveable. 
 
 9. In the nouns represented by A i v> we have in the 
 plural 2 taken away and o moveable placed before the plural 
 
 termination; such are, A\v sacrifice , A_kk£0 ablution. 
 
 In some instances the last letter is written twice in the 
 plural; as, 0= bride, plu. 
 
 There are some anomalies; as, praise , )A_^ o A 
 
 in the def.; sister , plu. def. 
 
 21. The Syrians have no cases which are marked 
 by terminations; but the nominative and oblique cases 
 of the Greeks and Latins are known by the context, or 
 are expressed by the constructive state, by the influence 
 of a transitive verb, or by some particle; as, ^ j o ^ 
 
 Za2L ^-lo, &c. preceding; thus, 
 
 ns 
 
 Aj k\ d 1 . Jesus departed. 
 
 ns 
 
 IolISv JLld words of God; or, ]ctl2A |ISd words of 
 
 ' I> »\ T\ 
 
 God. 
 
 4 
 
50 
 
 STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 }nVo\ to the king , to Jesus , ) 1 to 
 
 the blind man. 
 
 we have seen his glory , lor^L 
 
 ]vn\v\ God loved the world. Sometimes we see tL 
 in imitation of the Hebrew ns'- See Gen. i. 1. 
 
 o V — o 
 
 1ZAj| o] 0/ woman. See also Acts i. 1. 
 with the king , &c. 
 
 If one of the letters ^ j o ^ be prefixed to a noun, 
 the first radical of which is ] or then the prefix 
 receives the vowel which the ] or previously had; 
 
 as, w a brother , Wa, X r > V » a son, 
 
 XX XI 
 
 I I 
 
 When one of these letters is prefixed to a word 
 consisting of three letters, and especially of those which 
 
 p 7 
 
 end in two Olaphs, it takes the vowel as, "jjloo 
 
 o 7 
 
 with a hundred , 1^00 and a hundred. But this rule 
 is not observed in other words which are not composed 
 of three letters and do not terminate in two Olaphs. 
 
 Again, should all the letters o j id be placed 
 before any word, if the first of these prefixes he with¬ 
 out a vowel the second will have one; also, the third 
 will he without, and the fourth with a vowel, as we 
 
 see, for instance, in the noun ] AVn a word; for we 
 say and . 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 51 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 22. The Syriac adjectives are few, but this defect 
 is supplied by other words, which when placed in cer¬ 
 tain positions obtain the use and signification of adjec¬ 
 tives. For instance, the state of construction will supply 
 
 the force of an adjective; as, ]_®?clo Ai city of holi- 
 
 ness, i. e. holy city, Matth. iv. 5. Also a substantive 
 put absolutely with ? prefixed; as, . « si i ? a natural 
 
 body , 00 O 33 a spiritual body , 1 Cor. xv. 44. Also 
 
 in other ways; as, the fire, jiij 11 ? which is not extin¬ 
 guished, i. e. inextinguishable; ^clL *£)jj ^qjoi 
 
 . . 1 . J) m they to whom he shewed himself alive, 
 
 - 7 \ 
 
 lit. ( 1 as living.) 
 
 Adjectives are distinguished by gender, number and 
 states, which are the same as in the substantives. It 
 is only necessary to notice that in adjectives the 
 masc. def. and the fern. abs. have the same form; 
 but they are easily known one from the other by 
 the substantive or the verb with which they are 
 connected. The degrees of comparison are not to be 
 found in a change of the adjective, but are merely 
 marked by certain particles and connections. 
 
 The comparative is expressed by the positive con¬ 
 strued with either preceding or following it; as, 
 
 'h 
 
 ooi fo greater than all: there is sometimes 
 
 4—2 
 
52 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 added .o l powerfully , or more ; as, \A .;l*o 
 
 i i 
 
 cnho as i ; (Y»^rr> ^ *^-4” and sharper than a 
 
 ^ T\ TS 
 
 two-edged sword , lit. much sharper. Blessed 
 
 is lie who gives lU ^ won 9 than he 
 
 d i 
 
 who receives. The comparative is sometimes marked 
 by the sense of the passage only; as, "joau 
 
 / 7\ 'TS I 
 
 ]i ov |\ y ] t _CLL the elder shall he servant to the younger . 
 
 The superlative is often formed by the duplication 
 of the positive ; as, W» \o V\ . Vn least; sometimes 
 
 I X 
 
 by adding the particle v.ery 9 which is equivalent 
 to the *1^0 of the Hebrews ; as, U- Vo worst , 
 
 'T) X 
 
 plu.; sometimes again by m uch; as, ^..^co 
 
 }7 . AI vn most honoured; or by vD prefixed to the 
 plural; as, |n\vnn ] small among kings , i. e. 
 
 » f 
 
 the least of kings; or as, _^oct5q_ii least of 
 
 7i X ^ 
 
 the Apostles , literally, least of those who {are) the 
 Apostles; or it is expressed in the following man¬ 
 ner; whosoever therefore shall break one jj r oo^ 
 
 'Ts ‘7s 
 
 Ijq-LI of these least commandments. Matth. v. 
 
 'h T\ 
 
 19; see also two other places in this verse. 
 
 Many adjectives are formed by the addition of 1_T 
 to the words from which they are derived; thus, 
 ] > Co «n ^ corporeal , mountainous , primi¬ 
 
 tive ; so also adjectives having a Greek origin ; as, 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 53 
 
 ^ o P 7 
 
 Ur^'r^ 
 
 P P 7 p 
 
 barbarous , un aerial. In some instances the 
 termination ]j is added to the primitive word to form 
 the adjective; as, |_i_*__,3 primary , hairy , "\. 
 
 X 
 
 proper . 
 
 23. Numerals. 
 
 Numerals are either cardinal (j( \ » - • ^ ) r or ordinal 
 
 i 
 
 QA.; 
 
 Ordinal. 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 . P. P 7 
 
 IA-a.Vvq 
 
 1 > V),-Q first 
 
 • 
 
 7 
 
 r _Ki OW0 
 • 
 
 
 
 Constr. 
 
 I 
 
 * P D 7 • 
 
 (±_»3A second 
 
 ^Z;Z y _,Z>Z y 
 
 >Z ^-^Z two 
 
 *7\ 
 
 1LLAZ 
 
 X 
 
 1-.AjAZ third 
 
 i 
 
 ASZ 
 
 1AHZ 
 
 m. P 0 
 
 |A 
 
 X 
 
 . p p b 
 
 | » v » oi fourth 
 
 i 
 
 «C»V 
 
 « P «7 
 
 p^3 1 /owr 
 
 X 
 
 | > a» > Ki, 
 
 X 
 
 7 
 
 'A 
 
 (.» SOjvj five 
 
 }LL.£l. 
 
 X 
 
 V»zLiA_» 
 
 X 
 
 Aj* ]a_*1 
 
 'it as ** 
 
 or ]A_» six 
 
 lAC.o. 
 
 X 
 
 •.0 0 
 
 |-*-N i *"i • seventh 
 
 X 
 
 MrL» 
 
 1 p 7 
 
 ( \n,j> seven 
 
 .w 
 
 I 
 
 1 a 1 » V>Z eighth 
 
 i 
 
 LaoZ 
 
 j.» 1 V)Z 
 
 1A. v. 
 
 X 
 
 »Z ninth 
 
 X 
 
 M4.Z 
 
 IL»Z m»<? 
 
 T\ 
 
 
 t->; >.cn\ 
 
 
 1 ;.CQ. S ten. 
 
 H 
 
54 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 From ten to twenty the numbers one, two, &c. are 
 prefixed to ten, in the following manner: 
 
 Cardinal • 
 
 Fem. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 is IS 
 
 
 7 7 
 
 eleven 
 
 fcm&SZ 
 
 Is is 
 
 
 jXQ^iZ 
 
 is 
 
 twelve 
 
 is is 
 
 
 ■Ju&LL 
 
 thirteen 
 
 y y 
 
 Is is is 
 
 dul&d 
 
 is 
 
 7 7 *7 
 
 fourteen 
 
 . 7 7 
 
 is is 
 
 7 7 -A 7 
 
 ;fnlA.. a AnM 
 
 7 7 7 
 
 ^ULL^LQ-^j 
 
 fifteen 
 
 lym-iZLa 
 
 is is 
 
 
 y y A 
 
 sixteen 
 
 lym vA « 
 
 7 7 p 
 
 ♦.m vAo * 
 
 7 7 
 
 • m • 
 
 seventeen 
 
 IS is 
 
 ];Tnvi Vi7 
 
 Is IS 
 
 
 7 7 0. 
 
 r cnM VnZ 
 
 eighteen 
 
 V.mSaZ 
 
 is is 
 
 ■Jn^LaL 
 
 7 7 . 
 
 • m v » / 
 
 nineteen. 
 
 
 Ordinal. 
 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 
 *0 P 7 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 eleventh 
 
 p o y y 
 
 |A-»i_»»CD_LZ5Z 
 
 X 
 
 
 p p 
 
 ]. ravv7 
 
 x ^ 
 
 twelfth 
 
 oo y o 
 
 i 
 
 
 DO y p 
 
 "U^^ullA^Z 
 
 X 
 
 thirteenth. 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 The law for deriving them from the cardinal is suffi¬ 
 ciently obvious. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 55 
 
 Cardinal numbers from three are for the most part 
 joined to the thing numbered by Apposition in the abso¬ 
 lute state; as, . . four months , ; rr>v 
 
 i 
 
 ten virgins. But the constructive state is occasionally 
 used; thus in Matth. iv. 25, we have ]Ar » r Vn / ; m\ ten 
 
 x n\ 
 
 cities , literally, a decad of cities. 
 
 These numbers are frequently found to occupy the 
 place of ordinals. In Luke i. 59, we have |_LlLoZj 
 
 the day which {is) eighth, i. e. the eighth day, . \« A_» 
 
 x 
 
 sixth hour. 
 
 Denary numbers from 20 to 90 are expressed in the 
 plural, and are of the common gender; thus, > ;vm v twenty, 
 
 i n\ 
 
 thirty , forty, fifty, sixty, 
 
 x i x i 
 
 » vn • seventy, eighty, . v * 7 ninety. 
 
 x x i 
 
 The ordinals are derived from these by adding the 
 termination for the masculine, and for the femi¬ 
 nine ; as, masc. fern. twentieth. 
 
 X X TS 
 
 The remaining numerals are, a hundred, 
 
 n\ 
 
 two hundred, three hundred, &c., which are form¬ 
 
 ed by prefixing the less number of the feminine gender 
 before Also, or <35 thousand, fern. 
 
 'Ts 
 
 plu. l q n i ten thousand. 
 
 X ■» 
 
 Twice, thrice, &c. are sometimes expressed by cardinals, 
 
 with the noun A ) time, after it; as, once, lit. 
 
 one time. 
 
56 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 Words denoting a part of the whole are, ]A\oZ a 
 third part , a fourth part , : rn vLn a tenth , &c. 
 
 Multiples, as double, treble, &c. are expressed by r ^t, 
 and a cardinal number following with ^ prefixed, or 
 
 sometimes without it; as, ^ seven fold , lit. owe 
 
 in or into seven , ^32 jLo double. 
 
 The days of the week are, I ^ ,_2» first day of 
 the week, I ^ . 37 second day , &c. 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 24. Pronouns are sometimes separable , i. e. con¬ 
 sist of words, and sometimes inseparable , i. e. they are 
 expressed by certain particles called affixes placed at 
 the end of nouns, verbs, or other particles. The 
 following is a Table of the personal pronouns. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Com. Masc. 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Com. Masc. 
 
 
 7 
 
 We 
 
 
 
 7, ls£ person 
 
 
 rOAjl 
 
 You 
 
 ^AjI 
 
 7 
 
 AjI 
 
 Thou , 2w<i. 
 
 is 
 
 ^QJOl | 
 
 4 
 
 They 
 
 cjGI I 
 
 x 1 
 
 p 1 
 
 w-aGHI 
 
 ocn 
 
 ► She 
 
 7 
 
 OOl 
 
 . 
 
 - He, 3rd. 
 
 ocn and w»cn are also used for the demonstrative 
 pronouns; as, ocri H that man , ^or that 
 
 woman. 
 
 ^ojI and are for the most part found after 
 
 n\ 
 
 a transitive verb; as, v a3l n ^qjoi they hare filled 
 
 •71 -71 
 
 them> John ii. 9- 
 
 * In the recently discovered Syriac version of the Theophania 
 of Eusebius there is found the pronominal form we. Heb. 
 
 The forms ^QJOI and «^_*2lcn also occur for ^QJOl and ^ .Aar 
 
58 
 
 RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 25. 
 
 The Demonstrative 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 
 1?OT 
 
 
 
 o 1 
 
 
 
 TS 
 
 f this , 
 
 fem. 
 
 > this , 
 
 masc. 
 
 •s 0 0 
 
 l?ai | 
 
 
 
 +.0 0 
 
 (jcn J 
 
 
 
 iAcn j 
 
 
 
 •X 0 
 
 * QJCTI 
 
 these , 
 
 masc 
 
 ^ v 1 
 
 > these , 
 
 of both genders. 
 
 \ 
 
 0 
 
 
 
 x.1 ] 
 
 
 
 r _uJcn 
 
 these , 
 
 fem. 
 
 -7l 
 
 These become reciprocal by being joined to the 
 personal pronouns ; as, oai he himself \ ]jcn ^<n 
 
 x 
 
 she herself. 
 
 |ioi and coalesce with ooi and ^ci, and then 
 
 x 
 
 we have the following compounds, qjcti this is , masc. 
 _>cn jicn this is , fern. 
 
 26. The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 The relative is ? of both genders and numbers, 
 and is prefixed to words. It is probably the same 
 as the iEthiopic H> which in Hebrew has the same 
 use and signification as W or 
 
 o m v 
 
 The interrogatives are, 
 
 of the person o _lSd, who? 
 
 of the thing ,_Sd, }ik>, what? 
 
 y *x y 
 
 is of both genders and numbers. n i Vn is com- 
 
 y *x y y y y *x y 
 
 pounded of and ooi; as, .. .m o i . a oik ooA-s qjlLd, 
 
 n\ 
 
 who hath opened his eyes ? lit. who is he, who hath , opened for 
 him his eyes ? 
 
AFFIXES. 
 
 59 
 
 Interrogatives of both person and thing are li.,] 7 
 masc. Ip*] 7 fem. who , which , what ? of the sing, numb., 
 and > V . f ? who , which , what ? of the plural. 
 
 a 
 
 When > is used with these interrogatives, they 
 become relatives; as, he who goeth not 
 
 a 
 
 up , ]£o th e bear which he saw. 
 
 X 
 
 y 
 
 Care must be taken not to confound with the 
 
 preposition ^ Before the use of vowels the former word 
 
 A 
 
 was written with a point above the Lo, and the latter 
 i- «• with a point below the said letter. 
 
 27. The following Table exhibits what are called 
 pronominal affixes , which are added to the end of 
 nouns. They are certain abbreviated terminations or 
 inseparable particles, and have the signification of pos¬ 
 sessive pronouns. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1-1 
 
 com. gender. 
 
 my 
 
 t—» 
 
 com. gender. 
 
 my 
 
 7 
 
 masc. 
 
 thy 
 
 P 
 
 Y 
 
 masc. 
 
 thy 
 
 7 
 
 fem. 
 
 thy 
 
 A 
 
 fem. 
 
 thy 
 
 7 
 
 «—iCno 
 
 masc. 
 
 his 
 
 01 
 
 A 
 
 masc. 
 
 his 
 
 0~L_» 
 
 A 
 
 fem. 
 
 her 
 
 P 
 
 Ol 
 
 fem. 
 
 her 
 
 7 
 
 com. 
 
 our 
 
 7 
 
 com. 
 
 our 
 
 •X 7 
 
 masc. 
 
 your 
 
 •X 
 
 masc. 
 
 your 
 
 V 
 
 fem. 
 
 your 
 
 A 
 
 fem. 
 
 your 
 
 •X 7 
 
 <OOT_» 
 
 masc. 
 
 their 
 
 v odi 
 
 masc. 
 
 their 
 
 7 
 
 ^Cn-4 
 
 fem. 
 
 their 
 
 r _»01 
 
 fem. 
 
 their. 
 
60 
 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 28. There are separate possessive pronouns. They 
 are expressed by the letters which are put before 
 
 x 
 
 the affixes; thus, my, thy, masc.; . » 
 
 X I 7\ X 
 
 thy, fem.; his, oilLj her, our, . nn\ your, 
 
 'rs x x x x x 
 
 masc.; * your, fem.; ^nm\ .> their, masc.; 
 
 ^ 7 \ X ^ X ^ X 
 
 their, fem. 
 
 Distributive pronouns are expressed by , 
 
 and the preposition ^; sometimes the substantive 
 is taken away and the distributive pronoun is in¬ 
 dicated by only; thus, ^oouio ]) some of 
 
 them, or ^ootjlLo some of them. Also . « i\o or 
 
 ^ -r 
 
 whosoever, or sn t ^nXn whatsoever. The latter 
 
 pronoun is composed of ^ all, and ^oj^o something, 
 
 7 ) 7 \ 
 
 or any thing. 
 
 Other pronouns are formed by adding the affixes 
 to the nouns ] I ^.1 soul or person, and IloqjLo 
 substance or person; as, y • A save thyself; 
 
 c n • %}o and he went, hanged himself; 
 
 7 * 7 \ 
 
 mvn ni on in himself See also John vi. 53. 
 
 7S 
 
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 61 
 
 29. Nouns with Affixes. 
 
 We come now to nouns with affixes. The vowel 
 changes of nouns receiving the affixes in Hebrew are 
 many and complicated; hut in Syriac are few and 
 simple. The following is an example of a masculine 
 noun, which is first put in the definite state and 
 then takes the affixes in the place of the termina¬ 
 tion 1°. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Def. State. 
 
 1st. pers. sing. 
 
 com. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 1st. pers. plu. 
 
 com. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 ]^o 
 
 king 
 
 « i 
 
 my Icing 
 
 
 thy 
 
 
 thy 
 
 TS 
 
 his 
 
 <jiz££d 
 
 her ... 
 
 
 our ... 
 
 
 your ... 
 
 
 your . . . 
 
 ^nrnoVVn 
 
 their ... 
 
 
 their ... 
 
62 
 
 NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st. pers. sing. 
 
 com. 
 
 
 my kings 
 
 2nd . 
 
 masc. 
 
 . ■ • 
 
 thy . . • 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 7.7 
 
 ..» n » n._^o 
 
 thy 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 7.7 
 
 w»CJIO 
 
 his 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 her . . . 
 
 1st. pers. pin. 
 
 com. 
 
 
 our . . . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 •X 7 . 7 
 
 your ... 
 
 2nd . 
 
 fem. 
 
 7 . 7 
 
 ‘7\ 
 
 your ... 
 
 3rd . 
 
 masc. 
 
 •X 7 . 7 
 
 v ocn » 
 
 their ... 
 
 3rd . 
 
 fem. 
 
 v .m . 
 
 'rs 
 
 their • • • 
 
 The word _ 
 
 * n\Vn 
 
 is pronounced Malh , the 
 
 w being otiose. 
 
 2. Nouns in the singular number the definite 
 state of which terminates in , form the affix of the 
 first person singular in . . . . and the second and third 
 
 X 
 
 persons plural in . nn » , v * n >, ^oot_» , ; thus, 
 
 I "T\ X X I 
 
 UX| boy, . . my boy, ,o ^ ..I 4 your boy, ^ocn^li 
 
 X ^ X X 
 
 their boy. ] Lord , which takes the affixes from 
 
 is an exception to this rule. 
 
 3. Such nouns as terminate in ^ and the letter 
 immediately before Yud having a vowel, when they 
 take the affixes the )° is removed, another is added, 
 
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 63 
 
 in the plural, and the first Yud changes its vowel to 
 Pethocho; as, ] > i o an architect , pin. ] >,,1.*^, 
 
 •• 7 o 
 
 Ui > 1 . 
 
 / 
 
 4. Those nouns having the abs. state, as 
 
 ‘Ts 
 
 and the definite, as |iori, retain the ^ with the 
 affixes of the first person sing, and second and third 
 
 persons plu.; as, my priest. Again, those in 
 
 'Ts 
 
 the ahs. state having the vowel v on the last syl¬ 
 lable, and any other vowel on the preceding syllable, 
 the v is preserved with the affixes of the above- 
 
 mentioned persons ; as, abs. o^ijio altar , 
 
 my altar. 
 
 5. There are some nouns, namely, monosyllables, 
 which have the vowel ^ in the abs. state, and 
 which lose it in the definite. Such nouns preserve 
 the ^ with the affixes of the above-mentioned per¬ 
 sons; as, Lo) def. }Ld> blood , ^Ld? my blood. 
 
 6 . Some nouns in the plural number receive the 
 affixes both in the def. and const, states. They are 
 those which terminate in the absolute state in 
 
 p 7 • • V 
 
 the definite in and the constructive in „ 
 
 7 • 7 
 
 Note, . , has two significations: 1st. my kings; 
 
 P 7 7 7 
 
 2nd. kings of; as, pj] . »nSvn kings of the earth. 
 
 v y p 7 
 
 The nouns jlNknVn speech , and ]1 \ hvp shade , 
 
 which have the tinea occultans under the first Lomad, 
 when they take the affixes, the tinea occultans is re- 
 
64 
 
 NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 moved, and the Lomad receives v; as, 
 
 &c. 
 
 UjiD Lord , is not found with any pronominal 
 affix. The reason is, that under such circumstance, 
 
 the noun is used in its place; thus, Id my 
 Lord , thy Lord , cn£o his Lord , &c. 
 
 Three nouns, namely, father , ur brother, 
 
 father-in-law , take the affixes in an irregular manner. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 com. 
 
 y 
 
 * v 
 
 my father 
 
 masc. 
 
 *. 7 
 
 thy . 
 
 fem. 
 
 -a-socd") 
 
 * 7 
 
 thy . 
 
 masc. 
 
 vjOIQjd) 
 
 • X 7 
 
 his . 
 
 fem. 
 
 cna^l 
 
 X 7 
 
 her . 
 
 com. 
 
 ^1 
 
 •X *X 7 
 
 .cincLff) 
 
 our . 
 
 masc. 
 
 your . 
 
 •x ? 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 . nn '-'d 
 
 your . 
 
 •X ‘X 7 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 •X 7 
 
 their . 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 their . 
 
 The other two nouns take the affixes in the same way, 
 except that ]£q*j makes . my father-in-law. See obs. 
 
 4, p. 45. 
 
 30. In feminine nouns the same affixes are used 
 for both numbers; namely, those which are annexed 
 
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 65 
 
 to the singular number of masculine nouns. They are 
 put to the end of feminine nouns in the constructive 
 state in the first person singular, and in the second 
 and third persons plural, and at the end of their 
 definite state in the other parts, the termination ] 
 having been taken away. The reason of this differ¬ 
 ence is, that in the pronominal affixes mentioned, 
 if they were placed to the definite state of the noun, 
 there would be a concourse of several consonants 
 without a vowel. 
 
 The following is an example of feminine nouns 
 with affixes. 
 
 1 p 7 
 
 abs. tOr-» family , 
 
 A 7 7 
 
 const. 
 
 def. 
 
 
 1st. pers. sing. 
 
 com. 
 
 . 7 7 
 
 my family 
 
 2nd.. 
 
 masc. 
 
 A 7 
 
 % . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 *7) 
 
 % . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 oi 
 
 his . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 aiAoj.^ 
 
 her . 
 
 1st. pers. phi. 
 
 com. 
 
 7 a 7 
 
 our . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 •X 7 V 
 
 % CL 
 
 your . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 A 7 7 
 
 your . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 X 7 7 
 
 ^OOIlVD;-* 
 
 their . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 'Ts 
 
 their ...... 
 
 5 
 
66 
 
 NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1st. pers. sing. 
 
 com. 
 
 * p 7 
 
 my families 
 
 2nd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 V D V 
 
 thy . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fern. 
 
 'A 
 
 % . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 cnA^^j* 
 
 is 
 
 /m . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fern. 
 
 P P 7 
 
 OlA.O;_» 
 
 /*<?r . 
 
 1st. pers. pin. 
 
 com. 
 
 7. P 7 
 
 \A^r-» 
 
 . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 X . P 7 
 
 your . 
 
 2nd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 P 7 
 
 r -L.OA^^» 
 
 'A 
 
 your . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 masc. 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 ^ocnA^j-* 
 
 their . 
 
 3rd. 
 
 fem. 
 
 'A 
 
 their . 
 
 p 7 
 
 with the affix _ transfers the v from the 
 first to the following letter; thus, _ Z-. a my daughter ; 
 hut it remains in the others; as, thy daughter, 
 
 xCloL-Jz your daughter . 
 
 31. Numerals and Particles with Affixes. 
 
 Numerals also receive the affixes of masculine nouns 
 in the plural number; thus, these two , masc., 
 
 or_»Z 'ill these two, fern., .octl/aHZ these three , masc., 
 
 
 
 ^ocrLAZ^jf these four, ^oc these five, ^ooi222l» 
 these six, « these seven, ^ocru^iA dZ these eight, 
 
 pauA LmL these nine , .7 ten. 
 
 
NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 67 
 
 When the singular affixes are annexed, they have 
 the power of possessive pronouns, and possess there¬ 
 fore another signification. For example, oiZj-Oll his 
 
 is 
 
 ten, tliy ten, their ten; and we find 
 
 very frequently in the New Testament m/ ; rnv ;Z his 
 
 'Ts IS 
 
 twelve, speaking of the twelve disciples of Christ. 
 
 A great number of particles take the affixes; as, 
 in, . . o in me, in thee; \ to, to you; 
 
 from, m iSo from him, ivn from us; jXccio after, 
 
 1\ Is is Is 
 
 after them, &c. Some particles take the 
 
 is 
 
 affixes of masc. nouns p]u.; as, before, 
 
 before me, ...vn 'n before thee; so likewise ow or 
 upon, v£lLkj jfor, instead of, and others. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 32. In Syriac, as in Hebrew, the root of the verb 
 is the 3rd. pers. sing. numb, masculine gender of the 
 first conjugation. Most of the roots are triliteral, a few 
 are quadriliteral. The triliteral roots have a vowel 
 under the second letter, and make only one syllable. 
 
 The different forms of the verb, which express various 
 modifications of the original sense, are usually called 
 conjugations. They amount to eight, of which four 
 have an active, and four a passive, and sometimes a 
 reciprocal signification. They derive their names from 
 the verb VsJLss, and are contained in the following table, 
 from which the characteristic of each conjugation may 
 be observed. 
 
 
 Act. 
 
 
 Pass. 
 
 
 1 
 
 Peal 
 
 
 2 Ethpeel 
 
 i\ n\ 
 
 3 
 
 Pael 
 
 'T\ 
 
 4 Ethpaal 
 
 ALLZl 
 
 5 
 
 Aphel 
 
 -n 
 
 6 Ethtaphal 
 
 AlaZZ] 
 
 -7N 
 
 7 
 
 Shaphel 
 
 w: 
 
 'ts 
 
 8 Eshtaphal 
 
 "7N 
 
 The Peal 
 
 conjugation 
 
 is the same 
 
 as the Kal 
 
 the Hebrews; that is, it expresses the verb in its sim¬ 
 plest form and meaning. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 69 
 
 Ethpeel is the passive of the preceding conjugation, 
 and like the other passive conjugations has the syllable 
 L) prefixed*. 
 
 Pael is the Piel of the Hebrews ; when the signi¬ 
 fication of the Peal conjugation is intransitive, the Pael 
 
 makes it transitive; as, he was just , Pael he 
 
 justifiedi sometimes it expresses the Peal sense with 
 greater energy; as, he sought , Pa. he sought dili - 
 
 gentlij . This conjugation has a causative sense in some 
 
 A 
 
 verbs; as, he bought , ^\ he caused to buy , i. e. 
 
 he sold. To the Pael is sometimes assigned the sense 
 of commanding , permitting and declaring what is ex¬ 
 pressed by the Peal, and sometimes these two conju¬ 
 gations have the same signification. 
 
 Ethpaal is the passive of the preceding conjugation. 
 As the Pael, in many instances, signifies to make or 
 cause to do whatever is indicated by the Peal, the 
 Ethpaal will necessarily signify to be made to do that 
 which is denoted by the Peal; and hence it is that 
 the Peal and Ethpaal conjugations in some verbs pos¬ 
 sess the same meaning; as, he thought , .rvl ^ 7] 
 
 he was made to think , i. e. he thought. 
 
 * Professor Lee in his Heb. Gram, supposes Z*j to be a frag- 
 
 0 
 
 ment of the verb U'l he came; that it was originally written in 
 
 full; but in process of time it was pronounced and afterwards 
 written with the verb, the sense of which it qualified. See in his 
 Chap, on Heemanti nouns , his account of the force of this and 
 other particles which are prefixed to primitive words. 
 
70 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Aphel corresponds to the Hiphil of the Hebrews. 
 In sense it is usually causative of Peal; as, ^5 he 
 
 remembered , Aph. -i ^] 7 he caused to be remembered , 
 he commemorated . It is also found to possess the sig¬ 
 nification of desiring , 'permitting , declaring , exhibiting , 
 
 &c. whatever is indicated by the Peal; as, he 
 
 permitted or granted power , ^n \ | 7 he exhibited trou - 
 
 ble. In some instances it has an intransitive meaning; 
 
 as, 5ouj 7 it shone . The characteristic is ] 7 prefixed to 
 the root. 
 
 The preceding conjugations are of very frequent use, 
 and are acknowledged by all Grammarians. Those which 
 follow are of much rarer occurrence. 
 
 The Ethtaphal is the passive of the preceding con¬ 
 jugation. It is formed from the Aphel by prefixing 
 the particle 2], and changing the Olaph, the charac- 
 
 7 \ 
 
 teristic of the Aphel conjugation, into Thau. Examples 
 of this form are seldom found. See Mark xiii. 24, 
 (Philox. vers.) the sun shall be darkened. 
 
 'b 
 
 The Shaphel conjugation is generally considered to 
 have the same signification as the Aphel; it is formed 
 by prefixing J* to the root, and like the Pael and 
 Aphel takes * under the second radical instead of v. 
 By many persons this conjugation has been referred 
 to quadriliteral verbs; but it is found so frequently— 
 much more so than the Ethtaphal—that Michaelis and 
 others have made it a separate conjugation of triliterals. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 71 
 
 Examples are, • he made or caused to serve , 
 
 * 
 
 he inflamed, Z he made perfect. 
 
 *T\ 
 
 Eshtaphal is the passive of the preceding conjuga¬ 
 tion, and is formed from it by prefixing Zj, transposing 
 
 'TS 
 
 the Z with the and changing * under the second 
 radical into v. 
 
 The Eshtaphal conjugation agrees in form with the tenth 
 conjugation of Arabic verbs. 
 
 If the first radical of a verb be ], *co, y w_», it is 
 transposed with Z of the particle Z] in the Ethpeel and 
 
 ns 
 
 Ethpaal conjugations; as, .n he was left, instead 
 
 71 7 > 
 
 of ^cicl»Z] ; he was If ted up, instead of ^qZmbZ') . 
 
 'TS IS 'D 
 
 After 1 , the Z is changed into 5 , and after ^ into 
 as, — he was conquered, he was crucified. 
 
 X ns 'IS ^71 
 
 Verbs are either regular or irregular. The former 
 class includes all those verbs which preserve their radi¬ 
 cals unchanged throughout all their inflexions, the latter 
 those which lose or undergo a change of one or more 
 radicals. 
 
 There are two tenses, the prmterite and future. 
 Their forms are and and these forms 
 
 IS 
 
 determine the past and future times more accurately 
 than they do in Hebrew. The present tense may he 
 expressed by the active participle with the aid of the 
 personal pronouns. By means also of the auxiliary verb 
 two other tenses are defined ; namely, the imperfect 
 and pluperfect, of which some account will he after¬ 
 wards given. 
 
72 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Sciadrensis in his Gram. 
 
 as follows : ] ^Vn r .r> 
 
 • \ 
 
 p. writes on the tenses 
 
 &o ? ]h£ 1 ^hi 
 
 ]i n|n ^o|oj, tLai ALd|£. Tenses also 
 
 are three , which we number in the first mood; namely , the prce- 
 terite , the present and the future. By the present tense he 
 means the active participle with a personal pronoun, and there 
 is no doubt that this combination is so often used for the pur¬ 
 pose of representing a verb in the present tense, not only in 
 the versions of the scriptures, but also in Syriac writings 
 of a later date, that a grammarian may with propriety, as 
 Sciadrensis has done, give to this construction the name of 
 
 a present tense, ioio? Uni. In this respect the Syriac 
 language is much more perfect than any of the others which 
 belong to the Shemetic class. In Arabic the tense which the 
 
 grammarians designate resembling , viz. the form 
 
 w* o’ 
 
 t_ 
 
 is very uncertain as to the time it is intended to mark. 
 Sometimes, when accompanied by certain particles, such as 
 
 (jw it expresses the future; at other times, when it 
 
 is preceded by U it has the force of the present; but in 
 numerous instances the context alone can determine the tense 
 which this form of the verb is designed to indicate. So like¬ 
 wise in iEthiopic there is so much indefiniteness on this point, 
 that Ludolph, in his JEthiopic Grammar, calls ^7-f) Q tempus con- 
 tingens , which he translates facit or faciet , p. 43 ; and in p. 37 
 he instructs us in this tense as follows: “ Contingens tarn 
 Prsesens, quam Futurum Indicativi represent at.” 
 
 The different numbers, persons and genders are 
 formed by prefixes and affixes joined to the root of 
 the verb, as in the Hebrew. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 73 
 
 The imperative form is used in an affirmative 
 sense. A negation or prohibition is expressed by the 
 future tense and the particle $ not, placed before it. 
 
 The infinitive is in its nature an abstract noun, 
 and as such receives the pronominal affixes. It has 
 an active, neuter, or passive sense; and when added 
 to the verb will give intensity to the signification. 
 
 33. Before we proceed to give the tables of the 
 different classes of verbs, it is desirable to present the 
 student with the tenses, &c. of the substantive verb 
 
 ]ooi he was, and of A_»] is, which are peculiar in 
 
 x 
 
 their forms, and because the former is much used in 
 the general conjugations. 
 
 
 Prceterite Tense. 
 
 
 Person. 
 
 Sing. Number. 
 
 Gender, 
 
 1 
 
 A_,ocn 
 
 X 
 
 I was 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 Zuocn 
 
 tliou wast 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 _»A_»ooi 
 
 thou wast 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 ]<001 
 
 he was 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 Zocn 
 
 she was 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 Plural Number. 
 
 
 1 
 
 y 
 
 ^__»ooi 
 
 we were 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 ^C^LiOOl 
 
 you were 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 ^Zuooi 
 
 you were 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 0001 
 
 they were 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 • • 7 
 
 »001 
 
 they were 
 
 fem. 
 
74 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 
 Person. 
 
 1 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ^OOl] I shall or 
 
 ns ns 
 
 will be 
 
 Gender. 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 looiZ 
 
 ns ns 
 
 thou shalt 
 
 or wilt be 
 
 masc. 
 
 o 
 
 k-jOoiZ 
 
 X 7) 
 
 thou shalt 
 
 or wilt be 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 ]oau 
 
 ns ns 
 
 he shall or will be 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 ]ocnZ 
 
 ns ns 
 
 she shall or will be 
 
 fem. 
 
 1 
 
 "joCTU 
 
 ns ns 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we shall or will be 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 v 00C7lZ 
 
 ^ ns 
 
 ye shall or will be 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 0 •• . 
 ^—»ooiZ 
 
 ns 
 
 ye shall or will be 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 ^ooou 
 
 ■7> 
 
 they shall 
 
 or will be 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 P •• 
 
 ^OOU 
 
 ns 
 
 they shall 
 
 or will be 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 
 
 loaiioX 
 
 ns 
 
 to be. 
 
 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 
 2 »._»0C71 
 
 X 
 
 Singular. 
 
 or A_»001 be thou 
 
 X 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 X 
 
 be thou 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 2 
 
 v o2uOC7I 
 
 Plural. 
 
 be ye 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 ^A^ocn 
 
 7s 
 
 be ye 
 
 
 fem. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 75 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 
 Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Gender. 
 
 1 
 
 
 / am 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 •X 7 
 
 ooi Aj*| 
 
 art 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 i 7 
 
 v^cn 
 
 thou art 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 OOI OOI 
 
 he is 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 I p 
 
 «_iGl w_ i01 
 
 she is 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 1 
 
 7 7 
 
 ^ .1 K» ^ l.Ki 
 
 we are 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 •X -X 7 
 
 <ojl voAj! 
 
 * 7 * 
 
 ye are 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 _.Aj| 
 
 i\ t\ n\ “ 
 
 ye are 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 •X P P 
 
 ^QJOI ^.jOO 1 
 
 'TS 
 
 they are 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 0 •• P P 
 
 they are 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 ]ocji 
 
 - 7 > 
 
 being or is 
 
 masc. 
 
 
 a P o 
 
 L*ooi 
 
 being or is 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 ^OCTI 
 
 being or are 
 
 masc. 
 
 
 • • p p 
 
 ^OOI 
 
 being or are 
 
 fem. 
 
76 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 The personal pronouns are frequently used in the 
 place of the substantive verb after a participle, by 
 which means the present tense of verbs may be ex¬ 
 pressed, as will he afterwards seen. We have also 
 the personal pronoun in such an instance; as, ooi 
 
 he is good. In these cases, and are cm- 
 
 T\ 'H 
 
 ployed in preference to ^qjoi and ^joi. 
 
 34. We come next to A_.*j is , which is the same as 
 
 x 
 
 the Hebrew It takes the affixes in the following 
 manner. 
 
 Person. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Gender. 
 
 1 
 
 X 
 
 ice are 
 
 _Ll 
 
 X 
 
 I am 
 
 • 
 
 com. 
 
 2 
 
 
 ye are 
 
 ^A-»] 
 
 i 
 
 thou art 
 
 masc. 
 
 2 
 
 'ts I 
 
 ye are 
 
 X 
 
 thou art 
 
 fem. 
 
 3 
 
 X 
 
 they are 
 
 7 
 
 X 
 
 he is 
 
 masc. 
 
 3 
 
 ^__»CTL_» A_»^ 
 
 they are 
 
 ot_»A_.1 
 
 stie is 
 
 fem. 
 
 i -n i 
 
 If to A_i*| with its affixes be joined the verb ]oai, 
 
 i 
 
 the imperfect tense will be formed; thus, A^ocn 
 
 x 
 
 thou ivcist, ]ocn ^cn_» 7 A_*"| he was. 
 
 x 
 
 The verb A_»l signifies to have , when it is followed 
 
 x 
 
 by Lomad with the pronominal affixes; as, - . \ Zl*T 
 
 X X 
 
 there is for me, i.e. I have . 
 
VERBS. 
 
 77 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Gender. 
 
 4 L.) 
 
 X 
 
 we have 
 
 ZL.1 
 
 I X 
 
 I have 
 
 com. 
 
 A-.] 
 
 X 
 
 ye have 
 
 A LA 
 
 I 
 
 thou hast 
 
 masc. 
 
 TS X 
 
 ye have 
 
 > > A_>] 
 
 *TN I 
 
 thou hast 
 
 fern. 
 
 ^CKJL^ A_»] 
 
 X 
 
 they have 
 
 cri^ A.,] 
 
 ^ i 
 
 he has 
 
 masc. 
 
 A_»] 
 
 X 
 
 they have 
 
 oil A1 
 
 I 
 
 she has 
 
 fern. 
 
 The negative form is A»\ 3 a contraction of ]] 
 and A_>1 ; when it is joined with the pronominal affixes 
 
 X 
 
 we obtain the following, . »\ AjJL there is not for 
 
 X 
 
 me , i. e. I have not , hast not , and so 
 
 on for the others. Or by annexing the affixes to the 
 verb we have, . > V I am not , .. . 7 A . ^ thou art not , 
 
 tzoZ, &c. 
 
 35. We will now give a paradigm of ^uo in all 
 its conjugations, &c. as an example of the inflexion 
 of regular verbs in general. 
 
78 
 
 CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Ethpeel. 
 
 Pael. 
 
 Ethpaal. 
 
 PrEet. 3. masc. 
 
 
 M*zr 
 
 MA 
 
 MAzr 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 Al&A 
 
 Al^AZf 
 
 Al&A 
 
 AlfeAZf 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 AXioZf 
 
 AA|A 
 
 AAlAZf 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 ^AA£j=Zf 
 
 ^AZ4A 
 
 -AA&AZf 
 
 1. com. 
 
 .'ft 7\ 
 
 AX-&_q 
 
 
 • ^ 7 
 
 AX^o 
 
 A^izr 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 oX^jq 
 
 al&oZf 
 
 ol4o 
 
 aA&AZf 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 » \|lQ 
 
 ^XioZf 
 
 . » X |y.n 
 
 ^A|AZT 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 ^oAX^_q 
 
 v 5^zr 
 
 <oAA|A 
 
 *ozz4Azr 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 ^Aiiozr 
 
 ^Al|A 
 
 ^zzoAzr 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 ^zr 
 
 « 7> 7 
 
 ^A4° 
 
 ^zr 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 nV^nAvT 
 
 nVftnvn 
 
 az4A aA 
 
 Imper. masc. 
 
 
 MAzi 
 
 Mi 
 
 mazi 
 
 — n 
 
 fem 
 
 ^ » \o n 
 
 . » \ An71 
 
 . » \ An 
 
 . .\A.n71 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 aXa^o 
 
 aA&AZl 
 
 aX&A 
 
 aA^Azf 
 
 fem. 
 
 » \n A n 
 
 
 „\£.o 
 
 . vazi 
 
 
 
 TN ~ -7N 
 
 1 o 
 
 ^ n 
 
 
 Fut. 3. masc. 
 
 
 
 MAj 
 
 MAzi 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 Ho It 
 
 MAz 
 
 MAzr 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 Holt 
 
 MAz 
 
 MA zr 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 . \ A n7 
 
 :\£n/r 
 
 :\ao; 
 
 ^:\kn?r 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 Holf 
 
 U 
 
 MAf 
 
 MAzf 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 ^oX^qj 
 
 ^oX^-dAj 
 
 ^qV^Aj 
 
 ^qX^-oAj 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 . t> 
 
 ^4Aa3 
 
 ^A&oj 
 
 ^AAaJ 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 ,aHAZ 
 
 <0±&1X 
 
 ^A; 
 
 ^AZZ” 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 A&Az 
 
 ^4ozr 
 
 ^s&Az 
 
 ^MLir 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 Holt 
 
 
 MAa3 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 MA 
 
 ^XXoAId 
 
 ^,oAo 
 
 MAasd 
 
 pass. 
 
 X 
 
 
 MAio 
 
 
example he slew . 
 
 79 
 
 Aphel. 
 
 Ethtaphal. 
 
 Shaphel. 
 
 Eshtaphal. 
 
 U°t 
 
 amm 
 
 AM 
 
 amm 
 
 ^4of 
 
 aMM’ 
 
 aim 
 
 aimm 
 
 amt 
 
 Alio22T 
 
 AZAcA 
 
 aml.]- 
 
 ^AA&of 
 
 -AlioZZf 
 
 ^.aAM* 
 
 
 AA&oT 
 
 AlioZZf 
 
 aAM 
 
 Al&Mf 
 
 <A&4 
 
 cAMZf 
 
 cAM 
 
 Mr 
 
 ...\lnf 
 
 . .\RA;;f 
 
 . .\j\nl 
 
 - .V^nA.f 
 
 <oAA&4 
 
 ,oAlMZf 
 
 ,oAAM» 
 
 M4Mf 
 
 t> # ^ «v 
 
 ^.AlA-o] 
 
 MMtf 
 
 ^ZAM 
 
 MU 
 
 am 7 
 
 MMf 
 
 . •» 7 
 
 M-&^-» 
 
 MMr 
 
 
 Q±bnlt& 
 
 •X • ? 7 
 
 o m4-q-«m 
 
 •X , P 7 -ft 
 
 n\£.nA.m^n 
 
 
 AMU 
 
 am 
 
 
 *-*A&Af 
 
 .MM 
 
 
 
 a\4of 
 
 oAMZl 
 
 o.\4 Q -» 
 
 qX&oA^') 
 
 r^A&of 
 
 ^ -7> 
 
 MMZ] 
 
 •7> -n 
 
 ^. \&n » 
 
 7> 7N 
 
 7> "" 7> 
 
 A&u 
 
 AMa3 
 
 AM 1 
 
 ^LJ 
 
 AM 
 
 amt 
 
 AMz 
 
 AMM 
 
 AM 
 
 amt 
 
 AMZ 
 
 M' 
 
 k l\Kn; 7 
 
 
 » \ Aol^ 
 
 :\hnA.r 
 
 
 
 
 
 AM 
 
 am# 
 
 AM- 
 
 M’ 
 
 
 •X . . 7 . * 
 
 ^o\^oZ.Aj 
 
 •X . . 7 
 
 ^aM^Q-ft-J 
 
 
 MM 
 
 MMAj 
 
 
 M 40 M 
 
 MM 
 
 p4nl£ 
 
 
 MMM 
 
 MM 
 
 MM” 
 
 MMz 
 
 MMM 
 
 AM 
 
 AMa3 
 
 
 AMM 
 
 AM> 
 
 AMAia 
 
 V) 
 
 \J^oLmlD 
 
 a|M 
 
 
 ^J!o.«Ld 
 
 
80 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 36. Observations on Regular Verbs. 
 
 The Prceterite. 
 
 The first letter of the root is generally without 
 a vowel, the second has for the most part v, but 
 sometimes it has * 9 especially in intransitive verbs 
 and verbs denoting the affections, qualities, or sensa¬ 
 tions of the mind ; as, he ceased , Zato he 
 
 blushed , he cleaved , he slept, ^_i5 he 
 
 t> n, -n 
 
 trembled , • he laid down , o - he inhabited. 
 
 ^ "7N 
 
 Also verbs whose middle radical is Olaph; as, 
 
 he enquired , he was hoary. Some verbs there 
 
 are which admit both ? and *; as, and .mv\ /ze 
 
 eaten; but in many of these instances a difference 
 of signification is denoted; thus, he absolved , and 
 
 So'v - he was absolved. Similarly . 'and 
 
 Those also whose first radical is Yud have frequently 
 * under the second; as, he set. 
 
 The Yud of the feminine gender, third person, 
 plural number is sometimes omitted and the verb is 
 written as they slew , fern. The same occasionally 
 
 happens to Vau of the masculine gender. The reason 
 is that these letters are never pronounced. 
 
 Nun paragogic is added in some instances both 
 to the masc. and fern, genders of the third person, 
 plural number, but more frequently to the latter; 
 as, v n\^ . third pers. plu. masc. and fern. 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 81 
 
 The force of this particle is supposed to he that 
 of giving energy or certainty to the expressions in 
 which it is found to occur. 
 
 The Ethpeel of the 3rd. pers. sing. fern, in some 
 
 examples terminates in Yud; as, oiAdoj . » his 
 
 place was not hiown. Bar. Heb. Chron. 86 . 5. See 
 also 135. 5; 482. 8 . 
 
 o and ^ at the end of the 3rd. pers. plu^ masc. and 
 fern, are otiose , and on that account are occasionally cast 
 away. 
 
 Some verbs are found to have Olaph prosthetic ; 
 as, he found . 
 
 The numbers and persons of this tense are formed 
 by affixing a particle of one of the personal pronouns 
 
 •x y ^7 7 
 
 to the radical letters; thus, ^oAZJ^o for ^oAjj ^ 40 . 
 
 The Future. 
 
 This Tense seems to be formed in the active con¬ 
 jugations by prefixing certain abbreviated forms of 
 the personal pronouns to the imperative mood ; thus, 
 
 ^q4o] for ^a4o and ]j"); ^a4oZ for ^a4o and 
 
 Ajf. 
 
 In the passive conjugations the same forms are 
 used instead of } of the particle Zj. 
 
 Verbs having * under the middle radical of the 
 prseterite, in the future take v ; as, ,_4o]; those also 
 
 6 
 
82 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 whose third radical is a guttural or Rish take 
 A few verbs submit to no rule as to the vowels 
 which they receive; thus, I will receive, which 
 
 'Ts 'h 
 
 has the same vowels as the Heb. 
 
 • . V 
 
 The second and third persons singular feminine 
 sometimes admit Yud otiose or paragogic at the end; 
 
 thus, \ /y oZ and Z. 
 
 X ^ ^ 
 
 The prseformative letters are not four, as in Hebrew, 
 
 namely, but only three, namely, ^Z). The third 
 
 person sing, and plu. of both genders take j instead of 
 
 _» as in Hebrew, probably from jjoi. 
 
 It is certainly somewhat remarkable that the prefix 
 for the 3rd. pers. of the fut. should be Nun, when in Heb. 
 and also in Chald. Arab, and ACthiop. it is Yud. The 
 deviation of the Syriac in this particular from the rest of the 
 Shemetic languages has been a puzzle to many, and has given 
 rise to various conjectural explanations. The one however 
 in which Grammarians have seemed most inclined to repose, 
 is this, viz. that the Nun was written for Yud by mistake. 
 This opinion is expressed as follows by Hoffman, but in 
 which this distinguished linguist does not at all concur. 
 “ Nun praeform. 3 personae multis suspectum fuit, quia in 
 cognatis dialectis Yud inveniebatur, neque dubitarunt littera- 
 rum Yud et Nun, quae sane sunt figura simillimae, in auxi- 
 lium vocare permutationem facillimam.” Now this mode of 
 accounting for Nun instead of Yud appears to me in the 
 highest degree improbable; indeed almost absurd, when we 
 consider that the language was written and spoken at the 
 same time, and that Nun is so unlike Yud in pronunciation 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 83 
 
 that it is next to impossible that one letter should be mis¬ 
 taken for the other. It is better therefore that we should 
 rest satisfied with the fact, that the fut. form of the 3rd. 
 pers. is and not V\ nAn . . than to attempt to explain 
 
 what, for want of data, is obviously inexplicable. 
 
 is the third pers. sing. masc. and the first 
 
 T\ 
 
 pers. plii. masc.; hut the context will determine the 
 person which is to be taken. 
 
 The verb / he obeyed , receives ^ for * through 
 
 i 
 
 the whole of the Ethpeel conjugation, except the infin., 
 which is regular; thus, praet. .nr>. ^ imper. ora . H } } 
 
 X 'T) I > 
 
 part. ,£Q_»_2 l£A1o. 
 
 X TS 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 The Infinitive of all the conjugations has Mem 
 praeformative. The Peal is masculine. The others 
 have the termination o, and are feminine. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 The observation on the vowel placed over the second 
 radical of the future holds good in the imperative; as, 
 o, ^v make ye , ooVn ? sleep ye. In the Ethpeel and 
 
 Ethpaal conjugations the middle radical has no vowel, 
 and under it is placed the linea occultans. This pecu¬ 
 liarity has probably arisen from the general practice of 
 people to utter a command in a hasty and an abrupt 
 manner. 
 
 Nun paragogic is sometimes found with the forms 
 of the imper. in the Peal, Pael and Aphel conjuga¬ 
 tions; as, v ddcLdo for cAd^o. 
 
 6—2 
 
84 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 The Participle active Peal is always written as 
 without the Vau, which is inserted in the He- 
 
 ns 
 
 brew participial noun Kal. This circumstance arises 
 
 from Vau not being used with the vowel hut 
 with \ On the contrary the passive participle has 
 with the vowel 1 ; as, The participles of 
 
 x 
 
 all the other conjugations are derived from the prae- 
 terite by prefixing Mem. This letter is very probably 
 
 a particle of the pronoun ^o, ,_1 d, or jlo; so that 
 ^ An^n is lie who slayeth , i. e. one slaying . In the 
 
 ns 
 
 passive and Aphel conjugations the Olaph is omitted 
 and its vowel taken by the Mem. 
 
 The part. sometimes takes the vowel v on 
 
 X 
 
 7 
 
 the first rad., especially on intrans. verbs; as, » m . W 
 
 x x 
 
 astonished , Luke i. 21. 
 
 From the last remark but one must be exempted 
 some verbs of the Aphel conjugation, which retain the 
 Olaph when another letter is prefixed; as, » 
 
 ns 
 
 permitting to live. This is also the case in the fu¬ 
 ture. 
 
 The Olaph of the Aphel conjugation is changed 
 
 y y y y 
 
 in the Ethtaphal into Z; as, ^j^qZASo for ^^.qIASd. 
 
 ns ns 
 
 This is likewise true in the whole conjugation. 
 
 37. The gutturals produce a few anomalies, and only a 
 few; for the Syrians have not so great a variety of vowel 
 changes as the Hebrews. Verbs, the third radical of 
 
REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 85 
 
 which is oi, oj, vx or 5, have in the future and imperative 
 Peal for the most part the vowel v under the middle 
 radical. In the other conjugations and the active parti¬ 
 ciple Peal, they have v in the place of *; as, 
 
 y y y y y y 
 
 worshipping , oojij mlD glorying, he mocked, ^ 53 ] he 
 
 commemorated. 
 
 The verbs he consoled, 1&4’ he defiled, *|] ^ he pol¬ 
 
 luted, in the Pael and Ethpaal conjugations, have the same 
 changes of the vowels as the gutturals which are mentioned 
 in the preceding paragraph. 
 
 38. The Present Tense is formed by the participles 
 (form and the personal pronouns placed after 
 
 them; thus, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 'T, 
 
 001 
 
 I am slaying 
 thou art slaying 
 thou art slaying 
 lie is slaying 
 she is slaying. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 41 v 1^40 
 
 ^ ™ T 
 
 we are slaying I 
 
 l masc. 
 
 ye are slaying I 
 &c. 
 
 7 v » p 
 
 we are slaying 
 ye are slaying 
 
86 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 The third pers. plu. is expressed simply by the 
 act. part, in the plural number. 
 
 These auxiliary pronouns are sometimes contracted 
 and affixed to the verb; as, AlLguo, thou art 
 
 slaying , second pers. sing. masc. and fern. 
 
 The substantive verb added to the participial 
 form ^40 will sometimes express the imperfect tense; 
 
 7 > 
 
 as, looi he was slaying. But if this verb be 
 
 added to the praeterite it will sometimes make the 
 pluperfect tense; as, loan he had slain. 
 
 The pluperfect tense will not always be determined 
 in this manner; for it sometimes happens that the 
 auxiliary verb is thus found with the praeterite, when 
 the context will not permit it to signify the pluper¬ 
 fect tense. In such case the praeterite or imperfect 
 tense will be expressed. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 39- Large classes of verbs deviate from the fore¬ 
 going paradigm of and present many irregularities 
 in the process of conjugation. They are produced by 
 nearly the same causes as in Hebrew, namely, by 
 gutturals, which have been already noticed; by the 
 letters } o ; by the first radical being Nun; or by 
 
87 
 
 tr tt 
 
 VERBS OR . . 
 
 the second and third radicals being the same. Indeed 
 the same classes of irregular verbs exist in the Hebrew, 
 Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic and the whole of that family 
 of languages. 
 
 We have seen that the verb is employed to 
 
 designate the conjugations. The classes of irregular verbs 
 also are usually denoted, for the sake of brevity, by one 
 
 of the letters in ; thus, ja, . . cy stand for 
 
 tr n 
 
 verbs the first radical of which is ] w or j; K ai, 
 
 those the middle radical of which is | o or 
 u , or the second and third radicals the same; and finally 
 
 " tr 
 
 B, -X, those the last radical of which is *) or u , 
 
 40. Verbs or 
 
 1. In accounting for the anomalies which exist 
 in this class, it is to be observed that Olaph or 
 
 Yud beginning a word must have a vowel; as, 
 
 he was anxious , ^ he begot , and not 
 
 See § 5. 
 
 2. In the middle of a word Olaph or Yud and 
 the preceding letter cannot be both without vowels. 
 This is the consequence of what is stated in (1); 
 for in those forms where two consonants without 
 vowels come together the Olaph or Yud would begin 
 a syllable, and would consequently require a vowel as 
 much as at the beginning of a word. 
 
 3. This vowel of the Olaph or Yud is generally 
 remitted to the preceding letter; but when an ad- 
 
88 VERBS OR 
 
 dition is made to the end of the word, to avoid 
 the concourse of several letters without vowels, the 
 Olaph or Yud retains its vowel; thus, Z^Zj he was 
 
 7\ 1 ns 
 
 begotten, n\n ]7] they were corroded , 7,V1/1 / was 
 
 n\ ns ns ns ns 
 
 begotten . 
 
 4. In the Aphel, Shaphel, and their passive con¬ 
 jugations, the Olaph or Yud is changed into Vau, 
 which coalesces with the preceding y and makes the 
 
 diphthong an; as, 
 
 ns ns 
 
 5. Olaph and Yud are dropped in the future 
 
 first person singular; as, I shall eat , for 
 
 y 
 
 / shall beget . 
 
 X 
 
 6. Verbs are regular in the Pael and Ethpaal 
 conjugations, which are therefore exceptions to (5). 
 
 7. In the Peal conjugation the vowel of the 
 Olaph is ^ in the prset. In the pass, participle it is 
 y . In the imper. in those cases where the second 
 
 vowel is Vtlie first is y ; as, ^o_of eat thou , masc.; 
 but if the second vowel be Y, the first is ^; as, 
 
 Ao) say thou , masc. A similar rule is observed in the 
 
 ns 
 
 future tense, namely, when the second vowel is * the 
 first is % and when the second is y the first is x . 
 
 8. The Olaph in the Ethpeel and Ethpaal con¬ 
 jugations is sometimes changed into Z; as, ,_k*ZZ 1 from 
 
VERBS OR . . g>v 
 
 89 
 
 ,-L] lie took , ^JZ2] he lamented. Indeed Olaph pre- 
 
 ceded by Thau is frequently changed into Thau for 
 the sake of euphony. 
 
 9. Olaph or Yud in the middle of a word rests 
 in general in * or x . The latter is sometimes changed 
 into the former. 
 
 The verb Vi he departed , makes its imperative mood 
 of the Peal conjugation thus, 
 
 ,_Ai all i 
 
 n\ ns ns as ns 
 
 The ^ of 'Sll has the tinea occultans as often as it 
 
 ns 
 
 ought to have a vowel from the analogy of the regular 
 verb, and Zain by the same rule is without one. In such 
 
 cases the vowel of Lomad is remitted to Zain; as, Alii 
 
 “ ns 
 
 she departed. 
 
 In the passive part. Peal the radical ^ in some verbs 
 
 y 
 
 receives the vowel v instead of 1 ; as, .<* . \ . taught , Rom. 
 
 x 
 
 ii. 18. 
 
 y 
 
 Yud in the verb *o<n_» has no need of the vowel 1 ; 
 
 because the second radical is not pronounced, and therefore its 
 vowel is remitted to the first. In the imper. we have 
 
 The Yud remains in the Aphel conjugation in the verbs 
 he ejaculated, .n y he sucked. 
 
90 
 
 VERBS g*> . 
 
 ^>1 he was faithful , in the Aphel conjugation takes 
 
 'TS 
 
 cji as the characteristic, and *j is changed into ; thus, 
 V) . m he believed; so Heb. Arab. { j^. 
 
 Some verbs beginning with Yud reject this radical in 
 
 y y 
 
 the inf. and fut. Peal; as, he knew , inf. ; ^oA_» he 
 
 m • 
 
 I 'TS "TS 1 
 
 y 
 
 set , fut. jdAj. 
 
 41. 
 
 Verbs 
 
 
 The anomalies belonging to this class of verbs 
 are only few; the principal one is the rejection of 
 Nun in certain situations, and the rule is this: when¬ 
 ever Nun is at the end of a syllable and without a 
 vowel, according to the analogy of the regular verb, 
 it is rejected. We have therefore fut. Peal *qq_£u 
 
 ns 
 
 Ne-puk , for *ocl£llj Nen-puk , inf. .n for ^oAjlIo. 
 
 In the imper. Peal the Nun is thrown away at 
 
 the beginning of the word; as, for *oqAj. The 
 
 reason of this elision is perhaps the difficulty of pro¬ 
 nouncing it with rapidity in such a situation, and it 
 has therefore been neglected in writing. 
 
 The Ethpeel, Pael and Ethpaal conjugations of 
 these verbs are quite regular in all their forms. 
 
 Verbs of this class are not found in the Shaphel 
 and its passive conjugation. 
 
7 
 
 conjugation of verbs r _£^. ex. . n m he ivent forth , 91 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Afel. 
 
 Ethtafal. 
 
 Pnet. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 
 ^,‘f 
 
 •cJaZZl 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 A 7 * 
 
 An^ i 
 
 Anaf 
 
 hncfl 7] 
 
 1 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 AnAj 
 
 An^f 
 
 Ani/ZZl 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 ^AoAj 
 
 -Aoaf 
 
 ^AnaZZI 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 -n .7 
 
 O.Q.^1 
 
 An A7 7] 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 oqAj 
 
 onaZZ] 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 .-■j-qAi 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 n 
 
 . . nn//] 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 • X A 7 
 
 v oAn^u 
 
 ^Aoaf 
 
 voAaaZZ] 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 'T* 7 
 
 A 14 I 7 
 
 r ^An^| 
 
 ^An^ZZ] 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 * i 7 
 
 ^oiiZZl 
 
 n 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 7 n 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 o o nCn 
 
 •X D 7. •?> 
 
 q-q^ZALo 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 ^)0£) 
 
 - *i 7 
 
 *oa| 
 
 xQ AZZ] 
 
 fem. 
 
 vjJDQ£) 
 
 * i 7 
 
 ^-qA7 7] 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 dOQ£) 
 
 71 1 7 
 
 ociaj 
 
 o-dAZZ] 
 
 fem. 
 
 V ->.00£1 
 
 -n -n ~ 7 
 
 > 
 
 v ' 
 
 w^zzi 
 
 "" n 
 
 Fut. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 %£)Q_2lJ 
 
 -r, 7 
 
 J"L2U 
 
 *qA2.Aj 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 •X . 7> 
 
 ci-QQ£li 
 
 .. o^;; 7 
 
 77 , 
 
 . » nn77 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 •X «T> 
 
 kOO£)L 
 
 ^i)Z 7 
 
 .aaZf 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 » nc?)f 
 
 ■ A ^77' 
 
 1. com. 
 
 xOO£>) 
 
 v v 
 
 .clsI 
 
 v ^zzi 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 •X ^ 
 
 <Q_Q_£U 
 
 7, 7 
 
 <00^1 
 
 P 7 
 
 ^-CL^U 
 
 ^oq^ZAj 
 
 n n 7 7 Aj 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 1. com. 
 
 p .?> 
 
 iDd£U 
 
 ^z 7 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 V. .■»' 
 
 ^CLQ£)ZA 
 
 V -X 7. O 
 
 a^AA 
 
 7 7, » 
 
 .nn/A j 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 n P 
 
 xO-gU 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 %n ^Vo 
 
 ^ZAi 
 
 pass. 
 
 A.1 
 
 7 7 
 
 vn^ik) 
 
 
92 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS |^ 4 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Ethpeel. 
 
 Pael. 
 
 Ethpaal. 
 
 Prat. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 
 <> 'TX 
 
 'MZI 
 
 ^of 
 
 ^ollf 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 Ai=r 
 
 Aioizr 
 
 Alof 
 
 Aiofzr 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 Alif 
 
 Aloft* 
 
 Alof 
 
 Aloft* 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 -Aloft’ 
 
 -Alof 
 
 -Aloft* 
 
 1. com. 
 
 Aiof 
 
 Aloft" 
 
 Alof 
 
 Aloft* 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 alof 
 
 aloft* 
 
 alof 
 
 aloft* 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 — lof 
 
 ^ 'TN ^ 
 
 -NoUl 
 
 -lof 
 
 -lollf 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 ,oAloft* 
 
 ,oAlof 
 
 ^Aloft* 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 ^Aloft* 
 
 ^f 
 
 ^Aioin* 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 ^Uf 
 
 ^sr 
 
 ^ft" 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 •X • Pm.'*'* 
 
 a-io \ A k> 
 
 alili 
 
 olilfci 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 
 V Z 1 
 
 
 ^ft 
 
 fem. 
 
 -loof 
 
 -Noft 
 
 -lof 
 
 ^rzi 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 aloof 
 
 aloft 
 
 alof 
 
 aloft 
 
 fem. 
 
 7\ 
 
 ^in 
 
 'i> -n 
 
 ^i=ft 
 
 Fut. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 'iaotf 
 
 ^1A3 
 
 
 ^olL* 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 — laotf: 
 
 -T» -7\ 'VS 
 
 -lo]ZZ 
 
 -loir 
 
 -lift" 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 ^izz 
 
 
 ^ft" 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 x 7 ^ 
 
 ^IZZ 
 
 r^oU’ 
 
 ft^oft" 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 ^U1 
 
 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 
 ,alolA] 
 
 
 ^lol2j 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 gLolAj 
 
 
 ^ft" 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 ^oir 
 
 •X _ 7 -* 
 
 vol^lZl 
 
 ^>U' 
 
 ,aloft* 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 r^oir 
 
 p 7 -t\ 
 
 r±>)LL 
 
 
 gift" 
 
 1. com. 
 
 'iaotf 
 
 ^olAS 
 
 ^13 
 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 'h 
 
 ^]Ak) 
 
 'Mi 
 
 
 pass. 
 
 I 
 
 
 'fcoli 
 
 
EXAMPLE, he eat. 93 
 
 Aphel. 
 
 Ethtaphal. 
 
 Shaphel. 
 
 Eshtaphal. 
 
 
 WZZf 
 
 • 
 
 wm* 
 
 ASsoT 
 
 ZZ^aoZZf 
 
 Alsai 
 
 ZdaoL.f 
 
 Aliof 
 
 Aiioizr 
 
 ZZ^ai 
 
 Al^f 
 
 ^ZZ^of 
 
 ^A-ZiolZf 
 
 *-iAXDQ_» 
 
 ^Alio’ZUf 
 
 ZZ^of 
 
 A!=0 7 zzr 
 
 ZZZaai 
 
 ASsoM* 
 
 aliof 
 
 oVioZZf 
 
 
 olioM" 
 
 ^A£of 
 
 -XsxiZT 
 
 ^a£o; 
 
 ^Licz^r 
 
 
 ^oAXioZZf 
 
 .cA^clI 
 
 ,oZZ^U 
 
 ^Aliol 7 
 
 ^ziio 7 zzf 
 
 
 ^Ali>oL.f 
 
 7 i\o 0 f 
 
 
 7 . -* 7 
 
 i \nn a 
 
 k i 7 \^nA .)' 
 
 
 
 
 
 •X. P 7 
 
 oA^ok) 
 
 <ZlZ,oZAk> 
 
 x. ° v 
 
 Q-±DQ-a±D 
 
 * • P 7 ■* 
 
 n Non A • Vo 
 
 w 
 
 ^olL) 
 
 
 V}oL»] 
 
 . » Von*) 7 
 
 ^.. ^.\n n / / I 
 
 . * 
 
 . » VonA ,*) 
 
 oZZof 
 
 aVnoZZ] 
 
 oZma.* 
 
 *7* 
 
 Q-VzDoZ_»*| 
 
 » Von*) 7 
 
 .\nn 7 ;;] 
 
 _.^\oo w 
 
 ..» \nn?i »1 
 
 ^ T\ 
 
 *7S ^ 
 
 *7\ 
 
 'h " ^ 
 
 ^oi 
 
 ^oZaJ 
 
 W^n I 1 
 
 
 ^oZ 7 
 
 bio’ll 
 
 ^aiZ 
 
 ^ioL.Z' 
 
 W 7 
 
 wzr 
 
 ^oiZ 
 
 ^oL.r 
 
 ^ZsoZ 7 
 
 ^SdoLT 
 
 ^jZZdq»z 
 
 v . WA.r 
 
 
 wzr 
 
 ^oir 
 
 ^oL»T 
 
 ^Q.VnQJ 
 
 ,iWzJ 
 
 \ 
 
 I i 
 
 
 
 ^oZaJ 
 
 v ^n.: i 
 
 ^aoLxi 
 
 ^aV^oZ 7 
 
 ,alao 7 ZZ” 
 
 yoVna^Z 
 
 ^laoL.Z” 
 
 ^StjoZ 7 
 
 ^oir 
 
 Z^aiZ 
 
 ^oL.L' 
 
 
 WZa3 
 
 
 
 ^dqSo 
 
 WZAio 
 
 VWlVn 
 
 WnnA ■» Vn 
 
 ViiasL 
 
 
 W^nlvn 
 
 
94 
 
 // 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS . . 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Ethpeel. 
 
 Praet. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 zz: 
 
 'h I 7\ 
 
 XL) 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 lx 
 
 iXiT 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 IX 
 
 *T\ X ‘1\ 
 
 LXL) 
 
 • 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 ~LX 
 
 • 
 
 H X 'TS 
 
 ~LXD 
 
 1. com. 
 
 LX 
 
 • 
 
 lXlT 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 0^ 
 
 'TS X 'TS 
 
 oXL) 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 .. 
 
 • 
 
 *I\ X IS 
 
 XL) 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 * TS I ^ 
 
 v oZ^Zl 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 xx 
 
 ^zzzLlf 
 
 1. com. 
 
 ^X 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 sx 
 
 •X P X 
 
 o r \^Zlo 
 
 • 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 X 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 r^l 
 
 'TS 
 
 fem. 
 
 < 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 XL) 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 • 
 
 oXL) 
 
 fem. 
 
 T\ X 
 
 ^X) 
 
 T\ "7> 
 
 Fut. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 St 
 
 ♦ 
 
 X ^ 
 
 • 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 ** X 
 
 -Z^ZZ 
 
 • 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 sx 
 
 ”7\ X 'h 
 
 ^zz 
 
 • 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 SSX 
 
 T 7 * 
 
 ^XLL 
 
 1. com. 
 
 ST 
 
 XL) 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 Xt 
 
 (Xtt 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 (St 
 
 (XS 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 XX 
 
 (XX 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 (SX 
 
 (XX 
 
 1. com. 
 
 St 
 
 T\ x -n 
 
 • 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 X 
 
 • 
 
 r l^ASo 
 
 • 
 
 pass. 
 
 X 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 
EXAMPLE, A- lie begot. 95 
 
 7> x 
 
 Aphel. 
 
 Ethtaphal. 
 
 Shaphel. 
 
 Eshtaphal. 
 
 M 
 
 SoUX 
 
 AcA 
 
 • 
 
 A°Af 
 
 is of 
 
 LSo’ux 
 
 » 
 
 ZA<A 
 
 • 
 
 ZAoAl’ 
 
 • 
 
 zAof 
 
 zAoLir 
 
 ZA<A 
 
 zAoAf 
 
 ^LSo\ 
 
 ^zAoizr 
 
 ^zA<A 
 
 • 
 
 ^zAoA'f 
 
 IS of 
 
 zAoZzi" 
 
 "N y 
 
 A,Jacl_» 
 
 * 
 
 ZAoAf 
 
 oAoT 
 
 oAoizr 
 
 oAcA 
 
 • 
 
 o'AoAr 
 
 • 
 
 -Aof 
 
 -Aoizr 
 
 ^AcA 
 
 • 
 
 ^AoL»f 
 
 
 v sz'Aoizr 
 
 ^ZAcA 
 
 v AAoAr 
 
 AAAf 
 
 A^Ao'zzr 
 
 AzAoi 
 
 AzAoAr 
 
 AA°i 
 
 ^Aoizr 
 
 y ^ 7 
 
 ■-j r Aa.> 
 
 V • 
 
 AAoAr 
 
 x .p y 
 
 Q r AOlf) 
 
 SAo'ZAA 
 
 • 
 
 •x .<> y 
 
 o,~aq._®Ao 
 
 x . p y •* 
 
 o^oA-^lo 
 
 • 
 
 Aof 
 
 A°ai 
 
 AcA 
 
 • 
 
 A°Al 
 
 -AoT 
 
 'Ts 
 
 -AolZl 
 
 t-jf^ACL* 
 
 • 
 
 ZaoZl®^ 
 
 ^ | 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 oAoZZl 
 
 Oj^CL® 
 
 Oj^oAjsI 
 
 'T\ 
 
 ^AoZZl 
 
 T* *7> 
 
 A AcA 
 
 V • 
 
 '7s 
 
 r A.oA_»] 
 
 “ -n 
 
 ss 
 
 Ao 7 za3 
 
 • 
 
 AqAj 
 
 • 
 
 AoAA 
 
 ^AoZ 7 
 
 • 
 
 ^Ao 7 ^’ 
 
 w.A<AZ 
 
 -AoAz* 
 
 • 
 
 AoZ 7 
 
 Aolz' 
 
 AAZ 
 
 AoAr 
 
 ^A°- 
 
 ^SoiT 
 
 ,A<AZ 
 
 ^AoLA 
 
 A°T 
 
 Ao 7 zzf 
 
 AAT 
 
 AoAf 
 
 ^O^QJ 
 
 v oAo2A 
 
 AAoAj 
 
 £S°Lm2 
 
 
 v Ao 7 ZaJ 
 
 P. y 
 
 y-AOAj 
 
 v AoLA 
 
 ^AoZ 7 
 
 v oAo 7 ZZ* 
 
 ^cvXa-aZ 
 
 AAoA.r 
 
 v Aor 
 
 ^Ao'zz” 
 
 v AcAZ 
 
 v AoAZ' 
 
 Aai 
 
 • 
 
 Ao’ZAj 
 
 AaAj 
 
 AoLA 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 Soltis 
 
 ^Aa-Lk) 
 
 y v 
 
 J^soLstlo 
 
 AoA 
 
 • 
 
 
 .y y 
 
 r A.a-a-k) 
 
 
9G 
 
 VERBS QA OR . . V . 
 
 The vowel of the second radical in the fut. and 
 impel*. Peal observes generally the same rule as regular 
 verbs ; thus, i lie cut, he breathed, . «..qj 
 
 he fixed, take the vowel x ; but he adhered, 
 
 "7\ 
 
 5Aj it flowed down, have v. There are a few excep¬ 
 tions; as, he descended, which takes x in the 
 
 •7> 
 
 fut. and imper. 
 
 The rule for the removal of Nun does not apply 
 to verbs of this class, when the second and third 
 radicals are the same; nor when the middle radical 
 is one of the quiescent letters; nor in some verbs whose 
 second radical is He. 
 
 .n\cn he ascended , is anomalous, and takes some of its 
 
 'TS 
 
 y V 
 
 forms from the obsolete verb ^ ; as, .n m imper. 
 
 y y 
 
 .n mVn inf. ^Q£d| fut. 
 
 Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation, is oc- 
 casionally retained with the prefixes; as, thou wilt 
 
 bring down, from 
 
 'Ti 
 
 n " 
 
 42. Verbs qa or . . v 
 
 Verbs having Vau and those having Yud for their 
 middle radical letter differ so little from each other in 
 their conjugations, that they may be both compre¬ 
 hended in one class. These letters are sometimes placed 
 in such situations as to lose their consonantel power, 
 and defects in consequence arise in those forms of the 
 verb where that power is lost. 
 
 1. Vau deprived of a vowel for the most part 
 rests in the vowel x . In such a case whenever another 
 
VERBS Q..1 OR . » V . 
 
 97 
 
 vowel is required by the analogy of the regular verb, 
 the Vau is usually changed into Yud; as, S o > n 77] 
 
 i 'is 
 
 for SoaoZZ], Aki^o for AicLO. 
 
 2. Vau for the most part takes the vowel * or 
 x . When therefore another vowel is required by the 
 analogy of the regular verb, the Vau is taken away 
 or changed into Olaph or Yud; as, Soo for 1>oq_q, 
 
 for Socld. 
 
 3. In the Aphel conjugation the Vau is changed 
 into Yud; the vowel % which belongs to Vau, is also 
 changed into x , and this vowel is remitted to the pre¬ 
 ceding letter; as, ^a^o) v for ^ooof. 
 
 X 71 
 
 There are some verbs which preserve the o in the Pael 
 and Ethpaal conjugations; as, jo\ Tie disturbed , foil) Tie was 
 
 7» 'IS 
 
 disturbed. 
 
 In the part. Peal the Vau is changed into Olaph, and 
 is pronounced Yud. When the third radical is a guttural 
 or Rish, the vowel ^ is changed into v. See $ 37. 
 
 Throughout the Ethpeel conjugation Z of the syl¬ 
 lable Z] is doubled, except in the 2nd. pers. fut. This 
 
 'IS 
 
 is the same as in Chaldee, except in the latter lan¬ 
 guage the duplication is made by Dagesh forte. 
 
 The verbs of this class are not found in the Sha- 
 phel and Eshtaphal conjugations. 
 
 There are some verbs having the middle radical Vau, 
 which are not conjugated after the paradigm; namely, 
 7 
 
98 
 
 VERBS Q_V, OR . » k . 
 
 (1) Those which have Olaph or Yud for the 
 third radical; as, ]o_» he was equal, 
 
 i 
 
 he adhered. 
 
 ( 2 ) Such verbs as _^ojcd he desired , he 
 
 IS 
 
 acted unjustly. 
 
 In some verbs a difference of signification is marked 
 by the middle radical Vau being moveable or other¬ 
 wise; as, 5 <Lk» it was white , 5aZi he saw. 
 
 Verbs having Yud for the middle radical letter, 
 preserve it in some of the forms of the Peal conjuga¬ 
 tion ; for instance, A > in the praeterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 oA..>-So 
 
 I 
 
 A_ulD 
 
 X 
 
 wiA.xAo 
 
 i 
 
 ZA-lAD 
 
 X 
 
 •X 
 
 ^oZAjlId 
 
 ^ X 
 
 ZA-i.So 
 
 X 
 
 .ZAjlAD 
 
 wiZA.a-V) 
 
 'IS X 
 
 y 
 
 X 
 
 V A-lAd 
 
 X 
 
 ZA.J.V) 
 
 ^ X 
 
 In the fut. Peal the praeformative letters have no 
 vowel except that which belongs to the first person 
 singular. 
 
 From verbs of this class quadriliteral forms are fre¬ 
 quently derived, and make two additional conjugations, 
 namely, Palpel and its passive Ethpalpal; as, he 
 made a commotion , from v>oj; lie exalted , from 
 
 y>ol. See quadriliteral verbs. 
 
VERBS ]]. 
 
 99 
 
 In he lived , whenever a praeformative is annexed, 
 
 the Yud is taken away and its vowel remitted to the pre¬ 
 ceding consonant; as, inf. ]_kZsD for ] 
 
 43. Verbs 
 
 There are a few anomalies in these verbs, but they 
 are not so numerous nor of a kind to require a para¬ 
 digm. Most of them may be accounted for on the 
 principle stated in § 40; namely, that Olaph remits its 
 vowel to the preceding letter, which was previously 
 without a vowel. Agreeably to this law we have 
 
 he was good, he was old, he enquired, imper. 
 
 Ai put on the shoe. So also in Ethpeel we have 
 
 'TS 
 
 Olaph is sometimes placed before the first radical; 
 we have indeed the following forms, «_»fc>Z1, 
 
 ML), ML). 
 
 'TS 1\ Ts ** 
 
 In Aphel we have he did badly, he 
 
 put on the shoes, he did well. 
 
 In Pael and Ethpaal conjugations Olaph is changed 
 into Yud; as, > [ he prepared, ^l [)\ he was pre- 
 
 pared. 
 
 ft 
 
 44. Verbs ]]. 
 
 This class comprehends the two classes of Hebrew 
 verbs terminating in N and n, and the three classes 
 of Arabic verbs ending in 1 j c*. 
 
 7 —2 
 
100 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS n V . 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Ethpeel. 
 
 Pael. 
 
 Prast. Sing. 3 . masc. 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 P 
 
 So o 
 
 Sn.nZ/f 
 
 n y 
 
 V> » n 
 
 y o 
 
 Akio 
 
 Aku^ZZf 
 
 * 7 7 
 
 Aln^o 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 Akio 
 
 A'.n.oVy 
 
 . -* y 
 
 ASo->-r) 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 ^ZAo-i-n221 
 
 . y 
 
 wjAIq-s-O 
 
 1. com. 
 
 p 
 
 Akio 
 
 Av> . r>77f 
 
 . * y 
 
 A1q-i_o 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 qIoo 
 
 nvn. A;;y 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 o^n->.r) 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 ..y».A;;y 
 
 n y 
 
 . » Sn > o 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 •x . » 
 
 
 •x *7 
 
 ^nASn * n 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 r p 
 
 ^AkiO 
 
 f 
 
 'TS H 7 
 
 ^ALq^-d 
 
 1. com. 
 
 7 P 
 
 itnn 
 
 A;;f 
 
 y -n y 
 
 i Vn » n 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 £ni,ZAk> 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 nVn > nVo 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 fem. 
 
 •X 
 
 ^OQ_D 
 
 So » n77] 
 
 7 
 
 So „ n 
 
 •X 
 
 . . Son r> 
 
 x 
 
 .» So , r>7 7] 
 
 -TS 
 
 7 
 
 . * Vn » o 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 olocLo 
 
 X TS 
 
 oV) i oZZ] 
 
 'Ti 
 
 7 
 
 oVii.r) 
 
 fem. 
 
 IS 
 
 v » V> > .oZZI 
 
 TS X TS 
 
 y 
 
 V „1 Sqj.jD 
 
 Fut. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 Snoni 
 
 So „ n7 A i 
 
 n y 
 
 So. ni 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 . » Son o7 
 
 A;;* 
 
 H y , 
 
 - »Vo»-n/ 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 !>oclo2 
 
 x , ,-n 
 
 ^cu_o77 
 
 -» 7 « 
 
 ^0„> JDL 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 X I . .T> 
 
 ^-j-kXi-QZZ 
 
 1 7 ? 
 
 v ,> V) >.oZ 
 
 1. com. 
 
 •X 
 
 isOQ-O] 
 ^qSqo o i 
 
 Sn_..A77f 
 
 H 7 .11 
 
 .O'V?a-Q 1 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 ^QSfX* ,oZAj 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 Soon i 
 
 p X , _ * 
 
 So t ry A 1 
 
 p y 
 
 ,_Sn . n i 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 •X ‘X • 
 
 yQlOCLOL 
 
 •X X * .n 
 
 ^oin-ji oZZ 
 
 •x y , 
 
 xQlCLi-QL 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 P -X - 
 
 ^LdqldA 
 
 p i , ,ii 
 
 ^Icu-oZZ 
 
 o 7 . 
 
 ^£luOL 
 
 1. com. 
 
 ^OOQl 
 
 ^a»iZAj 
 
 n y 
 
 >CL»-QJ 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 Sola 
 
 'A 
 
 ^aa.r^ZAAo 
 
 So_^oSn 
 
 pass. 
 
 Sa_»_Q 
 
 
 y y 
 
 Sq-x nSp 
 
example, So n n arise thou . 
 
 101 
 
 
 Ethpaal. 
 
 Aphel. 
 
 Ethtaphal. 
 
 Palpel. 
 
 Ethpalpal. 
 
 
 y y 
 
 x .7 
 
 i-a^ZZ'l 
 
 71 7 
 
 1>0jAd5 
 
 7 7 ,.7i 
 
 i*0^1oiZl 
 
 
 A 
 
 . 7 x.7 
 
 ZVl£L»_0| 
 
 as in Ethpeel. 
 
 A^jAd? 
 
 t&frlLT 
 
 
 Aioiizr 
 
 ALcu_o] y 
 
 
 Ak?^o5 
 
 tit&c&LT 
 
 
 wiAkix^Z] 
 
 » nj 
 
 
 «u_»Ak)*iD5 
 
 y 7 ,.7. 
 
 w_.Ak?^lD3Zl 
 
 
 . -n 7 ,.7i 
 
 AVn_^.n7] 
 
 AS£ui>l' 
 
 
 Ak^iol 
 
 . 7i 7 , .71 
 
 ZiOjiojZ) 
 
 
 7 7 - 
 
 aki_i_oZ.| 
 
 qAq_i_q] 
 
 
 'lx 7 
 
 nV>.V>i 
 
 7 7 1 -i* 
 
 qAdjAojZ] 
 
 
 7 7 ,.7t 
 
 . »Vo „ n/ | 
 
 1 *i 7 
 
 . * Vn , n) 
 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 . » ^n.Vn$ 
 
 7 7 , .IN 
 
 . xVn.Vn37] 
 
 
 ♦X 7 7 • 
 
 ^oAln-i„oZ| 
 
 ^oAS^u-d] 7 
 
 
 •X ^ 7 
 
 xOL&D^DJ 
 
 •X . 7 7 , .7* 
 
 v oA1d^d3/ 7 ] 
 
 
 7 7 ,.7i 
 
 ^ALa-k-oZ) 
 
 ^.Zsa^il' 
 
 
 f 71 7 
 
 ^.ALdjAd? 
 
 Z"f 
 
 
 7 7 7 ..71 
 
 ». .nz_| 
 
 7 I .7 
 
 i Vn »_n | 
 
 
 y i \ y 
 
 , I^O-VdS 
 
 7 7 7 ,.7l 
 
 ■ lAnjWl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •X P 7 7i 
 
 nVn . n/An 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 qAo.qAo 
 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 qAdjIdjAd 
 
 •X P 7 71 
 
 q!d^d3ALd 
 
 
 7 7 ,. 
 
 ^Qu-oZj 
 
 ^Qj-D*) 7 
 
 
 ^Lol 
 
 iO^iZ] 
 
 
 . . V> . n71 
 
 w^Aojud] 7 
 
 
 'Tx 
 
 *_xlD^D)Zl 
 
 'TX 
 
 
 alaloZl 
 
 olEu-r)] 7 
 
 
 qAdjAdI 
 
 lx 
 
 oAo^d^ZI 
 
 
 » Vn » n/ | 
 
 » Vn » r>*] 
 
 
 »Vfi.Vnl 
 
 . Vn[vn*71 
 
 
 
 7) X 
 
 
 V 1 
 
 -TI 
 
 'JS 7X 
 
 
 7 7 -n 
 
 » .oAj 
 
 v> » n i 
 
 
 71 7 
 
 7 7 4 7> 
 
 1>o^d3Aj 
 
 
 7 7 . ,ti 
 
 . . Vn » n/ / 
 
 a ^ Vo ft C*) 1 
 
 
 i\ 7 . 
 
 ^ u Lo i .SD5Z 
 
 . > V>»Vr)3/ 7 
 
 
 7 7 « .-T. 
 
 ^Q^_£DZZ 
 
 ^Ql.*JdL 
 
 
 71 7 , 
 
 ^OjAD>Z 
 
 7 7 , ,71 
 
 ^0;Ad3ZZ 
 
 
 x 7 . 
 
 . Vn » n / / 
 
 
 
 .iAoj!d3Z 
 
 
 
 7 7 ,.t> 
 
 ^Qj-IDZ| 
 
 
 
 71 7 .71 
 
 ^o^1d3] 
 
 io^izf 
 
 
 •X 7 71 
 
 ^oV?->-oAj 
 
 v aLa_i_£U 
 
 
 •X 7 
 
 ^qIDjADjJ 
 
 v qAd^1d?Aj 
 
 
 P 7 7i 
 
 •X 7 - ,-n 
 
 ^qAoa-oZZ 
 
 P 7 , ,71 
 
 v ^>. nZZ 
 
 ^aOJ 
 
 ^QAQj-DZ 
 
 p X . 
 
 ^Sq-»-qZ 
 
 
 ^iOfiOsJ 
 
 <qAo;1d3Z 
 
 P 7 , 
 
 v V?;.k)3Z 
 
 P 7 71 
 
 v SO;.1^3Aj 
 
 ^io,so5ZZ* 
 
 , V'iVijZZ* 
 
 V^ 1 
 
 
 7 7 ^ 
 
 i>Q-i_.oAj 
 
 v>. ni 
 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 ^OjAojJ 
 
 7 7 A 71 
 
 ^o^d?Aj 
 
 
 ^q-LoALo ' 
 
 >Q-i_nlD 
 
 
 ^O^DilD 
 
 'TX 
 
 ^o^d?A1d 
 
 'TX 
 
 
 
 !>aaLo 
 
 
 7 7 
 
 SnAnAn 
 
 
102 
 
 tt 
 
 VERBS ]]. 
 
 In the consideration of these verbs, we observe, 
 
 1st. When they receive an addition to the end 
 the Olaph is either taken away or changed into Ynd; 
 thus, ZlL^, A. This arises from the circumstance 
 
 that Olaph is seldom found in the middle of a word 
 beginning a syllable, or quiescent in the middle of 
 a syllable. 
 
 2nd. Participles form the fern, gender according 
 to the rules given in the Chapter on Nouns; as, jl^ 
 
 fern. f em * 
 
 3rd. Olaph in the 3rd. pers. sing, praet. of all the 
 conjugations, except Peal, becomes Yud quiescent in i ; 
 aS, | 
 
 4th. The infin. is subject to the 1st rule; but 
 in other respects it is regular. 
 
 5th. In the imper. Peal and Ethpeel sing, masc., 
 Olaph is changed into Yud; in the former it rests in 
 x , in the latter it makes a diphthong with ?; thus, 
 and wa-XyjZI. But in the other conjugations 
 
 Olaph remains and rests in o. In the fern, o makes 
 a diphthong with In the plural forms the third 
 rad. is taken away in all the conjugations; thus, 
 
 6th. In the fut. tense and participles, Olaph rests 
 in •»; but before the affixes v o and it is taken 
 
 away. Before the affix . Olaph passes into Yud 
 
 moveable; as, 
 
103 
 
 rt 
 
 VERBS ]]. 
 
 In the plu. prset. Peal of the third person we 
 have and for ojl^ a ^ ew * n “ 
 
 stances in the Philoxenian version the Olaph is pre¬ 
 served when the affixes are annexed to them ; as, 
 
 they untied him , Mark xi. 4. 
 
 Some verbs in Peal change Olaph into Yud, and 
 are declined as the praeterite of the other conjugations; 
 thus, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Q-ir-K* 
 
 • 
 
 -7\ 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 • • 
 
 7> X X 
 
 • 
 
 v ; 
 
 Z'_* ,-KJ 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 _> Zv_» 
 
 I 
 
 Zli 
 
 • 
 
 X 
 
 7 
 
 I x 
 
 ZLli-Kt 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 The verb w_.A_»j is not of the Aphel conjugation, as 
 
 i ^ 
 
 is manifest from the vowel * being under the Olaph. 
 It is probably the Peal conjugation with Olaph pros¬ 
 thetic. 
 
 A few verbs of this class have v in the sing, 
 numb. masc. of the imper.; as, drink. 
 
 'h 
 
 In the 3rd. pers. plu. praet. and 2nd. pers. plu. 
 imper. Peal* some verbs take the paragogic forms 
 
 * ^ ’• ^ *«’ 
 
 c * * 
 
104 
 
 ff 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS ]] . 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Ethpeel. 
 
 Pael. 
 
 Praat. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 1. com. 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 1. com. 
 
 0 
 
 > 
 
 \ K y ^ 
 
 7 .7 
 
 A^zr 
 
 oArl 
 
 -Vf 
 
 'n 7 
 
 W ‘ L "X 
 
 . 7 . 7^ 
 
 A \ I 7 
 
 -x 7^ 
 
 . x 7^ 
 
 •x .1 7^ 
 
 T t x ^ 
 
 7 . x 7 ^ 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 0 *T\ 
 
 V 0 
 
 •X . D * 
 
 Id 
 
 •X -P 7 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 
 -V! 
 
 O 7 
 
 <k 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 -V! 
 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 -n . o 
 
 ^H z ! 
 
 
 Fut. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 VS 'TS 
 
 ■?> T\ 
 
 h£i 
 
 7S 7 
 
 V 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 “jk Z 
 
 -M 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 H. 
 
 H ZZ 
 
 ^ z 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 ^H zz 
 
 
 J. com. 
 
 
 
 Sf 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 •x • ^ 
 
 p _ 
 
 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 » \..,A i 
 
 .* V lt i 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 v ^r 
 
 „ 
 
 ^ z 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 'Ti T* 
 
 ' r " z X ; 
 
 •7N _ ^ 
 
 1. com. 
 
 V 
 
 
 v 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 ** o 
 
 *k 
 
 "A *A 
 
 U-^Alo 
 
 -A 7 
 
 V 5 
 
 pass. 
 
 
 
 
p 
 
 EXAMPLE, 1L. he revealed. 
 
 105 
 
 Ethpaal. 
 
 Aphel. 
 
 Ethtaphal. 
 
 Shaphel. 
 
 Eshtaphal. 
 
 
 
 to^r 
 
 
 ~SH 
 
 to.zr 
 
 A^l 
 
 Aix^zzr 
 
 
 Ajztoi 
 
 to,zr 
 
 
 aj^zzt 
 
 A V 1 7 
 
 £._l. -it—» 
 
 A.^^r 
 
 
 
 ^A^zzr 
 
 
 «a*^-T 
 
 
 
 
 AjuS-^_* 
 
 A^A^r 
 
 tozr 
 
 
 a^ZZ| 
 
 -Hr 
 
 o^r 
 
 
 
 ^H V ZZ| 
 
 
 
 to; v zr 
 
 v oA^ 
 
 v azuzqzzr 
 
 v oA^ 
 
 ^^A.r 
 
 
 
 ^A^zzr 
 
 
 
 i A’.rf 
 
 1,^.1 
 
 ’ .'xVA' 
 
 1 » \ .. <k 
 
 , ,’..x r t A -r 
 
 V W ' 
 
 
 ^ T 1 
 
 
 
 * .£> 7 71 
 
 n »\ ^AVn 
 
 •X .P 7 
 
 n . \. Vn 
 
 A > * 
 
 •X .p 7 
 
 •X . P 7 ti 
 
 n » \ ^-A • Vn 
 
 
 
 
 n » \ ^ 
 
 
 P 7 
 
 \ z ! 
 
 P 7 
 
 \^ z ! 
 
 P 7 
 
 V 
 
 \ L ! 
 
 
 
 to^i 
 
 
 to*H 
 
 
 
 <^! 
 
 °v 
 
 “V-! 
 
 , - ^ u ; 1 
 
 • * ^ itV 
 
 . .'s .11} 
 
 <? 
 
 
 
 
 ^ \ l 
 
 '■ 
 
 71 'X 71 
 
 ^ 7 ^ 
 
 -* 7 
 
 
 71 7 
 
 ^7 "7> 
 
 to-> 
 
 71 Xi7 7* 
 
 
 ~K Z 
 
 -Hi 
 
 ~!Pt? z 
 
 wi]L.A-»Z 
 
 ti X> 7 7i 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 »< z 
 
 bH 
 
 ^H zz 
 
 
 
 to^ z 
 
 -7N ^ _ 
 
 ^-■A,-Z.to-»Z. 
 
 u^zr 
 
 „ \\ 
 
 tor 
 
 u^r 
 
 AH 
 
 v^ zJ 
 
 p \ 7 A 71 
 
 . \ lt A i 
 
 <eV 
 
 . P ^ 7 
 
 » \ ^ 
 
 ^xzzAi 
 
 . I\Ja3 
 
 P . ^ 7 
 
 » \ .- A 1 
 
 ,ctowj 
 
 :vto 
 
 ^ \\ 
 
 ^Tx 7 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 ^ZJ.ZZ“ 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 ^ V A.Z 
 
 rtof 
 
 
 
 
 toto' 
 
 U^Aj 
 
 \ J 
 
 U^jZAj 
 
 
 
 P\f? 
 
 7i 7 
 
 V° 
 
 W“? 
 
 U^ad 
 
 ^7 ^ 
 
 U-^Z,-«.1d 
 
 
 .7 7 
 
 
 
 
106 
 
 VERBS ML. 
 
 45. Verbs ml. 
 
 Verbs which have the second and third radicals 
 the same lose the middle radical in the Peal, Aphel, 
 Ethtaphal, Shaphel and Eshtaphal conjugations. The 
 vowel of the middle radical expunged is remitted to 
 the first. With the exception of this defect and a 
 peculiarity in the act. part. Peal, the whole inflexion 
 is quite regular. The Ethpeel, Pael and Ethpaal 
 conjugations retain both the radicals, and are in every 
 respect regular. But for the two last conjugations the 
 Palpel and Ethpalpal forms are most frequently used; 
 
 as, he drew , WvVv he agitated , ^^5 he mag - 
 
 \ » IS 
 
 nified. 
 
 The imper. and fut. Peal receive on the second 
 radical the vowel * or according to the rule laid 
 
 down for these forms in the reg. verbs; thus, icioj 
 he will spoil , he will desire. 
 
 In the act. part. Peal the middle radical is changed 
 into Olaph, but it is pronounced as Yud; thus, *co]5 
 
 'TS 
 
 is pronounced Ro-yes , $ 11. When an addition is 
 made to the end of this part., the Olaph with its 
 
 vowel is taken away ; as, v » rp ; 9 . \h. The verb 
 
 i x 
 
 7 
 
 'SlI is an exception, for it preserves the Olaph in 
 the plural; as, . V )v masc. and fern. 
 
 x 
 
 Verbs which have Olaph for the second and third radicals 
 preserve both of them in inflexion. See doubly irregular verbs. 
 
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 107 
 
 In the part. Aphel the middle radical is sometimes re¬ 
 tained ; but it has the linea occultans; as, » W t\ (n shadow- 
 
 i - 
 
 ing. 
 
 The Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation, is 
 
 sometimes retained with the prseformatives; as, no! 
 to love. 
 
 The Objective Affixes attached to Verbs. 
 
 46. We have already seen that different affixes 
 are added to verbs to mark the person and number; 
 besides these, others are frequently attached, which 
 may he called the objective affixes; thus, she 
 
 has slain thee . If the verb be intransitive, then it 
 must he translated with some preposition to preserve 
 its connection with the pronoun. We will first give a 
 Table of these Affixes. 
 
 When a Consonant precedes the Affix. 
 Sing. Plu. 
 
 (. 
 
 imper.) 
 
 T\ 
 
 01 
 
 V 
 
 •X 
 
 r - 3 
 
 Y 
 
 imper.') 
 
 01 
 
 2nd. pers. masc. 
 Sing. 
 
 
 »_»OT_» 
 
 3rd. pers. fem. Praet. and Nun preced. 
 Plu. 
 
 V 
 
 
 < 9 = 
 
 O 
 
 •X 
 
 (\CL2 3rd. fem. plu.) 
 
 3rd. fem. plu.) 
 
 p 
 
108 
 
 CONJUGATION OF VERBS ^ 
 
 
 Peal. 
 
 Aphel. 
 
 Ethtaphal. 
 
 Praet. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 7 
 
 Vo 
 
 
 lizzr 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 z£ 
 
 
 zb 7 zzr 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 L\L 
 
 z^T 
 
 z^izr 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 -zv^r 
 
 -ZiaiZr 
 
 1. com. 
 
 Oo 
 
 r^r 
 
 ztzzr 
 
 * . » -i t 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 ovo 
 
 Oiof 
 
 • ojiZZf 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 7 
 
 «-»Vo 
 
 
 ^ValZf 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 <oZvZ 
 
 v oz^r 
 
 .sztizzr 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 
 
 ^z^zzr 
 
 1. com. 
 
 7 
 
 7 -» .7 
 
 ^Jio) 
 
 ^zzr 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 7 -ft 
 
 VoId 
 
 <X P 7 
 
 ovolo 
 
 •X P 7, -» 
 
 ovoZALd 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 ido 
 
 7\ 
 
 v^ZZ] 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 
 ^V=ZZ1 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 olio 
 
 o^r 
 
 oirjZZ] 
 
 *?\ 
 
 fem. 
 
 
 ^ -7\ 
 
 ^22] 
 
 ^ “ -7> 
 
 Fut. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 •X ^ 
 
 1CLC1J 
 
 -» 7 
 
 VOJ 
 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 •X 
 
 *._»iaoZ 
 
 -io2 
 
 -ia22 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 •x 
 
 la^Z 
 
 li 7 Z 
 
 IflZL 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 I 7> 
 
 ^-VoZ 
 
 <_ia2 
 
 ^b22 
 
 1. com. 
 
 •X •,'D 
 
 1oo| 
 
 .7 
 
 V^l 
 
 &ir 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 •x ^ 
 
 ^oiou 
 
 •X 7 
 
 vOVOJ 
 
 ^2a3 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 o n\ 
 
 o y 
 
 ^2Ai 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 r\ 
 
 Cl 
 
 <* O/ 
 
 v ^ 7 2 
 
 v o ^22 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 0 -oZ 
 
 4^2 
 
 4=22 
 
 1. com. 
 
 •x ^ 
 
 ICLClJ 
 
 -n 7 
 
 VOJ 
 
 w22aJ 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 *T\ 
 
 Volo 
 
 tiZAio 
 
 ** 
 
 pass. 
 
 1-10 
 
 I 
 
 7 7 
 
 VoSo 
 
 
example , he destroyed. 
 
 109 
 
 Shaphel. 
 
 Eshtaphal. 
 
 Palpel. 
 
 Ethpalpal. 
 
 71 7 
 
 \!=l* 
 
 Ziai 
 
 . 'll 7 
 
 «— iL\ n • 
 
 zKi 
 
 71 7 
 
 Oy.O.« 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 •X - 7\ 7 
 
 <oZy^L» 
 
 », * 7 
 
 ^Zy^L. 
 
 7 7i 7 
 
 £M“ 
 
 zioi,f 
 
 z^^r 
 
 -ZiiM“ 
 
 ZiaL.V 
 
 ofokf 
 
 «i=A.r 
 
 ^L,r 
 
 ^2£LmT 
 
 7 7 7 .7, 
 
 71 7 
 
 Zisji 
 
 Z^ii> 
 
 ~Z*£>ii> 
 
 Zi^i 
 
 n\ 7 
 
 cyrzyjo 
 
 71 7 
 
 •X , 71 7 
 
 ^oZvovo 
 
 Tt, ti 7 
 
 ^Zv^vs 
 
 7 71 P 
 
 ^zr 
 
 z^zr 
 
 Z^Zf 
 
 ^.zjijLzy 
 
 ztvizr 
 
 7 7 ,.71 
 
 oy^y^Z| 
 
 iSz^zr 
 
 ^floiazr 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 oyo-«.V> 
 
 •X P 7 71 
 
 oy^AjaZD 
 
 •X P 7 
 
 °1 °1 
 
 •x p 7 -n 
 
 ovo^oAk) 
 
 7 
 
 V^-» 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 'TS 'Tt 
 
 ^v^L>l 
 
 oy^L»] 
 
 ,__,y^L»] 
 
 -n "" *7* 
 
 *3> 
 
 — V3|T> 
 
 'lx 
 
 oy^vo 
 
 T\ 'TS 
 
 li^ZI 
 
 -isiozi 
 
 otiyiZ] 
 
 7> 
 
 7 7 
 
 '* 'TS 
 
 71 7 
 
 )n.i i 
 
 -liiZ 
 
 V^iz 
 
 7> 7 .71 
 
 1^*1 
 
 •X 7 
 
 P 7 
 
 i|^-«-J 
 
 <oViz 
 
 4^z 
 
 7i 7 
 
 yo.« i 
 
 7 7 -a 
 
 -ioZl-2 
 
 iiL.2 
 
 ^VaL.2 
 
 »a-r 
 
 •X 7 71 
 
 voy^A-^j 
 
 P 7. 71 
 
 v VaA^_i 
 
 ^oL.2 
 
 vpL.Z 
 
 7 7. 7, 
 
 71 7 
 
 -^z 
 
 \=>v>L 
 
 ^v^viZ 
 
 ■n 7 .71 
 
 v 6v^iAj 
 
 p 7 
 
 ,VCV^J 
 
 •X v . 
 
 \0VDV2l 
 
 itviZ 
 
 71 7 
 
 W=v=j 
 
 7 7 7i 
 
 yn>yr:Aj 
 
 -vipLfZ 
 
 7 7 ,7., 
 
 y^yjoZZ 
 
 I 7 .7, 
 
 ^VoVoZZ 
 
 7 7 ,^x 
 
 V^voZ] 
 
 •X 7 71 
 
 ^oyrzy.oAj 
 
 P 7 A 71 
 
 ip^V^Aj 
 
 V a^vizz 
 
 4pja^2 
 
 7 7 7i 
 
 Vciy^Aj 
 
 in « v> 
 
 7\ 
 
 7 7 
 
 yr^« V> 
 
 yc>A-a-k) 
 
 *n 
 
 y^ynV? 
 
 'A 
 
 7 7 
 
 yzDyznk) 
 
 yiyiAk) 
 
 -7S 
 
110 
 
 OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 Vowel preceding. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Y 
 
 - » ^ 
 
 , w-iGlO 
 
 ai (oi_») 
 
 Plu. 
 
 V 
 
 •x 
 
 
 It will not be necessary to extend the paradigm 
 beyond the Peal conjugation, for the others are in¬ 
 flected like it. Whatever deviations there are will be 
 given. Neither will it be necessary to give examples 
 of irregular verbs, except that class of them which 
 have Olaph for the third radical, and of which, on 
 account of some striking peculiarities, particular notice 
 must be taken. 
 
 The first and second persons of both numbers 
 through both the tenses do not take the objective 
 affixes of the same person, otherwise the signification 
 would be reciprocal, which is usually expressed by cer¬ 
 tain conjugations. 
 
 In the praet. the third pers. plu. fern, has two 
 
 v i y 
 
 forms, . . V-ft-n and one (the simple and the 
 
 'h 
 
 other the paragogic; each of them takes the affixes. 
 There is also a masc. paragogic form K n. 
 
 Verbs of the sec. pers. plu. praet. of both genders 
 do not receive the affixes ^ocn and ; instead of 
 
 is 
 
 them are used the separate pronouns ^cuj and * ij. 
 
OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 47 . Prceterite. 
 
 3rd. pers. sing, masc . he has slain. 
 
 > . iSj )r> lie has slain me, ...... us , yS^o . 
 
 /toe, masc.; \f\n . thee , fem.; . 
 
 you , masc.; ^nX^Q ...... ?/ 0 ft, fem.; orV^o ...... 
 
 tow, aiX^-o . tor, |Clj] . /toft, masc.; 
 
 ..... .. them , fem. 
 
 ”7* -71 
 
 3n/. jpers. /m. AX-A-Q slain. 
 
 'TS 
 
 ^J^X^jD to .toft ffttf, <AX^lO . ft. 9 , ^AX^O 
 
 . /toe, masc.; . thee , fem.; ^aX^-q 
 
 y y 
 
 . g/oft, masc.; -^q AX-^q . 2/0ft, fem.; oiAX^o 
 
 'JS ‘is -7) 
 
 . toft, <jiAX4£> . tor, ^qj) AX^jd ...... /toftz, 
 
 'Ti 'TN 
 
 masc.; AX^o . /to/ft, fem. 
 
 7l7> -n 
 
 smy. m$sc. AX^Q. 
 
 w»JaXXo /toft tos/ stoft /ftc, ^AXXo . fts, 
 
 ^aiXAXXa 
 
 
 
 a2i4d 
 
 
 masc.; aX!&jd * 
 
 TST* 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 2 m/. _pcr.?. sm^f. /<?m. .-jAX-^JD. 
 
 
 . . t .A\^q /to toy/ s/to 
 
 X 
 
 ?fte, ... 
 
 X 
 
 
 vjOiq-.AX^jd 
 
 1 
 
 .tow, cruAX^o 
 
 X 
 
 Tl 
 
 
 y 
 
 masc.; v^AX^o 
 
 -7> -n 
 
 
 . • 
 
112 
 
 OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 lsf. pers. sing. L\J^O . 
 
 1\ -7N 
 
 . thee, masc.; .fem.; 
 
 .q^AX^d . yo?/, masc.; r _»^A\4o . fem.; 
 
 ^ -7N 
 
 cnAX^o . cnAl^uO . her, ^qj] AS 40 . 
 
 -7. » "» 
 
 them, masc.; <r^ A\4° . them, fem. 
 
 -71-71 "71 "7> 
 
 3rd. pers. plu. masc. 0 \ ^S) or ♦ 
 
 . » m\-^ Q . *»£, . ^a\^-0 
 
 . thee, masc.; ^.ooSs^o . fem.; ^nn nVjl n 
 
 .yow, masc.; . you, fem.; ^oioX^-o 
 
 . him, m n\^ .n . her, ^qj] o\g\ o . 
 
 *T\ 
 
 masc.; n\\ n . /Am, fem. The other form 
 
 / T\'t\ 
 
 takes the affixes of the 2nd. pers. sing. masc. 
 
 3rd. pers. plu. fem. «._»_X4° or _.a_.\ §jO . 
 
 'TS 
 
 . . iSf^Q . »«e, r ^4Q . W«, ^.S^D . 
 
 thee, masc.; . . n\K n . thee, fem.; ■ o-'A \ g . 
 
 T\ 
 
 you, masc.; » n\ ? i\ n . you, fem.; . . m . . 
 
 ns 
 
 him, cjlL^o . her. The other form takes the 
 
 affixes of the 2nd. pers. sing. masc. 
 
 2nd. pers. plu. masc. xOh^J^O. 
 
 — ..me, ^Jo^AX^-o 
 
 0 -X. . 7 , 
 
 us, w>cn_i_jo 
 
 
 D 
 
 him , criio x AA4o . her. 
 

 OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 113 
 
 2nd. 
 
 plu. fem. ^A\^.Q . 
 
 
 4 -L .-1 1 ->A^uQ 
 
 . ?w<?, . 
 
 us, 
 
 <tu_La1 ^ . 
 
 Am, cru^AX^o ...... A^r. 
 
 T\ 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 1$£. p#rs. y/w. ^\^Q. 
 
 
 ^ 4 ^ . 
 
 thee , masc.; . . ->\\\n . 
 
 *r» 
 
 thee , 
 
 fem.; K asiilL^n ... 
 
 ... //ow, masc.; . 
 
 T\ 
 
 
 fem.; 
 
 . Am, ou-X^jd . her. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 'TN 
 
 . to slay me , r 2Li^nSp . us, 
 
 7> 
 
 .. masc.; . » nVjXoVn . thee , fem.; ^Vfrnvn 
 
 -7\ t> ^ -n 
 
 .. ^o?/, masc.; »n\^nv> . f/ow, fern.; mVftnVn 
 
 T* 7> ^ ^ 
 
 .. Am, oiIL^qSd . her. 
 
 7% 
 
 Imperative. V\o A n 
 sim/. masc. 
 
 . . i .7W£, ^So-fejD . W«9, ^OT-i^a^uO 
 
 .. tow, cn »\a4-0 . her. 
 
 2nd. pers. sing. fem. *.-x.\d^JD. 
 
 x 
 
 > >.i\ajD . wje, r la4o . w»9, «- »crio . \n. A. o 
 
 X X 
 
 .. Am, m . \ n ^v_n . ^Aetf, fem. 
 
 8 
 
 x 
 
114 
 
 OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 Plu. numb. 2nd. pers. 
 
 , i A\ j/ o n . me, ^^clo . us > 
 
 . Aiwi, cnaX^Q-o . 
 
 2w</. pm. /m. 
 
 ,, ‘A . me, _iia&o . us, ^.ai^-Sa^o 
 
 —’ s 
 
 . ai^CL^o . her. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 3rd. pers. sing. masc. ^> 0 &QJ » 
 
 'fs 
 
 . . A K en . we, ^4nj . “•?> . 
 
 /7^<? ? masc.; ^ n\t)ci 2 . 77n?£, fem.; . 
 
 -r> "!> 
 
 masc.; ^ > n\o j)cu . y ou > ^ em> ’ --»cticlx 
 
 ' ^ Tl 71 
 
 . Aiw», cfi i \ ^ gj . her. 
 
 x ^ 
 
 2nd. pers. sing. fem. 
 
 i i\ 
 
 .' . 1 . \ j\.n Z . we, . 1 .A4oZ . «s, 
 
 ^ « XX ^ 
 
 x x 'i' 
 
 . » 1 . /wwz, 0U. 
 
 - T ^ i -»> 
 
 /«£/•. 
 
 3rJ. pm. plu. masc. ^ o\4d . 1 » 
 
 ., 1 io^^j . me, JaX&aj . US, ^jqVj^dj 
 
 _ ^ 'ft 'Ti 
 
 -7\ 
 
 . thee, masc.; ^oj qV (\qj . thee, fem.; * 
 
 * * 
 
 . you, masc.; . oin\frnj . you , fem.; 
 
 V is ns 
 
 . jqX &qj . 7^^m ? crua^nj . her. 
 
OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 115 
 
 3rd. pers. fern. ^-Xi^QJ. 
 
 * 7 \ 
 
 wi.3i X&n i . me, i . us, i 
 
 'T) T\ 
 
 . thee, masc.; . . thee, fem.; ^qALX^qj 
 
 . you, masc.; » ^ i X (\ m . you, fem.; ^cn >, i X-&n^ 
 
 . him, cniX^nj . her. 
 
 Participles are seldom found with the objective 
 affixes; when they are, the modification they undergo 
 is the same as that for nouns. 
 
 48. Observations. 
 
 Prceterite with Affixes. 
 
 It will be observed from the foregoing examples, 
 that verbs and nouns have nearly the same vowel 
 changes; thus, when it takes the affixes, remits 
 
 the 7 to , which is similar to In 
 
 
 the other persons of the sing, the vowel is retained 
 on the second radical to avoid three letters coming 
 together without a vowel. In the third person plural 
 of both genders the 7 is put back on the first letter, 
 o receives x , and of the fem. is taken away. The 
 first and second persons pin. preserve both vowels un¬ 
 changed. 
 
 Verbs having * for the second rad. retain it in those 
 places where 7 is found in 
 
 Verbs having Olaph or Yud for the first radical 
 may he referred to for whenever is destitute 
 
 of a vowel, there Olaph has ^ and Yud when 
 has 7 , Olaph and Yud have the same. 
 
 Pael, Aphel and Shaphel conjugations retain the 
 
 8—2 
 
I 
 
 116 OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 first vowel immoveable, but the second they change in 
 the same manner as in Peal. 
 
 The affix ^cno is used after Yud, w»cji after those 
 
 which end in o servile; this is the case throughout 
 the conjugations. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 In the infin. Peal the last vowel is taken away, 
 except with the suffixes Ad and ; but if it be 
 
 as in verbs having Vau the second radical, the vowel 
 remains. In the other conjugations having the termi¬ 
 nation o, l is added with the suffixes. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 The imper. of all the conjugations, where the middle 
 radical has any one of the vowels x , 0 or % does not change 
 its form in the sing., and inserts Yud before the affixes. 
 
 The vowel o in the plu. masc. is remitted to the first 
 radical. 
 
 Pael, Aphel and Shaphel conjugations, when the 
 imper. agrees with the praet., cast away the vowel of 
 
 •x y 
 
 the 2nd. radical before the suffixes; as, . .m n\n n] bring 
 
 him. But verbs having the middle radical j, o or u , 
 as well as some paragogic forms, retain the vowel; as, 
 > > m A ] do me good. 
 
 Future. 
 
 The 1st. pers. of both numbers, 2nd. pers. sing, 
 masc., and 3rd. pers. sing, of both genders preserve the 
 
 second vowel before the affixes and ; but it is 
 
 lost in the others. The remaining persons keep both 
 vowels in all the forms. 
 
OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 117 
 
 The verb 
 
 The forms which end in 1°, viz. praet. Peal m.; 
 Imp. Pael, Aphel and Shaphel in 3rd. pers. sing, masc 
 cast away ], hut retain the vowel by which the suf¬ 
 
 fixes are annexed to the verb; as. . . i \ ^ 
 
 ^ In the Inf. Peal the } is changed into move- 
 able; as, . > i » m 1 \ ; but before 
 
 and the ] is removed, although o is retained; as, 
 
 v: 
 
 •X • "* mO 
 
 OSL^D, ^\ ^ 0 . 
 
 Those forms of the verb ending in }] such as the 
 futures and participles, when they use the affixes, are 
 accustomed to change ) into the vowel being re¬ 
 tained ; as, * > ^ ^ >;» > \ . 
 
 There is this peculiarity in the forms terminating in 
 o, viz. that they change o into oo or oo; as, ^oiooX^, 
 
 « . X .. 1 0 0 
 
 The form o_/, which is the termination of the 3rd. 
 pers. praet. plu. of all the conjugations except Peal, is 
 changed before the affixes into al ; as, n »m i they 
 
 x 
 
 tempted , . „ in » mi , . . o . m\ . 
 
 Those parts of the verb which end in , the vowel 
 
 x 
 
 is either expunged, and the ^ becomes moveable, or 
 both _ and 1 are retained; as, > > \ » 1 » 
 
 kj OHQ— 
 
118 CONJUGATION OF VERBS WITH AFFIXES. 
 
 Suffix Sing. 
 
 1. Masc. 
 
 2. Masc. 
 
 2. Fem. 
 
 Pra?t. Peal. 3. masc. 
 
 
 
 ^X 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 x ^7 
 
 *.i 1 i \ 11 
 
 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 
 
 wj-DOCL^^ 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 
 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 D ?l ^7 
 
 
 
 1. com. 
 
 
 
 * ^ 
 
 . i m 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 7 ♦ * 
 
 . » t » \ 
 
 
 
 
 ’“"XT 
 
 XXr 
 
 Impcr. Sing. masc. 
 
 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 X ^ 
 
 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 b ju. J 0 Q_^_^ 
 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 •• P • 0 
 
 
 
 
 ... i . V tt i 
 
 . .» V tt ^ 
 
 
 r lit# o. iiutot. 
 
 
 
 n\ 
 
 Plur. Retains the form of the regular verb. 
 
 
 Pael. Prset. Sing. 3. masc. 
 
 7.7 
 
 
 * V 7 
 
 3 fem 
 
 . . 1^\ I \ 
 
 
 . . nA r \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. 3. masc. 
 
 * V 7 
 
 . .n » \ .. 
 
 •X . 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 The other persons follow the form of the regular verb. 
 
 Aphel and 
 
 Imper. Sing. masc. 
 
 V 7 
 
 ^X 
 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 I . P 7 
 
 
 
 Plur. masc. 
 
 •X .7 7 
 
 w_uJoaX.. 
 
 
 
 fem. 
 
 P -Pi .7 7 
 
 
 

 EXAMPLE, 
 
 he revealed. 
 
 119 
 
 3. Masc. 
 
 3. Fem. 
 
 1. Plur. 
 
 2. Masc. 
 
 2. Fem. 
 
 
 
 
 x , p 
 
 v“H 
 
 71 . P 
 
 'IN-P 
 
 cnAA^. 
 
 mAl« 
 
 
 
 
 u 0"L» A \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 (71 Q_» A-iAA-y^ 
 
 C7L»A_»-X^ 
 
 
 
 
 oiA-JL*. 
 
 OlA-kA^e 
 
 
 .onA-L^L. 
 
 » oA . \ . t 
 
 
 T\ 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 . ,mnn 
 
 • * -7 
 
 aioaX^ 
 
 v°*\ 
 
 •X -X .7 
 
 ^cidoqA^. 
 
 x (X .7 
 
 ^oqA.,. 
 
 £» ^ 
 
 ai^ 
 
 p ^ 
 
 •X P .7 
 
 71 P ^7 
 
 ^\v 
 
 
 • P -X .7 
 
 ouoA i \«. 
 
 ,JoZlJA 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 * p A ^ 
 
 U 1 .l.^ lm\ > I N 1 » 
 
 
 
 
 p <7 
 
 • P ^7 
 
 
 •X P .7 
 
 7> P .7 
 
 t* • 
 
 m . \ ,. V) 
 
 • P - 
 
 m . \ Vn 
 
 7 . 
 
 .\ [t V) 
 
 •X P . 
 
 t no.\ lt Vn 
 
 ^ 0 - 
 
 A .. Vi 
 
 V. 
 
 ^rr 
 
 
 x ^T7 
 
 k AT 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 v p 
 
 
 
 
 «—>010Qi ^Vi. 
 
 aioaS^ 
 
 v aai \V 
 
 
 
 •• o 
 
 • 0 mD •• 
 
 a ^H 
 
 p fp •• 
 
 
 
 
 v * 
 
 m »_ \ .. i 
 
 . V . t j 
 
 *X * “7> 
 
 .nnA,. i 
 
 'K m 'h 
 
 i * » V.t i 
 
 n\ Vb 
 
 -71 Vb 
 
 
 ' i “r'r 
 
 
 71 v 7 
 
 • P • 7 
 
 7 .7 
 
 . 7 
 
 71 . 7 
 
 
 • P 7 . 7 
 
 cnA_»_X,. 
 
 \ ?« y 
 
 -X A 7 \ 7 
 
 ^cldA > ,\ ^ 
 
 •» . 7 t * 
 
 ^j-dAj-X^ 
 
 •X . 7 
 
 • -X - 7 
 
 •X . 7 
 
 •X -X . 7 
 
 v CL2Q-i--\^ 
 
 7i -X . 7 
 
 Shaphel are joined with the affixes in the same 
 
 manner. 
 
 
 < 7 
 
 • .P 7 
 
 
 
 
 < 7 
 
 • .P 7 
 
 “’"tH 
 
 
 
 
 •X ^7 7 
 
 <w_i cnoa_-^ 
 
 • -X .7 7 
 
 cnoa_-.^ 
 
 •X .7 7 
 
 v oa H 
 
 
 
 P .P 7 
 
 • r ^7 7 
 
 au -^tH 
 
 p .P 7 
 
 
 
 
120 OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 
 
 There are many parts of the verb which follow the 
 
 regular forms of in every respect, viz. the paragogic 
 forms, the 3rd. pers. sing, fern.; 1st. and 2nd. pers. sing, 
 and plu. praet.; 2nd. pers. sing. fern.; 2nd. and 3rd. pers. 
 plu. masc. and fern. fut.; and the inf. of all the con¬ 
 jugations, the inf. Peal excepted. 
 
 Some instances are met with in the 3rd. pers. plu. 
 masc. of the Peal conj. where the 3rd. rad. Olaph is 
 
 retained with the affixes; as, they have built 
 
 it. This remark applies also to the 2nd. pers. plu. Imp. 
 of both genders; as, v-»<no|-^» loose him , John xi. 44. 
 
 This custom of preserving Olaph is also found in the 
 partic. Peal as well as in the Imp. sing, and plu. of all 
 
 the active conjugations; as, . .]i m hating me , Ps. ix. 14 ; 
 . . i shew me , Cant. ii. 14. 
 
 In the futures, where Yud quiescent follows the last vowel, 
 before the suffixes another Yud is sometimes added; as, 
 
 . .m . .. ml ]] do not loose it. Amira, Gram. Chald. p. 377. 
 
 Hoffman, however, doubts the truth of this, and is of opinion 
 that the Yud has got into the text in this and other places 
 through the carelessness of editors. See his Gram. Syr. p. 230. 
 In 1 Cor. xii. 31 we have an example of the Yud being re- 
 
 •X 7 ** 
 
 jected; viz. I will shew you. Sometimes we have 
 
 1 used for especially before the affixes of the 3rd. pers. 
 sing, fern.; as in Peal, Matth. ii. 19, m « i he would dismiss 
 him. 
 
 In 3rd. pers. prset. plu. fern, the common form is joined 
 
DOUBLY DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 121 
 
 with the affixes much more frequently than the paragogic; as, 
 
 o •• y * 9 y v 
 
 . . m . . m ] they healed him , is found rather than .. . m » \ » » ra ]. 
 
 49. Doubly defective Verbs. 
 
 The irregularities in verbs, it has been already 
 observed, are produced by having a radical, one of 
 the letters Olaph, Vau, Yud or Nun, which in certain 
 situations is dropped, or the second and third radicals 
 the same. There may be roots having more than one 
 radical, such a letter as is subject to elision or quiescence. 
 Of course it will not happen at the same time that 
 all the letters will disappear or become quiescent; for 
 the principles on which these peculiarities depend can¬ 
 not operate simultaneously by any combination of cir¬ 
 cumstances so as to produce this effect. It will therefore 
 follow that some letters of the root must remain in 
 every part of the conjugation, and that in general no 
 two consecutive letters can be at the same time sub¬ 
 ject to defect. It will be sufficient to consider a few 
 instances of doubly irregular verbs, which may be divided 
 into the following classes. 
 
 1st. Verbs with the first radical a Nun and the 
 third Olaph; as, lie injured , Ethpeel where 
 
 X 
 
 Olaph is changed into Yud ; Aphel where the 
 
 x 
 
 final Nun is dropped: so, he tempted , imper. Aph. 
 
 7 f 
 
 Q£0|. 
 
 2nd. Verbs having the first and third radicals 
 Olaph; as, jZj he came , fut. Peal ]Z]j, which possesses 
 
 IS IS 
 
 the defects both of ^ 3 *) and tU v 
 
122 
 
 QUAD RI LITERAL VERBS. 
 
 3rd. Those with the first radical Yud and the 
 third Olaph; as, }Lq_> he swore , I have sworn , 
 
 i IX 
 
 ]vn. i he will swear , }1d}Ld to swear. 
 
 4 th. 
 Olaph. 
 o]i, inf. 
 
 Verbs having the second and third radicals 
 he forbade , whence 3rd. pers. praet. plu. 
 imper. he laboured , Aph. 
 
 ns i 
 
 we will make thee wearied. 
 
 ns 
 
 p 
 
 1L it is fit , and a few others are altogether de¬ 
 fective and anomalous. 
 
 50. Quadriliteral Verbs. 
 
 The Syrians have some verbs composed of more 
 than three letters; they are not numerous, and as in 
 Hebrew and Arabic, are chiefly derived from triliteral 
 roots. They are formed by the addition or repetition 
 of a letter, and undergo little or no alteration when 
 the prefixes and affixes are annexed. 
 
 I. By the repetition of one or two of the letters 
 of the triliteral root, and chiefly in those cases when 
 the second and third radicals are the same, or the 
 middle radical Vau (see $ 42, 45); thus, 
 
 he dragged along , from 5^ he dragged; 
 An ; Ln, ? 1 he was exasperated , from he was bitter. 
 
 he did often , or practised , from he did , 
 
 ns 
 
 or made; he was made , or became lazy, from 
 
 ns 
 
 A he was lazy. It will be seen from these and 
 
QUADRILITERAL VERBS. 
 
 123 
 
 the following examples, that the general effect of the 
 duplication is to give increased intensity to the signi¬ 
 fication of the original word. 
 
 II. Instances of two of the radicals being repeated 
 
 are he dreamed for a long time , from 
 
 he dreamed ; \\^\^ he stained , from he 
 
 exalted , from i>oo5 he was high. 
 
 III. Some appear to be compounded of two verbs; 
 
 as, \ vvn ^ 1 he thought basely , from he was base , 
 
 and he quarrelled. 
 
 IV. By the addition of a letter to the beginning 
 of a word. 
 
 (1) Ld; as, he made poor, he be - 
 
 S ? ' 
 
 came poor , from the Arabic he was poor. 
 
 ( 2 ) *£d; as, ^ocnj-CD he hastened , he burned , from 
 
 v 
 
 ^cn5. 
 
 (s) Z; as, . vA*) he taught , from r vn\ he learned. 
 
 7 > 
 
 The letter Van is sometimes inserted in the middle 
 of a word; as, jJdqa he twisted , ^aLZj he was per - 
 
 7* 7> 
 
 plexed , from the root ,nv he bound; ; Anm he expected , 
 from 
 
 Sometimes we have ; as, from ^o; 
 
 • • 
 
124 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 as, r _sn!kf> he persevered , from ^ he was strong. 
 >; as, and rev °l ve d- 
 
 At the end of a word we find sometimes the letter 
 w_»; as, wiZuui he made domestic , _ . A»A /] he was 
 
 i i ^ 
 
 y 
 
 treated familiarly , from A » o a house; _A_k>Z he sub- 
 
 'D x 
 
 dued, from aZjZ under, beneath. 
 
 It is unnecessary to give more examples; we will 
 only observe that, in the process of conjugation, these 
 verbs follow in general the principles laid down for 
 triliterals. 
 
 51. PARTICLES. 
 
 Under this term may be comprehended words which 
 are used in explaining, modifying, and connecting the 
 principal parts of a sentence. They embrace, there¬ 
 fore, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions and Inter¬ 
 jections. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 1st. Of time. 
 
 Ij-kk once, together , ^Akf) when f ViIdZ] yesterday, 
 
 VZjjLo in the end , at length, afterwards , .p_.cn 
 
 then, ]_»cn now , liioaJ to-day, -fo already, now, 
 kVOoZi before, ] r .*>AD immediately, to-morrow, 
 
 !>ooA1d at any time, not yet, 
 
ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 125 
 
 ns /onfr ns. how lonr ?? ]lm\ ]vn { ? v until now. . 
 
 'h n\ 
 
 suddenly. 
 
 2 nd. Of place. 
 
 where ? |d here, hither, hence, ]n.]! 
 
 'TS 
 
 whither? which way? ^_,cn^ hitherto, _k)Z thither. 
 
 Adverbs of various kinds. 
 
 Ui 4 /joto ? greatly, powerfully, >cl*>Zx 
 
 ow/?/, Wvn ludWov , especially, ?woro, . 
 truly, fbL more, quickly, W.^Vn little, ^ x A 
 
 swiftly, oZiiAo formerly, ASo]o (for ZjAojs I have 
 
 n\ 'JS * 
 
 I J' 
 
 namely, especially, ao, ^05 whether ? A. nn) 
 
 X 
 
 truly, o^l where is he? which is formed from the adverb 
 
 p 7 ^ p ^ p 
 
 and the personal pronoun ooi, ^SoZ5ai from thence, 
 /rora whence ? \\ > nvn wozo, mzw, ,-vn 
 
 wholly, effectually, really, ]X oZL wo/, ]cn ]] wo/? 
 
 aZ-_>Z| lastly, AI Vy o ^rs/, Zo,iZ.jZ secondly, A_»"|cnZL 
 
 - x 
 
 divinely, A_*la_*?i justly. 
 
 X X 
 
 Prepositions. 
 
 Some Prepositions are prefixed to verbs, nouns, 
 &c. and others are separate words. Those most com¬ 
 monly used are ^ ?w, X /o, Za\ /o, zo///z, t _Sd from, 
 
 ..i»o or A1 » A between. , v\o without\ fi? with- 
 
126 CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 out, iLh after , Ado?, ^lLkj f /or, 5^, 
 
 about, V\A_n n_\ against, ^|lo because of ^ wpow 
 or against , s ov ww7//, ^o r io before, Zod> wortr, 
 against, |Lo?qZo before , ZaliZ or Zu_k>Z under . 
 
 Conjunctions and Interjections. 
 
 •\ y ~ o Z 
 
 These are o') or, Zoo], I^qd] rts, ft] a’AXa, Aw/, 
 ^ |]"j //‘ wo/, unless, a^k ft aZL ?*/* wo/, ^ if, 
 
 *1\ 1\ *t\ OS T> "7> 
 
 rt/so, besides, Aw/ yo/, however, i+^ydp, 
 
 for, ? because, ^ ll, but, i^o?? Zos/ Ay chance , 
 \\. n m therefore, o rtwd, ^ when, >_» n therefore, vX 
 
 i 
 
 /rw/y, ?]io zu/fow, Vv. ^>vr> therefore, ft^ before, 
 
 'h x ^ 
 
 that, until, ^£>1 rt/so. 
 
 The Interjections are ]oi behold, p], ^pj O/ ^oA_»], 
 O /Art// w_»cti woe! / jorrty. 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 i 
 
 52. Syntax of Nouns. 
 
 The Noun which is put in a state of construction 
 must precede that which qualifies it or limits its sig¬ 
 nification ; thus, cnlo] the womb of his mother , 
 
 'TS 'TS 'Ti 
 
 ^ mm division of my goods. This is the 
 
 reverse of what takes place in Greek and Latin, where 
 the second noun is the one whose form is modified, 
 and this modification is termed the genitive case. 
 
 The genitive in Hebrew is indicated by the first 
 noun being put in the constructive state; but besides 
 this mode in Syriac, it is also very frequently done by 
 placing 5 before the second noun, as will be presently 
 more especially noticed. The reason of the latter method 
 may he this; viz. that many nouns in the masc. sing, 
 and plu. fern, having the same form in both states, it 
 became necessary to introduce some mark of distinction. 
 Hence it is that we find examples of the constructive 
 state for denoting the genitive are much more frequent 
 in the plu. masc. than in that of the sing., and in the 
 sing. fern, than in that of the plu.; as, ]k)ocnZ . » 
 
 p y 
 
 faces of the deep , Gen. i. 2 ; ]1 . . i sons of 
 
 Israel , - »^n o I o l n the days of Noah , Bar Heb. 
 
128 
 
 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 397. 2 ; joiiL . ^ Vo words of God , . . i • years 
 
 of my life , Ephr. Syr. 3. 428 ; AjL? judgment 
 
 i 
 
 of the Lord , Ephr. 3. 128. Other examples, where the 
 absolute and const, states have the same form, are 
 
 cl^, yl, ^ool, and many more. 
 
 Two nouns sometimes come together in regimen, and 
 
 p 7 ** 
 
 the second has the force of an adjective; as, ]i > > otj>1 
 
 x 
 
 the right ear , Luke xxii. 50; thy right 
 
 x 
 
 Matth. v. 29- See § 22. 
 
 The genitive is used not only actively, but passively; 
 i. e. the noun which is put in the gen. is not always the 
 subject, but the object of a preceding noun ; as, Jud. 
 
 ix. 24, > \npyjj ^CTIQJLC) » ? the injury 
 
 x “ I 
 
 (done) to the seventy sons of Naduhel; also in Isaiah 
 xxvi. 11 , we have ]sqZj cjlLl^ envy (at) the people. 
 
 Proper names, although they seldom receive a geni¬ 
 tive, yet the names of countries, cities, rivers, &c., for 
 the sake of an accurate description, do sometimes admit 
 
 of this construction ; as, Vjoctuj So Z. \ A » A JBethlehem 
 
 X 
 
 of Judah, 1 Sam. xvii. 12. 
 
 A noun is often found in the constructive for the 
 absolute state, when it is followed by another having 
 
 a preposition prefixed; as, . . Ami acceptors of 
 
 faces , i. e. hypocrites , where we have . . Am i for 
 Matth. xvi. 3; n An n blessed among 
 
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 129 
 
 women . where we have for Luke i. 28; 
 
 X X 
 
 VZo denying kindness, i. e. ungrateful , 
 for , 2 Tim. iii. 2. The preposition is 
 
 x 
 
 sometimes separated from the noun ; as, 1 5 
 
 'Is 
 
 1 Tim. i. 10, where we have . > An » for »on 1 . 
 
 i 
 
 The definite state in its primary office is undoubt¬ 
 edly intended to express a definite sense, i. e. it is used 
 to direct the attention to a particular object or objects 
 known either by their universality, pre-eminence, or 
 
 described previously by some circumstance; as, 
 
 A the hour was come , 15] 15] I am the vine. 
 
 It occurs in all the cases where the Hebrew article is 
 used, as may be observed by comparing the Hebrew 
 Bible with its Syriac version. From the same com¬ 
 parison it may be also seen that Syr. nouns are put 
 in the def. state in numerous instances where the 
 Hebrew article in the corresponding words is omitted. 
 Indeed this state has become of much more general 
 usage than in all probability it originally was, and 
 numerous instances are found where the definite form is 
 employed, which seem to shew that it and the absolute 
 are put indiscriminately for one another; for there is 
 no apparent reason why one should have been used in 
 preference to the other. The consequence is that no 
 certain rule can be given for using the definite state; 
 at the same time its analogy to the Hebrew n is very 
 certain, and there is no doubt in the early period of the 
 language it was bound by the same laws. 
 
 9 
 
130 
 
 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 When the discourse is respecting some individual 
 thing of a species, the def, state is used frequently in 
 
 connection with some such word as ^; as, ^ jln-i 
 
 • • 
 
 p p , _ 
 
 a certain youth , Mark xiv. 51; } r ^> ) 22 a certain fig- 
 
 x 
 
 tree , Matth. xxi. 19. 
 
 The def. state is very frequently found, where 
 in Hebrew the constructive would he employed; in 
 such cases 5 is usually prefixed to the following word, 
 
 but not always; as, feast of the passover , 
 
 John xiii. 1 ; jZujacL»Z the glory of God , 
 
 John xi. 4. See § 21 . This construction may be equi¬ 
 valent to b in Hebrew, which serves sometimes 
 
 as a circumlocution for the constructive state. 
 
 The proper names of men do not admit a definite 
 state. A few appear to have it, because they termi¬ 
 nate with the radical Olaph ; as, Peter; but 
 
 x 
 
 such nouns are in the absolute state. 
 
 A noun is put in apposition with another for the 
 purpose of defining or explaining more clearly. Hence 
 we frequently find used in such manner nouns like 
 
 A_i_r> a house , l2.5Vy. island , a city , &c. 
 
 with an affix, when placed after the substantive, may 
 
 be mentioned; as, aukD people , all of them, i. e. 
 
 all the people . 
 
 The noun coming after the verb as an accusative is used 
 to denote Latin forms of speech, secundum , quod attinet 
 
 ad; as, ^5] ]^lco3ap only (with respect to) 
 
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 131 
 
 the throne I will he greater than thee, Gen. xl. 41 ; 
 ^ocriXr) » i vn (according to) the number of all of them , 
 
 i 
 
 Job i. 5. 
 
 In Hebrew the particle riN is sometimes found before 
 the subject noun, but the Syriac has not imitated it in 
 this respect by the use of the corresponding particle tL . 
 Nevertheless there are some examples of the prefix ^ 
 
 ^ y y 
 
 being put before the subject; as, m \»o ctl^ 
 
 whether is it (oiS) the offence of the cross 
 
 x 
 
 ceased? Gal. v. 11. See also Matth. xxvi. 11; John 
 xii. 8. 
 
 A 'plural of excellence the Syrians have not, except 
 a few instances which are found in the version of the 
 Old Testament, and which may be consequently re¬ 
 garded as Hebraisms. See Ps. v. 1. 
 
 The repetition of a noun sometimes denotes diver¬ 
 sity, or, a multitude ; as, • V with divers 
 
 tongues , Acts x. 46; \ in various times , John 
 
 v. 4; ^ affected with many evils , 
 
 IX i x 
 
 Mark ii. 17. It denotes also a distributive sense; as, 
 each a penny , Matth. xx. 9. 
 
 I X 
 
 In the Philoxenian version some diminutive nouns are 
 found. They are denoted by the termination or 
 
 as, # little son, } in ; o ^ a little man, ] A » mi . vV? 
 
 a small fountain, ] mn. o ^ a little man, $ little 
 
 9—2 
 
132 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 lamb, ]mno\A a little dog. There is no doubt that v o 
 
 is the same as the Greek termination of, and that ^coo 1S 
 identical with the Latin ending us. 
 
 53. Construction of Adjectives. 
 
 Adjectives, whether they are used as qualifying 
 words, or whether they are employed as predicates, 
 agree generally with their substantive in gender and 
 number. The exceptions to this rule are the same as 
 in Hebrew. 
 
 When an adjective has the office of the predicate, 
 the logical copula being expressed or understood, it 
 is put in the absolute state with the same gender and 
 
 o y 
 
 number as its substantive, and before it; as, gD? 
 r So . my sin is greater than .Gen. iv. 13. 
 
 An adjective is usually found after the substantive 
 which it qualifies; as, \ l |Jjo5 the unclean spirit. 
 
 n\ 
 
 Some exceptions to this rule exist; when an adjective 
 is made the important word in the sentence, it takes 
 precedence of its substantive. 
 
 When several substantives come together, and an 
 adjective or participle added to them, it is placed in 
 the plural number and masc. gender. See Rom. xvi. 21. 
 
 The word all , is placed before its substantive, 
 
 and indulges in a pleonastic use of the pronominal 
 affixes; as, m\n all the multitude , Acts xv. 12; 
 
 jjori v otl\£ all the chief priests , lit. all of them 
 
CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 133 
 
 the chief priests, Matth. ii. 4; }»m ] m\n\ r ^,]o and 
 he took all Asia, Bar Heb. p. 39. 
 
 In the comparative degree there is sometimes an 
 ellipsis of the adjective by which the sort or reason 
 of the comparison is indicated; as, (clearer) 
 
 than the noon-day, Job xi. 17; jpAs 
 
 . -Vn • ^ioo ^L»5 o] idols and sculptures, (which are 
 
 i i 
 
 more powerful than the idols) of Jerusalem and Sa¬ 
 maria, Isaiah x. 10. The comparative degree, which is 
 
 made by the particle ^_Ld, is sometimes to he otherwise 
 explained than it ordinarily is; as, ]Za^ _ai 
 
 Is there a thing too great for the Lord ? Gen. 
 xviii. 14; |l»5o| ^ai ]] . ^rn but if the way 
 
 be too long for thee, Deut. xiv. 24. So also when 
 
 is placed before an inf.; as, ^Zo 
 
 my sin is too great to be borne, Gen. iv. 13. 
 
 The word ^ is sometimes instrumental in ex¬ 
 
 pressing the superlative; as, _»Zc£-kj the head of 
 
 x 
 
 joy, i. e. the greatest joy , Cant. iv. 14. So also JpoZ; 
 as, ]inmvn ^,po_o the first-born of the poor, i. e. the 
 poorest , Isaiah xiv. 30. 
 
 A small word is sometimes placed between the 
 substantive and adjective; as, fcAk) but the 
 
 king is great. Bar Heb. 335. 3. For the neuter of 
 adjectives in other languages the fern, is employed; 
 as, "jj-Ki one thing 1 have asked, Ps. xxvii. 4. 
 
134 
 
 SYNTAX OF NUMERALS. 
 
 54. Numerals. 
 
 Cardinal numbers sometimes precede the thing num¬ 
 bered, and sometimes follow it. The rule appears to 
 be, to place the emphatic word first in the sentence; 
 
 as, two men , Acts i. 10 ; A* 
 
 six water-pots of stone , John ii. 6. So also when thou¬ 
 sands are to be numbered, the same observation applies 
 to the numeral which numbers them; as, v 
 
 five thousand , Mark vi. 44, and Matth. 
 
 xiv. 21. 
 
 Cardinal numbers are frequently found to occupy the 
 place of ordinals. In Luke i. 59, we have ] 1 1 W * ]ldo 1 
 lit. the day which is eight , i. e. the eighth day; so 
 also, ^ in three hours , i. e. in the third hour , 
 
 i 
 
 Matth. xx. 3; . v 1 A_» six hours , i. e. the sixth hour , 
 
 x n\ 
 
 Matth. xv. 33. In many places cardinal numbers are 
 used for ordinals, and the noun numbered precedes 
 in the constructive state; as, a! A to the first 
 year , lit. the year of one , Dan. i. 21; A_» a! m A 
 
 'h 
 
 ]j_k»o lit. in the year of six hundred and one , i. e. in 
 the six hundred and first year , Gen. viii. 13; Aj_» 
 IjlD A_» six hundred and fourth year , Bar 
 Heb. p. 100. The noun ^ . i I is occasionally expressed 
 
 after the numeral; see Gen. vii. 11. A cardinal num¬ 
 ber is in a few instances put before its noun in the 
 
 y 
 
 constructive state; as, in Matth. iv. 25, we have Zjull 
 
 | A i . t vr> ten cities , lit. a decad of cities . 
 
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 135 
 
 In designations of weights and measures, the noun 
 which expresses the weight, &c. is sometimes omitted, 
 
 though not so frequently as in Hebrew; as, 
 
 'ts n\ 
 
 a thousand ( shekels) of silver, Gen. xx. 16; where the 
 word ]i oL is understood. 
 
 55. Syntax of Pronouns. 
 
 The logical copula, as has been already stated, is 
 frequently expressed by one or other of the personal 
 
 pronouns, and that with the linea occultans; as, 
 
 I am, ) , »vn\ 7 ; we are disciples. But when 
 
 "IS I 
 
 existence is meant, the substantive verb is used, and 
 
 this without the linea occultans; as, ]ocn ctlo in 
 him was life, John i. 4. 
 
 The affixes to verbs, although usually expressing an 
 accus., yet sometimes denote other modes of speech, 
 especially the dative; as, thou hast given to 
 
 me. Josh. xv. 19? as if A^>ctl_» : the ablative ; as, 
 
 i “ 
 
 . . » n » distant from thee, Ps. lxxiii. 27. When the 
 
 X 
 
 second of two nouns in regimen has the force of an 
 adjective, the pronominal affix is placed to it rather 
 
 than to the former; as, jcuo? fen• the name of my 
 holiness, i.e. my holy name, Lev. xx. 3 ; }Aj^d 
 
 x 
 
 the city of thy holiness, i. e. thy holy city , Dan. ix. 24. 
 Some few exceptions to this rule are found; see Matth. 
 v. 29 , 30, 39; Luke xxii. 50. 
 
 The affixes are used passively in some instances; 
 
136 
 
 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 as, not my prayers, blit prayers offered up to 
 
 me, Isaiah lvi. 7; see also Exodus xxi. 20; Isaiah xxi. 
 2; Bar Heb. 218. 14. 
 
 A peculiarity of the Syriac language is to be met 
 with in the redundant use of its pronouns; in such 
 cases as, 
 
 1. Affixes when they are placed before Dolath of 
 the genitive; at least they are of no use when 
 
 translated into our language; as, v\ n« mvvn 1 
 
 ns ns 
 
 lit. the fame of him who is Jesus , i. e. the 
 fame of Jesus , jAoloij oil the daughter 
 
 X 'IS 
 
 of Ilerodias. 
 
 2. The affix of the verb, when the noun to which 
 it refers is placed after it; as, mom^ 5^_»o 
 
 • 'TV 
 
 and he sent , cut it off {I mean) his head , 
 
 'IS I 
 
 i. e. and he sent , cut off his head , Matth. 
 xiv. 10. Sometimes the noun has a particle 
 
 prefixed to it; as, ] 1 m\n I lit. he took 
 
 ns 
 
 him (I speak as to) the child , i. e. he took the 
 child, Matth. ii. 14. 
 
 3. When the affix is annexed to a preposition, a 
 
 similar construction is observed; as, TAii cni 
 in it, the hour , i. e. in the hour . Sometimes 
 the preposition is redundant as well as the affix; 
 
 as, l/Wn n La ^octlo hut in the days , Matth. 
 
 ns 
 
 iii. 1; cninl with him , with Christ , 
 
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 137 
 
 i. e. with Christ , Rom. vi. 8 ; .A m At llSd 
 
 'TS " 7 > 7 \ 
 
 /row these , 1 Tim. i. 6. 
 
 4. The pronoun ocri in such instances as jro ; A X 
 ocn goeth to the belly , ocn i vn 
 
 that by faith. 
 
 The pronouns he himself and the same the Syrians 
 have not, but they are expressed by a little circum¬ 
 locution; as, 
 
 1. By a repetition of the personal pronoun with 
 the particle p placed between; as, p Ajoi 
 
 v ojcn these same sacrifices , Heb. x. 1. 
 
 'Is 'Ti 
 
 2. By the juxta-position of the pronouns ocn ooi; 
 as, Zooi jloaJ ooi oaio and that same 
 
 day was the sabbath , John v. 9- 
 
 An affix annexed to the word ^,5 is frequently 
 
 x 
 
 employed as a possessive pronoun (§ 28), when the sen¬ 
 tence would be rather ambiguously expressed by placing 
 
 the affix to the noun or the verb; as, j? nnVn ^oi 
 
 X 
 
 thine is the kingdom , Matth. vi. 13; cn.X _.50 giX^jA 
 
 'TS i ^ ^ X 
 
 . .rn n\on p he came to his own , and his own received 
 
 him not, John i. 11. These possessive pronouns serve 
 also to give a particular energy to the word to which 
 
 they belong; thus, ^A |i my time , John vii. 8 : 
 
 x 
 
 this is especially the case when the affix is likewise 
 added to the noun ; as, ^»A. ? . . Xvn my words , John 
 
138 
 
 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 v. 47 ; vo £//?/ <??/£, Luke vi. 42 ; ^Al^a d]±d 
 
 X ?\ 
 
 w_»A_o John iv. 34. 
 
 X 
 
 A pronoun is in some instances found before the 
 noun to which it refers, and is placed at a consider¬ 
 able interval from it; thus, 
 
 X 'TS "* r\ T\ 
 
 its foundations are in his holy mountain , Ps. lxxxvii. 1 , 
 i.e. the foundations of the earth: ]a 5] occurs in v. 2. 
 Such construction exists principally in the version of 
 the Old Testament, and on that account may perhaps 
 be regarded merely as a Hebraism. 
 
 On the other hand, examples are met with where 
 the pronoun comes after the antecedent, but is separated 
 from it by so long an interval, that for the sake of more 
 accurate speech the noun itself ought to have been 
 
 “is y p 
 
 employed; as, Isaiah xlv. 13, I have raised 
 
 I 'Ts 
 
 him up , viz. Cyrus, who is mentioned in verse 1 . 
 
 Pronouns sometimes do not relate to the noun which 
 is nearest, but to one going before and perhaps separated 
 from it by a long interval; as, Psalm xliv. 3, y*^) 
 
 fenVnvV IIzdo] thy hand hath destroyed the 
 
 people; hut thou hast planted them (not the people, 
 but the fathers , in verse 2). 
 
 On the other hand, the noun itself is sometimes 
 repeated, instead of using a pronoun; as, Gen. xvi. 16, 
 Abraham was eighty-six years old when Hagar hore 
 
 Ishmael to Abraham 
 
 The Syriac writers occasionally indulge in a change 
 of the person of the pronoun; especially from the 2nd. 
 
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 139 
 
 to the 3rd. pers. and vice versa; as, Luke xiii. 34, 
 
 O Jerusalem , Jerusalem , 
 
 V 
 
 Aifri, 
 
 m)n\ „ „ . thou slaying the prophets and stoning 
 
 i i 
 
 those who are sent to it (to thee). See also Gal. iv. 
 21; Rom. ii. 1, &c. This kind of enallage both in 
 pers. and numb, is frequently noticed in Hebrew, 
 especially in the Hebrew Psalms. 
 
 Those nouns having only the plural number some¬ 
 times use pronouns in the sing. numb, and sometimes 
 
 rr\f\y^n and the veil (faces of the door) of the 
 temple was rent from the middle of it; but in John 
 i. 4, we have a plural pronoun }.LLo and the 
 
 life is. The dual noun ,_A*.Sd Egypt, admits a sing. 
 
 pronoun. See Heb. v. 27 , xi. 26. Collective nouns, 
 signifying a multitude of men, take a plur, masc. pro¬ 
 
 noun; as, Bar Heb. 121.15, ^qj] . - o. .n cnAsOj]] m r o> 
 he led away his family and shut them up. 
 
 An interrogative is sometimes preceded by a noun 
 in the constructive state; as, L-Js the daugh¬ 
 
 ter of whom art thou ? Gen. xxiv. 23 ; or, which 
 is equivalent to it, the def. state of the noun is 
 used, and Dolath prefixed to the interrogative ; as, 
 A Am i vd? from the hand of whom have I 
 
 TV X TN 
 
 received ?... 1 Sam. xii. 13. 
 
 An oblique case of the relative Dolath is indicated 
 by connecting with the Dolath a personal pronoun put 
 
140 
 
 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 in that case; as, cn^ to him , anS to her , 01X.> 
 
 'ts 
 
 to whom , aril.? to whom , v qjctl^ them , ^cljctiX.> 
 
 /o whom , cjlo m him, ctlq . 5 m whom , » j ctlq m 
 
 them , . 3 C7LO.? iw whom . 
 
 The accus. of 5 is sometimes marked by this letter 
 alone, without any connection with a pers. pronoun; as, 
 
 y y p p 
 
 Wo ^ 05 ] whom He had formed , Gen. ii. 8 ; 
 
 , A Wi #// things , which He had made , Gen. i. 31. 
 Other oblique cases of the rel. are occasionally ex¬ 
 pressed by 5 alone. 
 
 The pronoun 3 is occasionally omitted, but not so 
 frequently as the relative ntt/N in Heb.; as, ]_L,1o 
 V> and he who was able , where U4 is put for 
 
 7 T> 
 
 
 t iLi: See also Ps. xxxii. 2; Bar Heb. 487. 1. 
 
 Reflective pronouns (see J 28) are expressed by 
 ] m o 1 with the affixes; as, m.« o 1 Wi against itself 
 
 Luke xi. 17: by ]vn n \ n substance; as, ctiIdqj-O Wi 
 
 'n 
 
 against itself Luke ii. 17: occasionally by heart; 
 as, m o\o ]*_co and Sarah laughed within her¬ 
 
 self Gen. xviii. 12. The words wju] and K are 
 
 often employed to express any one; as, jIdjj ^ 
 
 v nW if any one shall say to you , Matth. xxiv. 23. 
 Again, something or anything is signified by ]2.ao^, 
 
 as Gen. xviii. 14; as, Is any- 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 141 
 
 thing too great for the Lord ? Gen. xviii. 14. The 
 
 word word, thing , is thus used. See Exod. 
 
 xviii. 26. So also is . See Matth. xx. 20; Le- 
 vit. v. 2. 
 
 56. Syntax of Verbs. 
 
 Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. 
 
 A verb agrees with its subject in gender, number, 
 and person; as, jZj \\ n • > Jesus came , A A 
 
 I' Ts 
 
 Many anointed , ], . vnV ? olU the disciples ashed. 
 
 7s x 
 
 Nouns which are used only in the plural number will 
 receive a verb either in the sing, or plu.; as, joCTi ]» L> <n_o 
 
 ■7s 
 
 U 
 
 x 
 
 and the life is the light of men , same place. The former 
 is grammatically termed constructio ad sensum, and the latter 
 constructio ad formam. Several other exceptions are found 
 to the foregoing general rule, which, although not so fre¬ 
 quent, are of much the same character as those which exist 
 in Hebrew. 
 
 When several substantives come together, the verb belong¬ 
 ing to them is put in the plu. numb. masc. gender. 
 
 Collective nouns are, on account of their significa- 
 
 t> 7 
 
 tion, joined to a verb plural; as, }1. > .> army , in Bar 
 
 7 o x p y 
 
 Heb. Chron. 109. 18, n\v. . another army 
 
 went up. See also ih. 121. 2. 3; Assem. Bibl. Orien. 
 
 in him was life , John i. 4; ] - i V i ^ ]5cnaj 
 
 
142 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 i. 372. 15. ^ all , oooi *._».kn? ^ upon all who 
 
 were with me. In this manner of construction we 
 
 find U_l^ 1 Li), and 
 
 many others. We have sometimes a noun in the sing, 
 denoting but one individual, and yet being made to 
 stand for a class, the verb is put in the plu. numb.; 
 
 as, Ijocru? ]Zu_o_» the captives of Judah went , 
 
 Jer. xxviii. 4. 
 
 A verb sing, is joined with a plur. noun when the 
 verb precedes and is put as it were impersonally, es¬ 
 pecially A.*] and A f : as, 1 Sam. i. 2, jjJLo cnS A^A 
 
 x 
 
 p y "J 7 m ? 
 
 he had not sons; Matth. iii. 16, )»vn« cnZ^ _k»A£)Z| 
 the heavens were opened unto him; AZLeu the 
 
 fugitives fell upon , Bar Heb. Chron. 144. 6. 7. 
 
 Collective nouns of the fern. gend. are often found 
 with plu. verbs of the masc. gend.; but this diversity 
 
 of gend. may be required by the sense; as, ctlad 
 
 » all the earth wept , 2 Sam. xv. 23 , where 
 
 p v o 
 
 earth , is put people; similarly, Gen.xli. 57, pdj 
 oZ] all the earth came , i. e. all the people of the earth. 
 is thus constructed in Bar Heb. Chron. 148. 16. 
 
 The proper names of places are for the same reason 
 sometimes connected with verbs and pronouns of the 
 plu. masc. 
 
 The 3rd. pers. of verbs sometimes admits an anomaly 
 as to gender; as, ] A ! . - oooi there were camps , Bar 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 143 
 
 Heb. Chron. 324. 5; see Mark xiii. 28, and many other 
 places. 
 
 The 3rd. pers. sing, both of the masc. and fem. 
 gender, in passive as well as in active conjugations, is 
 
 sometimes used impersonally; as, it will 
 
 be evil to you, Jer. vii. 6; it was good to us , 
 
 Deut. vi. 24; ^aru^o it happened to him , Luke i. 9; 
 
 Y »\s ZZ| it came upon thee , Job iv. 5; . > \ ]ooiZ 
 
 X 
 
 » P 
 
 1 Zo?c7lco it shall be to me a testimony , Gen. xxi. 30. 
 
 Occasional uses of the Tenses. 
 
 Use of the Prceterite. 
 
 Events of future occurrence, which are considered 
 as certain to happen, have this certainty represented 
 by the verb being placed in the prseterite tense; as, 
 
 the people sitting in darkness shall see 
 
 (have seen) great light , Isaiah ix. 1; ]Z] ]] ]i t ) \ 
 
 ^ x 
 
 |Zaso orZ. yi he cometh not to con - 
 
 'Ts X 
 
 demnation , but shall pass from death to life , John 
 v. 24. 
 
 There are a few instances in which the prseterite 
 of the verb ]oai, followed by a participle or an adjective, 
 represents the imperative; as, A_»ooi Ajf 
 
 go thou also (and) do the same , Luke x. 37. This 
 
 application of the tense is undoubtedly to give emphasis 
 to the sentence. For as a prseterite is employed to 
 express our belief that some future event will certainly 
 
144 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 take place, so is it readily seen that on the same prin¬ 
 ciple this tense may be regarded as the emphatic form 
 of the imperative, whenever it is so applied. 
 
 The praeterite has sometimes the force of the plu¬ 
 perfect; as, his works , which he had 
 
 done , Gen. ii. 2. Again, in iii. 1, we have, “And the 
 serpent was the most subtile of the animals, which the 
 
 Lord had made , 
 
 In Syriac, as in Hebrew, the praeterite is in some 
 instances used where we should employ the present; 
 
 y p 
 
 as, Ax-» y I know not , lit. I have 7 iot known , as com- 
 
 i 
 
 prehending the present and all previous time. I 
 know not now, nor have I ever possessed this know¬ 
 ledge, Gen. iv. 9- The praeterite also denotes present 
 time when condition and state are implied; as, ]i vn\ 
 
 y-^>) 7 ^yLQDZ.1 UkAo ,.1 why art thou angry , 
 
 IS • 
 
 and why is thy countenance sad ? Gen. iv. 6; 
 
 . * • si j my soul is disturbed , Ps. cxviii. (Heh. cxix.) 
 28. It is likewise employed in sentences in which the 
 truths enunciated are general, and not at all depend¬ 
 ent on time; as, Ps. i. 1, “Blessed is the man, who 
 
 walks not |ll in the counsel of the wicked.” In¬ 
 
 deed the praeterite in the last example evidently ex¬ 
 presses the sentiment contained in it with more accuracy, 
 because with more generality, than the present; for we 
 may suppose the blessedness to he the consequence, not 
 so much of not walking in the counsel of the wicked 
 at some particular instant of time, as of not having 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 145 
 
 walked, or of not having been in the habit of walking 
 at any one period of life. 
 
 The praeterite is used for the imperfect in hypo¬ 
 thetical sentences, although the future is much more 
 frequently met with in such cases; as, yjf 
 
 we should have been like unto Sodom , Isaiah i. 9. 
 In a conditional sentence the pluperfect is likewise indi¬ 
 cated by the praeterite form; as, ,_A 5Zo*j...lL»^ ]] olLo 
 and except God had left to us, Isaiah i. 9- 
 
 Use of the Future. 
 
 The future is occasionally found in the place of the 
 present; as, Z 5qj ]^to5clo he causeth them 
 
 x 
 
 to inherit (or giveth them) thrones of glory, 1 Sam. i. 8. 
 See also Isaiah xliii. 17. 
 
 The future also occupies the place of the praet. in 
 a few instances; as, 1XL loi^ God hath chosen 
 
 a new thing, Judg. v. 8 ; Iv^Aj S sword 
 
 and spear were not seen, ib.; ioooj 1 stood 
 
 in my place , Hab. ii. 1 ; see Jer. i. 5; Bar Heb. Chr 
 282. 7. In which places the praeterite is indicated by 
 the particles connected with the respective verbs. 
 
 The fut. is almost always used when the verb im¬ 
 plies something conditional or potential, and this is done 
 sometimes with and sometimes without any accompany¬ 
 ing particles. Hence it includes all those forms of 
 speaking, where in English we use one of the auxiliary 
 
 verbs, may, can , let, would, &c.; as, 
 
 10 
 
146 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 may the evil (of the wicked) come to an end , Ps. vii. 2; 
 
 CR. Iqm . . nn^ m/ wr/?y the life of the child return , 
 1 Kings xvii. 21; ctiq-i^qj he would deliver him , Ps. 
 
 xxii. 9; ^•joq.kkJ let them shew thee , Isaiah xix. 12 ; 
 ^od|Z /Aow mayest freely eat , Gen. ii. 16. 
 
 A prohibition in Syriac, as in Hebrew, is invariably 
 
 'IS ' 7 * 0 
 
 expressed by the future ; as, |] thou shalt not 
 
 ^ p 
 
 i. e. fear not , Gen. xlvi. 3; \oJ^oL JJ 
 
 P -7> P 
 
 not kill , or, r/o K/7, Exod. xx. 13; ■ .n ]] 
 
 X 
 
 do not call me , Ruth i. 20. The imper. is sometimes 
 denoted by the fut. when there is no prohibition; as, 
 
 ] 5 <tiqj ]ootj let there he light , Gen. i. 3. The particles 
 ? and ]]> are often connected with the fut. when a 
 potential signification is intended; as, cnZ^ ^Aj 
 
 that he would grant to him time , Dan. ii. 16; i 
 
 that they may not hearken , Gen. xi. 7. The prefix 
 
 o sometimes gives this force to the verb; as, ^oLjjo 
 that they may know , Ezek. xx. 26 ; that they 
 
 may he sacrificed , Exod. viii. 8 ; is also found 
 
 y o v v »x 
 
 besides > as follows; that my soul 
 
 may hless thee , Gen. xxvii. 4. Other particles in some 
 instances accompany >; as, in Bar Heb. Chron. 530. 14, 
 . .m . that they might destroy it; 
 
 y 'Ts 'Ts y n\ 
 
 |] ^Vcn] although I should walk...I woidd not 
 fear , Ps. xxiii. 4. The imperfect conjunctive is often 
 formed by means of the fut. and the auxiliary verb "jocn; 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 147 
 
 as. 
 
 7 
 
 0001 
 
 \ |in . ) so that they were not able , 
 
 Mark iii. 20; ] Ai mi ]ooi ^ol. qAj? 
 
 ///<? security of the city might he established , Assem. 
 Bibl. Orien. i. 393. 2. So in Arab, we have the plu¬ 
 perfect and imperf. formed by adding the prseterite of 
 
 the verb ^ to the praet. and future of another verb; as, 
 
 ^ C* ** 
 
 t_ he had written; he was writing . 
 
 See Stewart’s Arab. Gram. p. 80. 
 
 Use of the Infinitive. 
 
 An infinitive connected with a finite verb adds 
 intensity to it, or denotes what is signified by the verb 
 
 to be certain , fixed or continual; as, 
 
 I will greatly multiply, Gen. xxii. 17; <oZolo2 ALolo $ 
 ye shall not surely die , Gen. iii. 4; ]coi 5^k> hath 
 been accurately depicted , Gal. iii. 1. 
 
 When an infinitive is governed by some verb sig¬ 
 nifying will , power or command , it has generally ^ pre¬ 
 fixed; as, U>5o] mlo ]ii_i]o and how 
 
 are we able to know the way ? John xiv. 5; oi5 r _» ooi 
 ]y ; v>V he sent him to feed swine , Luke xv. 15; 
 
 i ** 
 
 \ /\oVo\ ]ooi |o^o an( t he wished to slay him , Matth. 
 
 -T> T\ ~ 
 
 01 
 
 xiv. 5. 
 
 After the verb tool the inf. with ^ will make a 
 
 sort of periphrasis of the future; as, (ooio 
 
 in— 2 
 
148 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 .n - \vA and the Sun was about to set , Gen. xv. 12; 
 mI.voVn\ jx? 05 (ji. Herod was about to seek 
 
 i 
 
 him , Matth. ii. 13. Here the participle is ex- 
 
 i 
 
 pressed, whilst in the former example it is implied in 
 the inf. We have a fut. with ? prefixed in such a 
 construction as the following; as, he feared 
 
 i 
 
 to go , Matth. ii. 22, where we see the fut. is employed, 
 when in English we should use the inf. See ib. xvi. 3; 
 Mark i. 45, 6, 7; Luke xiii. 11; 1 Cor. ii. 14. 
 
 We find a participle usurping as it were the office 
 of an inf. after verbs of beginning and continuing , of 
 permitting and commanding , and also of power; as, 
 
 1 \ 7 \ 7 7 
 
 (ln_» they began plucking the ears , i. e. 
 
 they began to pluck , Matth. xii. 1; Q_oarn_» 
 
 vOOT-JZ they permitted both of them, to grow (growing), 
 Luke xviii. 16; q n oo . n permitted (him) 
 
 to go (going), John xi. 44; IjJLlo ctlS jAd] com- 
 
 I 'TS 
 
 7 
 
 mand her to assist (assisting) me , Luke x. 40; 
 
 . x ^ '7s e y n\ o 
 
 vQj] that he was not able to receive 
 
 (receiving) him, Mark ii. 2. 
 
 Use of the Imperative. 
 
 The imperative is not only employed to express a 
 command , but also an exhortation , admonition or a per¬ 
 mission; as, John xi. 15, oo\ m let us go thither; 
 
 'T) 
 
 see also Mark i. 38. 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 149 
 
 The imper. of the verb ]2*| is frequently found in 
 
 connection with a finite verb in the fut. tense; thus, 
 lia ^cunj u U^io and now come, we will make 
 
 i 
 
 a covenant, i. e. wow come, let us make a covenant, 
 Gen. xxxi. 44; ol come, we will go, John xi. 7- 
 
 X 
 
 We have also the imper. in such constructions as 
 the following; I will give you the best of the land of 
 
 Egypt, r n i vn n • a^ar^o and eat ye the fat of 
 
 the land, Gen. xlv. 18; qJLkjO n ,r^x ])ai this do, and 
 
 'TS 7) 
 
 live, i. e. this do, and ye shall live, Gen. xlii. 18. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 The participle is timeless, i. e. it has no time 
 of its own, but partakes of every time with which 
 it may be connected. Thus, pres, most frequently. 
 
 The fut.; as, ocri om tfch 
 
 X 7\ 7\ 7\ I -7> 
 
 Therefore that which shall be born of thee is holy, 
 Luke i. 35; thy wife shall bear 
 
 to thee a son, Gen. xvii. 19. The prset.; as, Behold 
 their Lord, A. von.]vo5 fallen and dead. Judges 
 
 X Ts 
 
 iii. 25. Participles, when they are taken as such, and 
 not for the present tense, have placed before them for 
 
 the most part the particle p or the prefix as, 
 A. o nynAvn p wandering from house to house, 
 
 7\ 7s 7S 
 
 1 Tim. v. 13. 
 
 
150 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 The active participles are in some instances found 
 in the constructive for the absolute state. In such cases 
 they are followed by a noun; as, descend¬ 
 ing into the ditch, Prov. i. 12; entering in 
 
 at the gate , Gen. xxiii. 10; .^. nXX he 
 
 n\ i 'Ts 
 
 saw Levi sitting , Mark ii. 14. 
 
 Active participles sometimes govern the noun which 
 follows, and in the same manner and using the same 
 particle as the verbs from which they are derived ; as, 
 
 cnX V»3 wi;_» he began upbraiding him , Bar Heb. 
 
 x 
 
 Chron. 328. 3 ; ^oai^ v they wounded them , ib. 
 
 333. 3 ; jiai ] m. 1 1 1 q ^o mXoX n r/wr/ destroying all 
 the men , ib. 397. 1 • 
 
 Similarly passive participles observe this govern¬ 
 ment ; as, l^Q.i . * » ^X clothed with linen , Ezek. 
 
 ix. 2 ; fo.a.vno anointed with oil, Lev. ii. 4; 
 
 i 
 
 . m extending their wings, Exod. xxv. 
 
 •x v 
 
 OGlx£L^ 
 
 X 
 
 20; ]° ; vnX blessed of the Lord, Ephr. i. 116. 
 
 X 
 
 Although in Syriac the use of participles is very 
 great, yet in translating Greek books into Syriac they 
 sometimes render a Greek participle by a Syriac verb, 
 especially where the Greek participle is followed by a 
 verb, in which case the two verbs in Syriac have the 
 
 same mood, tense, and person; as, nnX o]i 7r opeuOevres 
 
 e^erctaare, go, enquire , Matth. ii. 8; f eXOwv 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 151 
 
 TTfjocTKvv^cTw, I will go, I will worship (him), ib.; 
 
 p 
 
 J>OD I!]? eo )9 eXOcov eaTY], until I came I stood, ib. 9. 
 
 Participles are employed to express a gradual but 
 continual progress or decline of what is denoted by the 
 
 verb in the sentence; as, » 
 
 i 
 
 and the water receded going and coming , i.e. gradually 
 
 and continually, Gen. viii. 3; ]_»A2 o an< t the 
 
 hoy going and grew , i.e. was continually growing, Sam. 
 ii. 26. 
 
 ip . P 7 7 7 
 
 |... a^£)cno 
 
 Regimen of Verbs. 
 
 A transitive verb exercises an influence over a noun 
 or pronoun which follows it, either immediately or 
 mediately , and which limits its signification. The 
 noun or pronoun may be without or with a preposi¬ 
 tion; as, , ov ? ^rn ] ;. he made many disciples, 
 
 John iv. 1; ] • nVn .n ^n^ ]i , What has Moses 
 
 * v • * 
 
 commanded you? Mark x. 3; 1 p^)? that 1 
 
 x t\ n\ 
 
 may call the righteous , Mark ii. 17. 
 
 Verbs which are doubly transitive, such as tran¬ 
 sitive verbs in those conjugations which are causative, 
 exercise this influence over two such nouns or pro¬ 
 nouns; as, Kclo? cn.a he commanded him 
 
 to be clothed with a garment of fine linen , Gen. xli. 42; 
 ]vnv\ ]ocn he taught the people know - 
 
 X 
 
 ledge , Eccles. xii. 9» 
 
152 
 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 The passive conjugations of verbs oftentimes express 
 the cause or motive of action by the particle ^ in some 
 
 such manner as the following; v octlZ <o^ZZ> that 
 
 o n\ 0 p y 
 
 ye may he seen by them , Matth. vi. 1; ctlSd}] Zooi Vr> 
 
 she was taught by her mother , ib. xiv. 8; ,qv Aj octi 
 
 this may be clone by you , Exocl. xii. 16. See also Luke 
 viii. 29; John viii. 33; Acts xv. 21, xviii. 18. 
 
 Verbs used for Adverbs. 
 
 It is not uncommon to see a verb put before 
 another verb, to which it performs the office of an 
 
 adverb; as, \\n« . . w ^° h as taken much , 
 
 2 Cor. viii. 15; oiiotioj ^. . mf hath greatly exalted 
 
 him , Phil. ii. 9; I will again feed 
 
 'TS 
 
 thy flock , Gen. xxx. 31; ^cooj Again 
 
 ** i 'rs 
 
 he spake a parable , Luke xix. 11; they entreated 
 nr nVov \\VvnA i that it shoidd not be spoken 
 
 ^ n\ ^ 
 
 to them any more , Hebr. xii. 19; ^ 
 
 he changed the letter craftily , Bar Heb. p. 100. 
 
 Miscellaneous Observations. 
 
 The ordinary method of expressing a reciprocal or 
 reflective sense is by a transitive verb with the noun 
 
 11 united to the affixes. But it is also in some 
 instances done by means of the passive conjugations; 
 
SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 153 
 
 as, *_uJ_£>Z1 he turned himself, Matth. ix. 22 . See also 
 
 I is 
 
 John viii. 6 , 7, 59- 
 
 Neuter verbs have sometimes a passive signification; 
 as, to wander , for to he deceived , 7 rXavacjOai, Luke 
 xxi. 8; he burnt , for burnt, Matth. xiii. 30; 
 
 x 
 
 he fell , for he was cast down , John iii. 24; 
 -oVrn he ascended , for my/a extracted , w/«a /or// ///;, as 
 
 /rooA which are torn up by their roots. 
 
 Compound words in Greek are translated into Syriac 
 by simple words, either alone or in conjunction with 
 another word or particle; as, foreknowing , Acts 
 
 x 
 
 xxvi. 5; ZjiD] ALDj-o I predicted\ Mark xiii. 23; ^cn 5 
 
 7S 7\ 7\ -7V 
 
 cjilOjjD he ran before him , or o?/V/ outrun him , John 
 xx. 4; so with many others. 
 
 57. Syntax of Prepositions. 
 
 Prepositions are employed in connection with verbs; 
 thus, *0 is found with verbs signifying to confess or 
 deny; also many verbs of sense are construed with 
 
 , 0 ; as, . . o 4 _» 5 QJ 5 who shall confess me, . »^ 
 
 XX X 'TS 
 
 who shall deny me, cnZakio ^ nie not see 
 
 n\ t\ 
 
 his death. 
 
 The preposition is used with verbs of entering 
 
 7\ 
 
 or ascending; as, ji$Z 7 whoever does 
 
 is 7\ 
 
 not enter by the door , John x. 1 , 2 . 
 
154 
 
 SYNTAX OF PARTICLES. 
 
 with verbs of covering or commanding; as, 
 he covered , Matth. xvii. 5; , rA he commanded, 
 2 Chron. xxxvi. 23. 
 
 A_l.zd with verbs of separating or distinguishing; 
 
 'JS 
 
 as, God separated ]n n 1 ]5cnQj A_»^d between the 
 
 'n 
 
 light and the darkness, Gen. i. 4. 
 
 fAo with verbs of coming; as, ]2.*j he came, Mark 
 
 'TV 
 
 i. 7: of going; as, he departed, John vi. 2; 
 run, 1 Cor. xiv. 1. 
 
 The prepositions \\A on\ against , against , 
 
 and many others are frequently used with verbs; 
 
 as, v a^ar)Z resist not evil; see also 
 
 Matth. xxvi. 62; Acts iv. 14; Rom. vii. 23 ; Acts 
 xxv. 5; Hebr. vi. 6, &c. 
 
 58. Syntax of Particles. 
 
 The repetition of adverbs, like that of nouns, expresses 
 intensity; as, ^ ^ very badly: or diversity; 
 
 I X 
 
 as, here and there: or continuation ; as, 
 
 v y 
 
 ^_Aa \\ » \ n o by little and little. 
 
 X I 
 
 Adverbs sometimes qualify nouns by being placed 
 before them in the constructive state; as, 
 
 x 
 
 a little water, }ALdqJ AAq a few days. 
 
ENALLAGE OF PERSONS AND NUMBER. 
 
 155 
 
 The particle placed before adjectives assigns a 
 privative signification to them ; as, s o. n ]] foolish , 
 
 X 
 
 120 ^- 10 1 immortal. 
 
 Interjections which denote threats for the most part 
 
 cause ^ to be prefixed to the next word; as, 
 woe to us! 
 
 sclL far he it , is construed with ^ of the person, 
 and > prefixed to the verb ; as, gi^ far 
 
 as a* 
 
 he it from him that he should do , Job xxx. 10. 
 
 59. Enallage of Persons and Number. 
 
 The enallage of persons does not occur so frequently 
 in Syriac as in Hebrew, and especially as in the Hebrew 
 Psalms; but some instances are met with in the Syriac 
 
 Scriptures; as, of Ale fL L^L 
 
 as 
 
 m.o 1. A wherefore thou art inexcusable , O 
 
 man , who judgeth his neighbour , where we have m ; o I. 
 
 as 
 
 for Rom. ii. 1, i. e. the 3rd. person for the 2nd. 
 
 Also the 1st. for the 3rd. in Mark xii. 37, octi 
 
 . .An cnV, ^05 therefore David himself calls him 
 
 ik as x 
 
 mij Lord , where we have for his Lord „ 
 
 as 
 
 Enallage of number we have in Hab. ii. 15. 
 
156 
 
 ELLIPSIS. 
 
 60. Ellipsis. 
 
 This figure occurs most frequently in the omis¬ 
 sion of the substantive verb; as, ^acoal cnkL»o and 
 
 T\ 
 
 his name was Joseph , cnLao] »V . f those who (are) 
 
 7 \ 
 
 like him , Bar Heb. 328. 12. There are other words 
 which it is sometimes necessary to supply in order to 
 complete the sense; as, a subs, in Eccles. vi. 3, ^ 
 
 T\ 'TS 
 
 Ilk) I; o ^ if a man shall beget a hundred , namely sons; 
 A. <vr). 1 ^ once have I sworn, where is under- 
 
 X X 
 
 stood, Ps. lxxxix. 35; 1 A-»qA ^>)0 lAk> 1] I 
 
 eat not that (which is acquired) by fraud and force, 
 Isaiah i. 22 . 
 
 There are very mauy passages in which a verb of 
 some kind or another has to be supplied, in order to 
 
 y 'h p y 
 
 complete the sense; as, _Ak)]J ]kvL until when? viz. 
 wilt thou bring assistance, Ps. vi. 4; yfnL 
 
 thy blessing (may it come) upon thy people , Ps. iii. 9; 
 l^KK^f l^oZ the destruction of the impious 
 
 and the wicked (will come) together , Isaiah i. 28. There 
 are some sentences in which a word requires to be re¬ 
 peated, in order to obtain a full and connected sense; 
 
 as, jlk)Aj 5 Zooi 5 ^5 Ijon but all these things 
 
 which were done (were done) that it might be fid - 
 
ELLIPSIS. 
 
 157 
 
 filled , Mattli. i. 22. See also John xx. 31; Rom. v. 
 20 ; Heb. vii. 18, viii. 3. 
 
 An accusative is sometimes omitted; as, she 
 
 i 
 
 hr ought forth , viz. Gen. xvi. 1; i he took , 
 
 viz. a Neh. xiii. 25; ^.Sd51 he cast , viz. the lot , 
 
 ] Sam. xiv. 42. 
 such noun as *)• 
 
 Also to in John ix. 7, some 
 
 is to be supplied. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 It is stated in § 10, that a simple point is some¬ 
 times used for various purposes. The practice of the 
 Syriac writers appears to have been to employ a 
 point, which by its position above or below the let¬ 
 ter to which it is annexed, would determine the true 
 signification of a word that would otherwise, in the 
 absence of the vowels, remain ambiguous. It is pro¬ 
 bable that the signification of this point defined in 
 some degree the kind of vowel intended to be sup¬ 
 plied, and thus served as a guide in the pronunciation. 
 The following instances of its application, taken princi¬ 
 pally from the Grammars of Amira, Hoffman and 
 De Dieu, will illustrate the nature and utility of this 
 sign. 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 who ? 
 
 u 
 
 • 
 
 u 
 
 I 
 
 hand. 
 
 ur 
 
 ur 
 
 is 
 
 coming. 
 
 Ul 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 Ul 
 
 is 
 
 he came. 
 
 i h 
 
 0 0 
 
 Ul 
 
 a sign. 
 
 
 ■j c y 
 
 [.a.-i-P 
 
 wretched. 
 
 • 
 
 U-vO 
 
 I 
 
 evil. 
 
 
 ^ P D 
 
 weeping , part. fem. 
 
 
 X 
 
 mourning. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 159 
 
 i 
 
 { 
 
 ! 
 
 i 
 
 { 
 
 r 
 
 I 
 
 7 
 
 OOI 
 
 OOI 
 
 X 
 
 he. 
 
 001 
 
 • 
 
 001 
 
 
 • 
 
 w_t oi 
 
 0 
 
 W-tOI 
 
 she. 
 
 hjQI 
 
 • 
 
 W_t01 
 
 I 
 
 
 • 
 
 ,QJ01 
 
 •X P 
 
 <QJ01 
 
 •X 
 
 they , masc. 
 
 
 vQJOl 
 
 ^ ns 
 
 
 • 
 
 r ^-J01 
 
 ^-i-JOl 
 
 ' 7s 
 
 £/?e?/, fem. 
 
 ^-J-JOI 
 
 V -^JQ1 
 
 ns 7s 
 
 
 • 
 
 5Q-kj 
 
 7 
 
 5q_k» 
 
 became white. 
 
 5q_kj 
 
 • 
 
 7 
 
 5Q_kj 
 
 white. 
 
 OlS 
 
 oil 
 
 to her. 
 
 CTL^ 
 
 • 
 
 Olii 
 
 ns 
 
 to him. 
 
 
 7 
 
 who ? 
 
 
 r^> 
 
 •7> 
 
 from. 
 
 
 .0 f> 
 
 Ir^ 
 
 • 
 
 work. 
 
 lr=^ 
 
 • 
 
 r^i 
 
 • 
 
 servant. 
 
 
 * p p 
 
 working. 
 
 |Jcll 
 
 P P 
 
 PctL 
 
 unjust . 
 
 ]]CLL 
 
 • 
 
 poi. 
 
 iniquity. 
 
 |]qa 
 
 • 
 
 flil. 
 
 infant. 
 
 1Aj_» 
 
 IAjJ 
 
 year. 
 
 
 1L_. 
 
 sleep. 
 
 ns 
 
160 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 It appears, from the foregoing examples, that this 
 point performed the office of vowels; that when it 
 was placed above the letter, it denoted for the most 
 part one of the vowels and when beneath the 
 
 letter, it denoted x , % or x . 
 
 This point was further used to distinguish the 
 persons and tenses of verbs. When it was put be¬ 
 neath the letter, it denoted, 
 
 1. All the persons of the prseterite, the first of 
 the sing. numb, being excepted. The third person 
 sing. fern, has this point frequently on the left-hand 
 side of the last letter Z. 
 
 2. The imperative and infinitive whenever any 
 point is found. 
 
 3. All persons of the future, the first of each 
 number being excepted. 
 
 When it is placed above a letter in verbs, it 
 denotes, 
 
 1. The first person of the praeterite. 
 
 2. The active participle; as, in Peal conjugation 
 
 ^..o Pael ^lQSd; unless one of the 
 
 'D 7\ 
 
 letters 1 o «-> requires it to be placed below; as, 
 !>q-i-Q.V) or Ui > oV). 
 
 • X 
 
 3. The first person of both numbers of the future. 
 
 The following paradigm of the Peal conjugation 
 of will exemplify what has been now stated. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Prceterite. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 (AX40 
 
 
 3rd 
 
 AX40 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 2nd 
 
 
 
 1st 
 
 • 
 
 oXgdD 
 
 3rd 
 
 
 / 
 
 r 
 
 <!> 
 
 b 
 
 1 st 
 
 pcrs. sing. 
 
 pers. pin. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ^>Q_^Q sing. 
 cl ^ o&o plu. 
 
 Future. 
 
 ^ ern - Masc. 
 
 . 3rd pcrs. sing 
 
 2nd . 
 
 ^>a&o] i s t . 
 
 '$^2-1 3rd . plu. 
 
 vOl^oZ 2nd . 
 
 ^O^qj i s t . 
 
 Participles. 
 
 act. 
 
 pass. 
 
162 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 This point in some places is found with one letter, 
 and in other places with another letter of the same 
 word. The distinction is produced only by its situation 
 above or below the word. 
 
 The Names of the Months. 
 
 We give here the names of the Lunar Months, 
 
 m.D 0 • 
 
 |uently in the 
 
 Scriptures. 
 
 as x 
 
 October, 
 
 “ t. as 
 
 November, 
 
 ^OrO V QJJD 
 
 December, 
 
 . p - •>. p. 
 
 v a JLD 
 
 January, 
 
 
 February, 
 
 i?r 
 
 March, 
 
 V ..Q3 u) 
 
 X 
 
 April, 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 May, 
 
 X 
 
 June, 
 
 laser 
 
 July, 
 
 oT 
 
 August, 
 
 
 September. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 163 
 
 Ths Estrangelo Characters. 
 
 The Estrangelo characters are the most ancient. 
 They are found in the oldest Syriac MSS., are prin¬ 
 cipally ornamental, and often used for Titles of Books. 
 The following Table exhibits their forms: 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 ) 
 
 1 
 
 OJ 
 
 /A 
 
 *3 ^ 
 
 yxzn to 
 
 SD 
 
 
 
 
 END OF THE APPENDIX. 
 
164 
 
 ST JOHN’S GOSPEL, 
 
 Chapter II. 
 
 7 v 7 7 
 
 1 Aj_»,Ld ‘jZoA.a.Sn Zocn : ]A^Zj |LdcijlZio 1 
 
 0 7 -XT* 
 
 w n.m. > ooi v2)1o 2 ,Zooi _SdZ vxo..a- >? aiio|o 
 
 • “ n\ 'is x v, 
 
 0 7 7 0 * • 7 •• 1 
 
 locn ;_ccl_>oO 3 ♦ IZoA-a.SnN oiZi wiQio r tAo-^Zo 
 
 Tl P I 7 > ~ 7 
 
 .^pCJlZ^ AjZI IfACLhj V\0.» 1 \ CTlk)] ctl\ 1^d]o .)^kLK» 
 
 Ti 'TS 'TS 
 
 o y 
 
 V 0 
 
 V\ * v y : IZAj] >.j-o.\o oA |k) ^o.«. > oaZ. £ 0 ] 4 
 
 X " 1 > I 
 
 7 p 7v p •• 7 p • p p • p 
 
 jAd]> V?\ cnlo] IjAd] 5 .^iA^-» ZZ] 
 
 p x ••'h p y p y -* •• 7 
 
 •Aj» UJ ^__»3 w»oai A^l 6 .o,£H 
 
 ^3Z ^__»5Z tr^l? *P?OC7L»3 |A-a_23A_l v ^n » rm 
 
 jo a 'is x x 7 x 
 
 •• 7 \ p y p »9 y •• - 7 ) *x ^ »x 7 p p p • 
 
 U^> oZAd ,vio-ja^ ^ooiZk jAd] 7 .]AVZ oj 
 
 n *, *. V p 7» p 7 7 
 
 ^a-ok) q.aqZii . v ootZ^ ^d] 8 ]SDjJL r ^.j] oZiSoo 
 
 i ns y • 
 
 -*-»3 001 kOLlZ ,i)0 9 .Q-.A-*]o ]nV)TO w&^jZa oAZio 
 
 7 D 0 
 
 0 7 7 7 -X 0 p»« 7 p p 
 
 ]ooi vx^ ]]o : l^ki^ ooal? ,qjoi |jlAd ] nVncn 
 
 n\ *“ ° • ■ 
 
 « *X 7 P ^ p M 7 
 
 Q-AAd V QJ013 OOOl ^ \ 3 13 -1. Vn « Vn 
 
 n\ “ i 
 
 p 7 P p 
 
 jAojo io /(j/UaZk |oAnco 
 
 :1ooi 
 
 ,3 If-O 
 
 p«* y 
 
 •x ^ 
 
 : i-sukA v qj] 
 
 a-» 03]3 ]Ado »lA_»_k) ln,^ ]-kiL j*voa^, \ \ A .ctlA 
 
st John’s gospel, chap. ii. 
 
 165 
 
 f p £>y 0 v x i y 0 y 0 
 
 l ,r ^ L I^ »OT_»Zj-^J ^- k ? Aj] |j_>") ^__>,_>01 
 
 *• V v 0 p y 00 00 00 0 y 
 
 VXQ-*__» lA^-lOjjO ]Z] ^iCTI ])01 11 t^DjA 
 
 t> y 
 
 * 7 7 
 
 V 'TS 0 
 
 C7LO d-Lln iCTIO Ot*>A>Q-» ^o]o : ]1 » \ .p ]l j\no 
 
 ” -ft x V* 
 
 ^ *X77» »l» P 7 P ^ ^ % 
 
 ooi .^oq-k>j^lqa Z_kkJ |)oi 3Ao 12 ♦ :*^oio t . >lnAA 
 
 7 71 ” * 7 
 
 . 7 7 07 7 .. I ..77 7i 
 
 oooi _1 dZo . wicno-ukAZo w^oicAjo cnAjc 
 
 x • ^ *" * 7 ** 
 
 t 7 o n\ 7 \°k 0 ** 7 
 
 *AArOO . pr0Ol_»? 1001 Al^JOO 13 .]ASD0l^ 
 
 71 X J “ X 
 
 l?o2 AoA »^kZl»]o 14 : vicLA bA_®3o]3 
 
 x ' ^ x 
 
 t 77 p *T\ p • 7 7 
 
 otA Ailo 15 ♦ r ^oA J 5 [la^ioZo . (jcao A'Ao 
 
 a ^ _ _ _ 
 
 x 7 0 7 
 
 •x *x 7 o y 
 
 AaA ♦ jlo >01 ,Ao *A£>] ^ooArAo : Ua^> ^Ao |L.;A 
 
 x x 7 oi 7i V, 
 
 7 X •• X 0 X OX 7-71 .710 . *i' 7 > ^l V 
 
 .^£30i ^oot_*3oA£30 actlla^qa j_»|o . j..L 0 ;AVAo |3oAAo 
 
 x ^ \ * 7 7 
 
 <0 
 
 .0 . X 7 ^ ’}'*** 7 7 X 7 • 7 
 
 jAoi oAqo it pa_i . -».i^pAo? .qjoiAo 16 
 
 P *. P 7 P P 
 
 ]Z3cAjZ A_»_rO w»A)]> rnA » o\ CTLJOjAaZ Uo .]Ad 
 
 Vv/71 X x X x X 
 
 o 7 
 
 7 •• X 7 7 X 
 
 - * i \n i oulj.^3 : ^lAo) ^oiOj-AolZZ opDsZIo 17 
 
 7 x 7 
 
 7 X X p x x X 
 
 Aj] *|Q-kAD U1 i-AO .oA OjAD*)o t? 0 Ol-> -j) OJA 18 
 
 „ A ^ K 7 
 
 7 ** 
 
 7 ^ p 
 
 .^OdA jlo]o V>CLa. > ]_A 19 .Aj| AA ^.Aoi? .<A 
 
 7 0 0 7 
 
 ]j] S o > nVn jj] ^ AOQj. *|AAZo : |joi |id_>01 o3oAid 
 
 n\ o *x x 
 
 <r 
 
 . y • L*o A?ooi_> oA 20 .oA 
 
 X _ „ X ^ -r <■*. 
 
 x 7 
 
 x 
 
166 
 
 ST JOHN S GOSPEL, CHAP. II. 
 
 p p o y 
 
 7 X •• 7 P P 7 7 
 
 Aj) ^OjuqSq __k_SDCi_i ]A\ZZl Aj]o .fjcn flri_.cn wjlJLoZ") 
 
 i 'h 
 
 x 
 
 7 7 p 7 7 o 7 o -n «X 
 
 p 22 .cn^^)5 fid .cn ^ ]ccn jlo] ^.*5 ocn 21 .ctlZ. 
 
 'Up 777 •• x 7»p 
 
 Ijctj? w.aio r lln2^Z o^Z] .lA-uSo ZU-o <_lo !>clc 
 
 •X v. y f\ P V. 7 P .. 7 
 
 VI » 
 
 7\ 7 
 
 £o|> ."IZZiLaXo ImArZi a_i_l£L.cno ."jocn 
 
 p x 7 
 
 •X ^ P 
 
 : IjO.pL'O V»j^gLO l<Aj>5oio via_®_» ]oai ^aioA_»l ,3 23 
 
 * 7. V. I “ “ 7 I 
 
 V \ ” Tl V -n 7 x 7 
 
 <--»? ocn 24 . r £OL? |ZoZf oI-k.5 .cjlo aj.ln_.cn IfJL^-CD 
 
 • ^ P P 7 ^ 
 
 •X * ^ 7 *X P 7 P *X ^ 
 
 oai? -cn «g\i v oaiL *|ocn ^In^cnln ]] vio-a.. 
 
 * Tl 7> 
 
 7 c p o o ^ p 7 P 
 
 50xcqj ]oai iD,» im jlo 25 . i \n\. ]oai vi^ 
 
 ^ ^ X “ 
 
 AJ Uib locn C ^ ail 
 
 • 7 P 7 
 
 (-• ij^n 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 1. }1dclLXo And on the day , compounded of the 
 conjunction Vau and, \ on or upon, equivalent to 
 
 and ]1 dqJ the definite form of the masc. noun 
 ioal, § 19. 
 
 * p 0 7 
 
 of three , i. e. third. Cardinal numbers with 
 > prefixed are sometimes used for ordinals, § 54; > is 
 here the sign of the genitive. 
 
 Zooi was , third pers. sing. fern, of the subs. verb. 
 ]ooi praet. tense. 
 
 t 
 
 ])n A feast , a fern, noun def. state derived from 
 
 'h 
 
 the verb ]A^, see $ 15. 
 
 in Cana , composed of o in, and 
 a proper name. 
 
 ’iZuL-.yk) a city , a fern, noun def. state; the line 
 
 under the Nun is the linea occultans, $8. It is 
 derived from ^ he judged. 
 
 ]1 > \ ^ of Galilee , > and )1. a proper name. 
 
 aikfjo and his mother, o a conjunction, fern. 
 
 n\ is 
 
 noun def. state, and the suffix <n, which is pleonastic, 
 § 55. 
 
168 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 ^ Vn / there, an adverb. 
 
 Zooi was, subs, verb, third pers. sing, fem., with the 
 linea occultans , because it is the logical copula, § 8. 
 
 2. ^]o aZvo, o a conj. ^>1 a conjunction. 
 
 ooi he, a personal pronoun used with the following 
 word as reciprocal, § 55, p. 108. 
 
 vicLa-i *Jesus a Saviour , from Hiphil jwin he 
 
 ' 7 \ 
 
 saved . 
 
 . .mn [Vvn\7 n and his disciples , ,a disciple, 
 
 - V I 
 
 a masc. noun. Def. form is ] r -k . L n \Z from the verb 
 
 x 
 
 t vn\ he learned. The sign •• indicates the plu. numb. 
 
 a 
 
 ^aio 7 is the affix, third pers. sing, to a plu. noun. 
 
 was invited , a verb, third pers. sing. masc. 
 
 I 'TS 
 
 Ethpeel conj. from ]*_o. 
 
 aiS to it, which is redundant, referring to the fol¬ 
 lowing word, $ 55. 
 
 3. looi the pluperfect tense Peal conj. of 
 
 the verb $ 38, The line under the cn of jocn 
 
 shews that it assists in forming a tense, § 8. 
 
 li-Vnl, wine, def. state masc., Arab. it fer¬ 
 mented. 
 
 Ifcblo and she says , part. act. of the verb fem. 
 
 i\ 
 
 gen. Peal conj.; the vowel Zekofo which belongs to 
 the Olaph is remitted to the preceding letter, $ 40. 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 169 
 
 call to him, redundant in this place, 
 cnlof his mother , see ver. 1. 
 
 ^oot.2 A. K there is not for them, i. e. they have not, 
 ZuJL compounded of ]] not, and A_»l is. 
 
 x 
 
 4. jVd) 1 saith, act. part. Peal conj. masc. gen. of 
 the verb fn ]. 
 
 'fS 
 
 . . n\ o . . \ ]sb to me and to thee ? i. e. what 
 
 ■ 7 ) X 
 
 have I to do with thee ? Jsb an interrog. pronoun, J 26. 
 and ._ . affixes of the first pers. sing, and second 
 
 X 'T\ 
 
 pers. sing. fem. annexed to 
 
 woman, fem. noun, def. form. Heb. ntSW 
 
 — T . 
 
 from a man, the W is changed in the Syr. word 
 into L, see § 4. 
 
 not, an adverb, yet, compounded of r i and 
 
 x 
 
 or Vd. 
 
 X 
 
 221 l ias come, third pers. sing. fem. Peal conj. of the 
 
 'TS 
 
 verb 111; this is a doubly defective verb, § 49. 
 
 my hour , fem. noun, abs. state const. 
 
 7 
 
 state which with _ the affix of the first pers. 
 
 7 
 
 o 
 
 sing, becomes § SO. 
 
 7 
 
 5. otIdI feol, see ver. 3. 
 
170 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 • 7 > V 
 
 noun, def. state, and is derived from the partic. Pael 
 conj. of the verb . • he served; the •• over So is 
 
 'TS 
 
 the sign Ribui, and denotes the plu. numb. 
 
 whatsoever he saitli , 5 any thing 
 
 7 1 \ 71 
 
 which , or ivhatsoever. 
 
 /o g/ow, pron. affix, second pers. plu. numb, 
 annexed to 
 
 do , second pers. plu. masc. imper. of the 
 
 y 
 
 verb ; the regular vowel under the sec. rad. is 
 Etsotso; the Revotso in this word is an anomaly, 
 $ 36. 
 
 6 . wiocn A.*] there were; Zu] is pleonastic, and is 
 
 “ I X 
 
 thus frequently used; w,ooi third pers. plu. fern, prset. 
 of the verb "loci. 
 
 but , Gr. $e, a conj. 
 
 'TS 
 
 & there , adverb. 
 
 H^l water-pots , def. form plu. numb, of the noun 
 Heb. 13N* 
 
 of stone, this is one of the ways of expressing 
 an adjective by means of a noun, $ 22. 
 
 A ,3 six , a card. numb. fern. gen. 
 
 7 > 
 
ANALYSIS. ♦ 
 
 171 
 
 vn'Zcm which were placed, > rel. pron., vn.’.m 
 
 X X 
 
 pass. part. fem. gen. pin. numb, of the verb he 
 
 placed; see paradigm of Jxxud. 
 
 lA_i_D)A\ for the purification, ]A_»_ 2 )Z 7 fem. noun 
 
 X X 
 
 def. state, from the verb Id? to he pure, 
 
 x 
 
 of the Jews, 5 a sign of the gen. 
 
 p • • p p • • c 
 
 containing, or which contain, > rel. pron., 
 act. part. Peal conj. of the verb fem. gen. plu. 
 
 *T\ 
 
 numb.; •• is the sign Ribui. 
 
 Z two each, that is, each water-pot contains 
 
 T> 'h 
 
 two; firkins, masc. noun plu. numb. def. 
 
 i 
 
 form is fco*. 
 
 o] or; the dot over o was probably put to distin- 
 
 7 
 
 guish this part, from oj the interjection ; |aSZ three, 
 a card. numb. 
 
 7. r»\vn fill, imper. second pers. plu. numb. Peal 
 
 7 
 
 conj. of the verb he filled . 
 
 them, governed by the verb o.\vn . see § 56. 
 
 ilk) water, plu. noun def. form, masc. gen. It is 
 used only in this form. 
 
 * p 7 
 
 NF in the water-pots; \ has the signification 
 of in. See Schaaf’s Lexicon. 
 
172 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 until, composed of the particles ,1 and 
 
 to the top , an adverb with ^ prefixed. Root 
 Heb. rbp lie ascended. 
 
 T T 
 
 8. mn draw ye , imper. second pers. plu. numb, 
 of the verb . It occurs only in this place in the 
 New Test. 
 
 \\. now , an adv. compounded of !>o and . 
 
 X 'Ti I 
 
 oA_*]o and bring , the second pers. plu. numb, imper. 
 of ; this verb is doubly irregular, or defective, (J 49. 
 
 ]nVnm . ; \ to the governor of the feast , ^>.^5 a 
 
 X X 
 
 masc. noun; it is frequently used with another noun, 
 as in the present instance, from fnss to recline , 
 
 masc. noun def. state. 
 
 cl»L]o and they brought , third pers. plu. numb. 
 
 x 
 
 Aphel conj. praet. tense. See above. 
 
 9 . po and when , composed of o and , p as. 
 
 he tasted , third pers. praet. sing. Peal conj.; 
 this verb has the vowel Revotso; for reasons, see $ 36. 
 
 octi a pers. pron., and is redundant in this place. 
 
 v ojcn they , referring to . 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 173 
 
 "jocn was knowing , i. e. knew , the imperf. tense 
 Peal eonj. of the verb the lined occultans under 
 
 i 
 
 <n denotes ]ooi to assist in forming the imperf. tense. 
 from , a preposition. 
 
 tikuf whence , an adverb. It is used with and 
 without an interrogation. 
 
 he called , third pers. sing. numb, prset. Peal 
 conj. See ver. 2. 
 
 /o the bridegroom , masc. noun def. state, 
 
 Heb. jnn. 
 
 10 . i Vo i ] the latter word 
 
 is frequently joined to another, in which case the Olaph 
 disappears; as, son of man , or man; the def. 
 
 state of ^ 2 lj) is ]_i2]. 
 
 9 
 
 first , the same as 7r pwrov, an adverb. 
 
 g’oorf, an adj. masc. gen. def. state; abs. state 
 is or . 
 
 1Zl»_Lo hringeth , the act. part. Aph. conj. sing. 
 
 *T\ 
 
 numb. masc. gen. of the verb he came; this verb 
 
 deviates from the class whose first rad. is Olaph in 
 changing this letter into Yud. 
 
174 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 > |Lo when , after that ; jib followed by the rel. •> 
 has frequently an adverbial signification. 
 
 o_,o5] 7 they had drunk sufficiently , Aph. conj. third 
 
 X 
 
 pers. plu. numb, praet. of the verb jo5; the vowel of 
 the Olaph is remitted to the Dolath, § 40. 
 
 then , an adverb. 
 
 ? iu that which , rel. pron., § 26. 
 
 worse , an adj. masc. gen.; the def. form is 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 kept it, Peal conj. second pers. 
 
 sing. numb, of the verb ; the suffix ,^cn_. is re¬ 
 dundant, referring to the following word, § 55. 
 
 Uatl IsbU until note, adverb. 
 
 11 . ]*><ji is; j>cn demons, pron. fern, gen., 
 
 w_.cn a pers. pron. in the place of the substan. verb, § 25. 
 
 i 
 
 ur sign , or miracle , a noun fern. gen. def. state, 
 Heb. JTitf • 
 
 1 A-i-SOj-O ./£/•«?/, an ordinal number fern, gender. 
 
 which he did; Peal conj. third pers. sing. 
 
 praet. 
 
 v^ojb known , or manifested , Aph. 
 
 conj. third pers. sing, praet. tense of vi r _,; the Yud is 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 175 
 
 changed into Vau, § 40; the vowel v is remitted to 
 the conj. o. 
 
 (jLKKoai his glory, masc. noun def. state; 
 
 the ahs. state is ojan», § 19 ; the root is he 
 
 praised , Pael conj. 
 
 o \ vn , mn they believed , Aph. conj. third pers. 
 plu. numb, praet. of the verb _kf). It is irregular in 
 the Aph. conj. being formed as the Heb. Hiphel. It 
 is generally construed with ^ or 
 
 oxo in him, *o a prep., cn affix third pers. sing, 
 masc. 
 
 12. after, a preposition. 
 
 Ijcn this, a dem. pron. fern. gen. sing. numb. 
 
 9 
 
 he descended, Peal conj. third pers. sing, praet.; 
 
 -T> 
 
 the vowel Revotso is found in the place of Pethocho, 
 being an intrans. verb, § 36. 
 
 to Capernaum, a proper name. 
 
 ^<noJu1o and his brethren, noun masc. gen. plu. 
 numb.; the sing, is plu. abs. state V def. 
 
 X 
 
 state 
 
 oooi they were , third pers. plu. numb, of the sub- 
 stan. verb ]ooi. 
 
176 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 ^\n few , adverb connected with the following 
 
 x 
 
 noun, § 58. 
 
 jAsbal days, noun plu. numb. def. state fem. ter¬ 
 mination; in the sing, we have ^oal, def. llooZ. 
 
 13. and near , an adj. masc. gen. def. 
 
 i 
 
 p y 
 
 state from the verb 
 
 x *rs 
 
 ]o(ji was , substan. verb. 
 
 passover , masc. noun def. state. Amira says 
 
 that this word, in Greek ?rdo-^a, found in all the Gos¬ 
 pels, signifies joy , and derives it therefore from 
 lie rejoiced. Pref. to his Gram, where he gives a list 
 of Syriasms in the New Testament. 
 
 he ascended. Revotso under the second rad., 
 
 § 36 - * 
 
 14. a^i»]o and he found , Peal conjugation with 
 
 7 
 
 Olaph prosthetic, § 36, constructed with 
 
 i that were selling , or selling , act. part. Peal. 
 
 i 
 
 IjoZ. 7 masc. noun def. state, sing. ]>oHeh. 
 
 "Vittf, XO is put for 2, § 4, Greek rdvpo s, Lat. taurus. 
 
 lijio sheep. One point of the sign Ribui in 
 this and the preceding word coalesces with the point 
 of the letter Rish, { 7. 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 177 
 
 ]jalo and doves; according to Schaaf from iTP ♦ 
 |jL£) r ikilLo and the money changers; the ^ is eon- 
 
 IS 
 
 structed with the root is whence 
 
 'IS 
 
 money. 
 
 K > sitting; the Dolath denotes the participle 
 
 i 
 
 to be taken as such, § 56. 
 
 0 0 
 
 15. whip, Greek (ppayeWtov. 
 
 cord, masc. noun def. state, Heb. *?in, Eng¬ 
 lish cable. 
 
 ^ocji^sXo and all of them, compounded of o, X 
 ^ and 
 
 y 
 
 vQ_a*| he caused to depart, i. e. he drove, Aph. conj. 
 
 is 
 
 third pers. sing, praet. of the verb .o ^ i . The Nun 
 is dropped for the reason given in § 41. 
 
 o y 
 
 ]1^ > m temple , masc. noun def. state. 
 
 jilS and he poured out. The vowel * is remitted 
 to Vau, § 40. 
 
 ^nm i es\n \ their money, i. e. the money of the 
 changers. 
 
 v octlAoZv£)o and their tables; 
 by metathesis Tpcare<[a. 
 y&m he overturned. 
 
 7 
 
 l?oAi> masc. def. state 
 
 12 
 
178 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 16. selling , act. part. masc. plu. Pael 
 
 X 
 
 conj. of the verb 
 
 qZ^q..q.-» take , second pers. plu. irnper. Peal conj. 
 of the verb Vkq » . 
 
 hence , i. e. from, here. 
 
 CTUOj-CiJlZ. and make not it; a prohibition is 
 generally expressed by the fut. tense. The suffix cn 
 
 'Ti 
 
 is pleonastic, § 55. 
 
 mA . A\ the house of him; ] A.» f is a masc. noun 
 
 'ts 
 
 derived from Zclo or he remained , or tarried the 
 night. The suffix <n is pleonastic before Dolath of 
 
 ' 7 * 
 
 the genitive, § 55. 
 
 merchandise , a fern, noun, from ^ 
 
 17. o^Zjo and they remembered , the Ethpeel 
 conj. third pers. plu. praet. of the verb Heb. "Df 
 
 the l being changed into ?, § 4. 
 
 which is written ; ^_,Ad pass. part. Peal 
 
 X I 
 
 conj.; root he wrote . 
 
 fT M iZ ? ^^7 tl ie zeal of it; )JlL£ masc. noun def. 
 
 state, from Z><? envious; the affix is pleonastic, 
 
 being before ? of the gen., § 55. 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 179 
 
 7 y 
 
 . » i hath eaten me; the vowel * belonging to 
 Olaph is taken away when the object, affix is annexed, 
 and v belonging to ^ is remitted to the Olaph, $ 48. 
 
 18. o ia they answered , from third pers. plu. 
 preet.; Heh. ruy • 
 
 IoIkLd showest , act. part. Pael conj.; root 
 
 ** i 
 
 y 
 
 to us. It is composed of and ? first pers. 
 plu. affix. 
 
 19- o5o 1\£D destroy , imper. Peal conj. second pers. 
 plu. of the verb 5Aco. 
 
 W jj] I will raise up ; v> > nVi is the 
 
 X 7\ X 
 
 act. part. Aphel conj. of the verb the second 
 
 pron. is put in the place of the substantive verb; the 
 part, in this instance denotes future time, § 56. 
 
 •• y -m 
 
 20. » L*o after forty and six years; 
 
 x x 
 
 ^ in this place has the signification of after . See Acts 
 xxiv. 17. 
 
 . \ was built 9 Ethpeel conj. third pers. sing. 
 
 1 
 
 masc. gen. praet. of the verb |lo. 
 
 21. ]ocji {lol was speaking , or spake; jocn has 
 
 the linea occultans , because with the act. part, $iof it 
 forms the imper. tense of -Loj, § 8. 
 
 m. of his body; ? the mark of the gen. pre- 
 
 0 y 
 
 ceded by a noun in the def. state; masc> noun; 
 
 V 12—2 
 
180 
 
 ANALYSIS. 
 
 Chaldee NTte; corporeal , the adj. and 
 
 carnally, the adv. 
 
 22. ]Z lLlp A. ^ house of the dead, for sepulchre , 
 pass. part. plu. numb. def. of L^o. 
 
 x 
 
 ]50i5 that this , to the demons, pron. is understood 
 
 Q 
 
 the noun jlio. 
 
 ]oai jio) he had spoken; ]o<n in this place assists 
 
 ‘IS 
 
 in forming the pluperfect tense of the verb *$£>1, § 38. 
 q iln . mn, see ver. 11. 
 
 which he had said; this verb denotes the plu- 
 
 ns 
 
 perfect tense in this place. 
 
 23. ]ocn wiOio^L] was; the subst. verb being joined 
 
 ~ ns 
 
 to A_»"| with its affixes, the imperf. tense is formed, $ 34. 
 
 feast , masc. noun, def. state; root Arab. Ac 
 
 x 
 
 he visited, second conj. joc he feasted. 
 
 many, adj. plu. numb, def., from the verb 
 ]_^CD he multiplied. 
 
 o]_k*> when they had seen; > has here the signifi- 
 
 V 
 
 cation of when. See Schaaf’s Lexicon under this letter. 
 
 24. 
 
 
 > ocn But Jesus himself See § 55. 
 
ANALYSIS. 
 
 181 
 
 m m <?\ i ^om\ ]o01 . mV) tVUSted not himself 
 
 to them; ]ooi is joined to the part., and makes the 
 imperf. tense of the verb ^.Soi, Aph. conj.; ].i>-.£L3 gives 
 the verb a reciprocal sense, $ 56, p. 114. 
 
 because . Etsotso has not here its usual accom- 
 
 'h 
 
 panying letter Vau, § 2. 
 
 looi v* he knew , imperf. tense of the verb v. 
 
 i 
 
 25. ]ooi -n . im he needed , imperf. tense, Peal 
 
 • i 
 
 conj. of the verb *qjlcd. 
 
 jcjlccu should testify . Optative and subjunc. expres- 
 * 
 
 sions are frequently expressed by the future tense, 
 
 § 56; the vowel Pethocho is put under cn because in 
 the praet. this letter has Revotso. 
 
Translate the following Exercises, with the help of the subjoined 
 Analyses, the Grammar, and Schaaf’s or Castell’s Lexicon. 
 
 St MATTHEW’S GOSPEL. Chap. XXVI. 1—23. 
 
 P 7 
 
 baio 1 
 
 'T 'J) IS 
 
 3 t _jAdclj r -»3Z 3Ari 2 
 
 x ti ”7 x* " * x 
 
 3 . 6 ^2LO)p? r, ^aiAj>Ao "U-j]? 4 <nii loai 
 
 'n 7\ t\ d “ ^ 'n t 
 
 % P • P 7 * •• 7 *** p ^ P •• 7 7 7 7 • 
 
 8 cnZ3 r A : |kH5 |« . « n n |;-^coo pair) w_»_o3 7 o.a i nZj 
 
 ^ i 
 
 7 7 
 
 P P 7 
 
 via.a__» 10 GLxik)Z*|o 4 9 l^joAk}5 ]joud 
 
 7 S 'TS 
 
 0 «X 
 
 ooai 5 . la w-*aijuJQZ^njo 11 ^(TU-jo^Ij jlrao? 
 
 P7 P 7 P *X p P7P 
 
 |ocn jXO 6 .]inx^ ]ocnj V; U 
 
 V, 'h 'TS X 
 
 15 AifO 7 y^- 0 -*? oiAj-cls .(.i.iy 14 Aj>.ixo vio-a__* 
 
 71 71 71 7N 7| 
 
 ]imo5 V»i»-a.k5> 17 ]A£i j_ 4-» 16 C7i > \\ A_»l> ]ZAjf cni 
 
 7 *x 7\ »» / • o. y * y y 7 
 
 ^.jAqCD jJD ^Q._a_i? (JLa__»? \ix 19 C7lAX^i_»|o : 111 on 
 
 X 71 I 
 
 7 • P 7 « 7 «£>•• 7 
 
 pp 7 -X »«7 7 71 7 
 
 ]i v>V .otiolo ^ojii "walxjZIo v^cno, > V)\Z ^5 oV-k» 8 
 
 
 7 pp 77 P 7 PPPP7 
 
 |jcn 22 ^5p5 t-^-it loai 21 u^xijaXo 9 .]jch kpa] 
 
 ^ — * T* 
 
 ♦ ^OCTLX jiolo ,-i) V>Q-uL* 10 . 24 ]i nmVn\ 23 _rXTL»AjO 
 
 'TS X *7* 
 
 *T\ X 7\ 
 
 "7N X D 
 
 i llaa. .UAjU <ni v oAj] 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 183 
 
 y g^V?S A_»] | i nnn^n ^ . 2(5 ,_ot 
 
 I x 
 
 7 • -X 
 
 « ii 
 
 —Zal 
 
 y y i\ -r\ p 
 
 y •* p 
 
 27 
 
 A^AdI]? ]?ai 12 . <a:A Zu] ^oi\mo ]] w_»A 
 
 • y y y y -x 7 p p p 
 
 ♦ Z^oi : « >V)»a^. ]jcn ka 
 
 7 £> P _ P -n 
 
 mil 
 
 ]?ai ^Z;-OCD 38 Ij-^ZZ? 1o4? v am^ ]j] iAd] _i-k}]o 13 
 
 'TX ^ 
 
 P_ 7 _P 7 
 
 D 0 -X P *7 
 
 l?cn Z r OLi> ^o,Ad *£>1 . 29 'SLSoAj ? )^n\v mV.nn 
 
 7 * 
 
 Uo_»;oro Ijoctl* IjjoASoj jjcqaJZ ,_Ao ^ ^il cn 14 
 
 x 'Ts n\ 
 
 •X 7 
 
 OOP 
 
 7 7 p • 
 
 ^oAj] 31 ^-j-C)^ UAo .^octlA jlolo 15 . jjaio ^5 ZqJa 
 
 <_»> ^qjoi .^amZi ctlA ]i] AoN-aSo jj]o : >-i.\ 32 ^AkA 
 
 P Tl 0 
 
 loai }ao <_Aoo 16 r _.A \L ctlZ. a ^o -i- Q i 
 
 I-LsDjJD ,__.> ]k>aJuO 17 . w-iCnci-t-SnX-«.n }v\^ - ctlA 
 
 'A -7\ 
 
 0 v 
 
 ♦X ** P 
 
 7 'Ts 
 
 Ti y 
 
 1il»1 .otZi ojAo]o . VsG_ie__» ZqZi 1,-i.kAZ QLOf-o : 33 t r j-&0>? 
 
 7 7 7 P 
 
 ^__»5 ocn 18 3S .mA/ ? Aj") to 
 
 A 
 
 . ctlA OiAo|o 36 ^Jio ZqJa lAjL-iykZL clAj .^octla jAd] 
 
 p p p 
 
 7 p 7 7 
 
 t^»^2) 111 .olA ^.ZqJa .ctla I^Ad 37 ^j_loi : jAd] r o5 
 
 7 7 P 7 7 7 •• y 7 
 
 r no> b-^-»1 o r oA w»oio r j_kAZo 19 
 
 • • • n • 
 
 7 •• 
 fc r 
 
 ■ V>V Isai 
 
 : 'Uio5 )oot ,10 20 . jjj ^0 OOi.^0 • V\Q._a_» ^ocrilm 
 
 -T\ <T\ <7\ 
 
184 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 or ••y v 7 vo 
 
 * mv\ po 21 .^010, > VXZ i>Q_L ]oO! a& ^->_So.CD 
 
 I " I H " X 
 
 7 *> 7 *X P 7 0 7 7 
 
 - ».»A yA alo ^Q-QJ-Vo W -Id] ^Sn) 
 
 T 7 \ ^ ™ I 
 
 41 ^ oi\ ^o]1clX 40 n_.^»o »..n.£ ^ocriX 39 A1 j^o 22 
 
 ^ i i ^ *?> 
 
 _1d : ti]o ] 1 ± ooi 23 . »__6 ^jd U1 . ^octi.iSo 
 
 ^ ^ ^ t, X 7 ( 
 
 V 7 * p 7 7 ^ 7 P 
 
 .« vl V?\ • 1 001 «-i.V)S Oly-*] 
 
 ', >^nV / « disciple , from r A\ he learned. 2 v^_» he 
 
 X * * X 
 
 knew. 3 ^ool 4 ] Z i]> oi^do and the son of him , viz. 
 
 o/ w«ra. 6 ^q2L» he delivered. 6 .^n ] he crucified. 7 . • i o 
 
 he assembled. 8 15? palace , or /W/. a ] ; p he called. 10 ^ Xvn 
 in the Ethpaal, he considted. n r L) he took. ,2 ^|uO Ac 
 
 ,?/£M7. 13 jJlo he constituted. 14 ]‘> i v Aj_Zio i» Bethany. 
 15 *o^o he drew near. lg m^\x A_»1? lit. /o wAom there is , 
 
 ^ i 
 
 i. e. having. 17 ^i4-» be immersed , he wasted by immer¬ 
 sion ; also flowed out , and hence ] A^ . ft « a vessel\ 
 
 x 
 
 from which liquors flow out. 18 ^o?, plu. V price, 
 
 x 
 
 money. The def. form is ),iLo?, which is here and else¬ 
 where used adjectively in the sense of precious , costly; 
 
 19 \lsl» he poured forth. 20 v ooiX _»fczV iV was 
 
 7 
 
 grievous to them . 21 to ato, and hence . .. A - cn 
 ]ooi was possible. 22 ^ he bought. 23 ^<nJ he gave . 
 
 24 ]inmVn\ /o the poor. The root is the Arab. 
 
 ii i •»> ^ 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 185 
 
 which in the 5th. conj. signifies to be poor. 25 v_»y to 
 
 x 
 
 be fatigued , wearied. 26 in every time , always , 
 
 ^ in, Xd time. 27 ]Ld5 he cast. 28 )lo he preached , 
 
 Gr. Ktjpvaaa). 29 ^lo spake. 30 aiJj.Do r X ,/or a memorial 
 of her; root he remembered. 31 he wished. 
 32 ^Aj he delivered. 33 unleavened bread , from the 
 
 x 
 
 Arab, to be unfermented. 34 he prepared . 
 
 35 .mv\ he ate. 36 « owe, Hebrew 'pfe 37 . » i 
 
 w/?/ /me hath come ww/A respect to it (cnZL), viz. the 
 Passover. 38 he reclined . 39 he was sad. 40 fj_» in 
 
 i 
 
 Pael, he began. * .JL owe. 
 
 PSALM II. 
 
 ^ •• y •• y y * p p 
 
 .|Z<m »^co 3 ^-i>j 5 2 |Zq 1 o|o : (kJkiA f rVr> 1 
 
 : 6 l^ol 7 4 oiZLsdZ]o : |j-4-ZX-»o jLj]* ]nSLo o.Lo.o 2 
 
 'A •• X 'A 
 
 : 7 ^ocri‘Zni-Kj 6 >nm^u 3 V) Xlo 'XL 
 
 ^ •• •• x 
 
 • pp V m. p y •• y o «x y ~ 
 
 | > V>.« n 4-0ZL5 4 . vccn^-i-j m 
 
 : 10 ^OCTLkZL^ XlLqJ CJ1 5 . ^OOLO 9 ^-n . ^r>i 
 
 Xl . I ZV> > o] IjI 6 . ,Qj) 12 11 <TlAkLK»>CDO 
 
 • •I H 'h •* 7) 
 
 V»Xb 7 .. 1 An In Xl ,3 U^-*-J? w*»» 3 Q -05 ^qZcti. 
 
186 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 15V $4-» 8 . u ^Z r A UAaZ ]i]o : Aj] w-iA 
 
 18 
 
 20 
 
 CTL*-;Z1± 17 ^Aj-kjoIo ? 19 y?n? • » \ fcflAl : ^>Z]o w_».j_1d 
 
 • • •• 71 •• “TV 'TS 
 
 • •7 ns 
 
 o 7 
 
 0 7 
 
 D 7 
 
 to <$^1 , 9 H5Z 9 
 
 • • 'ti • • 
 
 22 o>5Zlo : 21 qAd^co'I ]iAk> ]_»cn 10 . ^qj) ^sijZ 1 -AA 
 
 •• ns "Ts •# ^ ## 
 
 P ^ *X ^ P « *% o 0 m *X • ^ P * 7 ••0 7 
 
 w-.CTLj-JOj-kiOIo |A\*VD I-j^jcA 23 G-kjOA£) 11 .pj|? CTL_»_1_»5 
 
 ns •• 
 
 : cjlk»5o] x ^Sd AAjZo :iAj P? o.CLaJ 12 . . 24 lL»ZjA 
 
 ns ns x v*« ns x 
 
 *ZZA v ocri_iAaio : ctiu.o? r A. AA.O .A A|lo 
 
 • • v ns 1 ^ 
 
 y F 
 
 . . >m o\v 25 _iAj.nZ> 
 
 V 
 
 x x 
 
 1 a^i he sung. 2 ]Asdo| a nation , plu. has two forms, 
 viz. ]Zoiof and ,oio). 3 jj5 he meditated. he con- 
 
 ^ 71 
 
 (f 7 m 7 
 
 suited. * 1^1 lit. as owe, i. e. altogether. 6 .om^ cwZ 
 off. 7 . 0 h. he strangled. 8 ^l^Jie laughed. °^qZ_1d he 
 
 derided. 10 ]i^b wrath. Root p^5. u J>clZ he grew hot. 
 , 2 oAl> he disturbed , troubled. 13 ]Z_» in the Hithpaal, 
 s/?a// declared. This and the two following words 
 may be rendered literally thus : sAa// be declared 
 
 r -j\ 
 
 with respect to my covenant. u .^7,\. / /zav# begotten 
 
 X 
 
 thee. Root ,ZL. 15 he ashed. 1 C Z|_» he inherited. 
 
 • X 
 
 17 ,_L] he tooh, possessed. 18 ; Z v he passed, *| t ZA a bound- 
 
 ns 
 
 ary. 19 |i> /*£ ruled. 20 Ao a vessel. 21 ^Ziro he understood. 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 187 
 
 22 Ip in Ethpeel, he is instructed. he wor¬ 
 
 shipped. 24 ]A_*2.5 trembling , from Ll he trembled. 25 
 
 x 
 
 //c A? confident. 
 
 St JOHN’S GOSPEL. Chap. IX. 1—13. 
 
 . cti!d'| ad a ,_Ao? l-ulnro |a\i ao 1 
 
 • • •• 7\ •• ^ 
 
 ^ p % e -xv 77 7 . 7 . .-x.« 7 
 
 pen qj_Sd ^5 ^-.oio f -L.So\A *._»oia-4-®o 2 
 
 7 p 
 
 7 p 7 7 
 
 ^OCTUl ;Ad] 3 ]lQ£D pi v^OIOOTa] o] 
 
 »• 7 P 
 
 7 o 7 r 
 
 3 .-> 010 ,^ <7LO ]]*) *_i 01001 a 1 Uo 001 U 
 
 y 77 y «•• p y . *» P t « P •'» y 
 
 A 4 «-A5 r -»? ,Ad? ,nsV)\ Po 4 . ]oia\? 
 
 p 7 
 
 7 P 
 
 6 UAHa Ad U ] x \\ in « ooi 5 llrAn >] 
 
 x •• 
 
 Jm 6 .ISoXij W anJana^ ft A 5 
 
 7 7 P 7 
 
 ctloo5 ^Ad ]i >..£ «_o5 ^-Acn 
 
 •7S •• X Vi •• 
 
 P 7 7 
 
 7 7 7 
 
 . , . , 7 ^1 .(TLA iAolo 7 ♦ 1 _lAdDD 0013 w_*01CU_»_A ^A 
 
 I •• •• •• 
 
 p 7 p 
 
 P *x 
 
 •X 7 
 
 • IWm A 1Z]o >- •} ^i]o ,”UjqA»„» 3 n^?oAaiAao 
 
 • • •• X •• XI 
 
 Aq_»A ,-Ad v oaA ]ocji ]\^y *]o ,_»3 10 —.aion^u* 8 
 
 x •• •• •• ^ 
 
 p p 7 7 0 0 0 7 0 0 7 0 
 
 ]o 01 A)Aj3 001 QJ 01 looi y *0001 ^-jjAdI looi 3pKi3 
 
188 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 oooi A_»]o "alooi? oooi A.*] 9 .5^0 
 
 . }j| bh 1 0C71 001 *0^ ]Soj P") .p 
 
 o v •• 7 
 
 Ua 11 13 
 
 7 7 
 
 • • •• 
 
 0 7 V 
 
 AaZI Uo »1 ctl\ 10 
 
 P % p 7 * 7~ey •>. . 7 * 
 
 *.« 40 U_»_4 ,g.s> vxqjuj “cniQ_»> lr^-11 • ^poiA ^io|o 
 
 I * 7 > .. V 
 
 P ? 
 
 7—7 
 
 •U°. Xj-j) ].i.Ann ^1 . ^o]o *..»- 1 .». s ^ 
 
 I Vj 1 •• 1 •• 
 
 7 7 0 7 
 
 . 16 OO t ] OlX r*»iol 12 . t,>,\ waV^Zlo -«U »1 A^lfo 
 
 ••I I I •• ^ I •• •• 
 
 •X 7 
 
 7o 0 
 
 7 p 
 
 ^iOJ ‘“OCTli. ^OIQ-.A.'io 13 . (_l| ^ U ,CC7L-. fio] 
 
 ZflX lool 
 
 1 ,ZL» he begot . 2 ]v^» he saw. 3 *. .mn ,n \ the works of 
 
 1 
 
 Him, viz. o/~ GW. Root he made, or cfowe. 
 4 5^» 6*W. 6 ^ool day. 6 ^>sl*±q is able. Root 
 
 he went. 8 ^cl» Aph. . he washed. 9 r iaL he 
 
 stood. 10 The 8th verse may be literally rendered thus: 
 But his neighbours and those by whom <ooi^... ? he 
 was seen from before time, when he begged, said. Is 
 not this he, who sat and begged? *|ooi P is frequently 
 
 employed at the beginning of an expression solely to 
 indicate an interrogation. n oZooi he is. 12 inf. of 
 !*?■ 13 ^»As he opened. 14 oii.e. oi.. .3 ; iso-» the name 
 
 of whom, or whose name. I5 n ^. ) for 001 where is 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 189 
 
 he 1 ? lfl ocrL^ is pleonastic according to the genius of the 
 Syriac, they brought him , viz. him , who from before 
 time , &c. 
 
 Bar Heb. Chron. Ed. Brans, and Kirsch, p. 41. 
 
 P *X I 
 
 0 h V 
 
 7 7 
 
 2 ]Zo5]^ L» 1 
 
 7 P P 
 
 -no *X 7 7 
 
 » i» 7 i» p »• -X p 7 •» 7 
 
 4 ]jLrD?CLQ 5j_»o ^->3^00? \ 
 
 XX 
 
 TV *X ^ TV p •• 7 7 ^ e *X ** 7 °k 7 1 7 "i* •• 0 
 
 001 . 5 | i n.rn |_®>CLQ ^Z.0 |JOLO 
 
 TV 7 
 
 7 7 7 P 7 
 
 tv P •• 7 
 
 ^-.5Zo v .x.sn » ^q_l 3,_»o j^ai^ IoAtlI <qj] •.oAd 
 
 ■p x • 
 
 0 0 TV 
 
 0 0 7 tv p 
 
 •X 7 7 
 
 P 7 
 
 • V»s^lo 7 Ujo_» ^ootjjAo \ i ]V) >.n 
 
 
 .. 7 
 
 JJ 
 
 •X P 
 
 7 P.7 
 
 P 7 X 
 
 , o3a£Ln ^qj] 8 ^Zo] ]^Vr> oaio .]A_» ^ 
 
 TV *X 
 
 0 7 0 7 0 
 
 p . ^ r _»3Z ^n\ ]2 q\ n ]-Kjjar) ^ooiZi jino 10 ]Z3v^ 
 
 P p .. 7 7i p •• 7 
 
 ■a 7 
 
 . -X 7 P -A -A -X 7 7 
 
 IALDOj^O ( 10 i ,^0 18 v n^\L^ 1 y .Qj| 5011 
 
 • • 7 
 
 •X »x 
 
 TV 7 
 
 A-»o AXZ «-»001 ♦ <001 <_*3Z ^ .__i3Zo .sn.t 
 
 t ' ~r 
 
 p • 7 
 
 7 "A »( 
 
 7 7 -A 7 PP««7 
 
 
 a-kA-»? Q-KK^)Aji 1 i>Q-l 14 akLK^Z] jJD .]A£I2lSO 
 
 P 7 -X 
 
 ■A 7 7 • 7 
 
 15 >..i-n >Zo^n > nn <qj] ^acoo . <qj 1 -na"| ^5 ooi 
 
 XT T -7l H • 
 
 .]Z3 r i oiZ^> 
 
190 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 « year. 2 Z*j he granted liberty. captives , 
 
 from he made captive. ‘|I_ 05 Cld gifts, presents, 
 from which in the Ethpaal conjugation has the 
 
 sense of making offerings. "vajLs interpreted. 6 *mi> 
 
 he interpreted. 7 ]» m . Greek. 8 ,jdZo] he made to dwell, 
 from ^A_». 9 ni n in Pharos. 10 5 \^Jie cut. u 1_k»5cid a 
 
 cell. 12 aX thirty-six. « he changed. Shap. conj. 
 
 14 ^q^£) he compared. 15 . > n library . 
 
 Bar Heb. Chron. p. 51. 
 
 p 7 0 7 7 7 
 
 0 7 
 
 71 7» 7 7 7 
 
 jym s »Z Ai.a n 
 
 X X 
 
 0 0 7 
 
 0 7 *X 7*7 0 0 7 
 
 5*0 
 
 « 3 cnki*? 2 ]^-» 
 
 t' 'A 
 
 "i 1 «—»C7l5oj? 
 
 p 7 7 1 7 f y 7 •>. -n 7 0 0 7 
 
 w 2 )l * 5 -»A_,]o 4 j^5 Nil. V ^D5 
 
 7 • P ' 7 P 7 7 
 
 I 07 .. 7 0 0 7 7 p 7 7* 
 
 jAd] jJD 8 ] 1, 1 1-KJ3 (TlX_ 0 7 Lr-*U^ .jlO Lq\ 5j_» 
 
 7* X ^ 
 
 p •• 7 p 71 0 0 •• 0 ,0 7* 
 
 P •• 7 7» « 7> 
 
 10 
 
 jjLLoSnro 9 ]Zcl£d'|o r >sni A^Ao_®5 
 
 7 0 7 .. 7* 7* 7 7 P P 7 7 * 7 7 7* 7 
 
 o] \-l±D-3> k ^D ZLkkJ? Aj| IotZZn 0| Aj] ^ Vn 
 
 7\ O p 'is • ns • ns ns p y p p y ns 
 
 ^n^»A_»Z> y*i±D ,3 A 12 A^Ad "Ijctl^o IotZL? cn^ 
 
 7* • 7* 71 P 7 P P 7 71 
 
 14 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 191 
 
 ** • 'is n\ 
 
 
 f> 7 7 
 
 A-.]? |ro|Zo ^ZqA ]Z]Zo 
 
 •X » ?> -ftp .7 7 P v *-n p •• .* 
 
 <Q_» j-fHJ} ^.^0^0 ^uAl 17 v „,L.l 4;V)0 ^ 15 t-»?o_»> 
 
 0 • m/l\ 0 •• »X 
 
 xp xy o •> pi 
 
 )n g^ cn o ,_*A A_»] 1 Zh-°i...»o "jZ5o_Ll ^5 lAj__> r !o . 
 
 -ft 7 p 7 7 -X 
 
 -ft 7 P 
 
 •J> 7 
 
 r k}_>cm l_i_.p or:aip .otZi ^jl^) <__o v ^l£) AX 
 
 pp .x 77 • P 7 
 
 p P 7 
 
 Uo .^ZoX ]Z]> AoAs? ^otXlo .U ^ 
 
 • y •ftp-X'Ti op 
 
 7 • 'T* 
 
 _ Jr »aio A_K>XA-»*i cnAX-&So> iOjio (^5 an 18 |IkL»]5 oai 
 
 ^ 7 P P 7 7 
 
 7 7 7 
 
 7 • *T\ 
 
 ^X I9 jj3 r iiAr) Ij-kkLdo . ^JLo ZaX (JaZ] 
 
 P7 7 •• 7 p ^XT^yy 7 •• y 
 
 . ^kxi? ».X i|3o U-kj *,X \t\ 2 o wi, i V)\Z 
 
 1 '-»ai5o)) of the city Edessa. r/ painter, from 
 
 5^ he painted. taheHarms, a letter-carrier. 4 |X? 
 
 aboard. 6 _Zu] he brought, Aph. conj. from ]2f he came. 
 
 p 7 'ft 
 
 6 lZ^j « letter, probably from the Heb. “UK he collected 
 7 V*Pi hands of; def. state plu. of ] r /| a hand. :! ]. i i , 
 
 Ananias. 9 ‘jZouD'i cures, from . . m ] he healed. '" ^Wnm 
 
 i 
 
 medicines, pi. of jlnco. "IxnXL because of this, therefore, 
 composed of ^XLand Ipm. l2 ^ho he wrote. i3 ]vp he sought. 
 
 he took the trouble. 15 |Z)cX> of the Jews. 16 v->ra x , 
 he is envious. 17 <__£3 he murmured against, when followed 
 
192 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 by as here. 18 ]lkL»]> that 1 should perform , Shaph. 
 
 conj. of to he full. The whole expression is as 
 follows: “ that I should perform here, ^So what¬ 
 
 soever, criZZL&!o for the sake of which, I was sent,” &c. 
 
 “frUio for ]j) 5^ I send. 
 
 • • 
 
 y 7 p 
 
 ZuA ,_Sd ]ocn ^ 1 ] tAw ^QJcn So ^ 
 
 I Xv ^ ^ ^ ^ X 
 
 • • 7 •• 0 7 0 7 7 p 
 
 /Li] ]lo\ ,JoZ> cnA {lo"|Z1 
 
 1 7> •« i\, •* -k -n i\ 
 
 0 0 p p P 
 
 • . 
 
 
 5 ooi 3 ^Aoo? ^So Aj] 2 So 1i kA y ]o5oio 
 
 p 0 o 7 
 
 00 00 7 
 
 y 5 ]jcnA 4 v oaA v -> .n,n.» y AZu^.Z > Vrm 
 
 T> ^ I •» X - 7 > 
 
 P P *X PP •• p 
 
 .* iuAa£) uA loai yo |soA» 
 
 « .n IA he interpreted. This word is identical in 
 sense with \the substantive form of which comes 
 afterwards. 2 ]i • he changed. 3 ^o> place , no « 
 
 x 
 
 permit not themselves to sleep. 4 ySo? he slept. 5 ] i m \ v 
 because of this , therefore. 6 ]AAqj 2 > work , from aA 
 /«£ worked . 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 193 
 
 P P P 
 
 p p p p 
 
 J>Q£DO ]SoSQ.»tQ 3 li9r-» ]o01 2 ^A>] 
 
 X \\ IS " X “ 
 
 •X X 7 7 P *X 7 7 7 P 
 
 vOotAs? r ^cn 4 aA jId'IZI _aioio r 
 
 P P 0 
 
 7 7 
 
 7o 7 • • X P 
 
 y jj]o ^j-JLCllDO r x.l„Cl 6 ]ai 5 ^5^3 |_»CLL_k» 
 
 7 P -X 
 
 \ 
 
 P p P P •• 7 7 
 
 X -7» 
 
 <_i>cn ^_A ^1 -k» y Uj^i n? 7 Z^id]o 
 
 * IS “ I 
 
 P *X p 7 7 7 
 
 U-^l 8 Z5aul 
 
 1 ] .Vi it huckster. 2 *qA? he hurried. candle. 
 
 4 _dcti AAd lit. because of so, i. e. the cause of so doing. 
 
 i\ 
 
 5 vl5^jj «i?Ao about me. 6 ]cn behold. 7 Z^q£d)o and I 
 
 is 
 
 v y 
 
 thought, the Aph. of ; orr> he thought . 8 Z5au] I made 
 « light, Aph. of 5 <tij. 
 
 7 p 
 
 ._A Zl»] 2 oiZAj 1 aA Z^ioj ! w»o 5 ^ jj-A) 
 
 P 7 
 
 7 .* 7 
 
 P P 7 
 
 ,_*? oaio ]^1 q_kj 5 4 ) 0-0 • \ -.-i 3 )imi ^ '(ctlA^d 
 
 7 •• 7 
 
 P 7 7 
 
 * p 7 / K P 7 
 
 5 *|A(AikA ^i-LixSC }j_m 1> CTLO jCmVn jj]o m\ An ] 
 
 p y 
 
 y p 
 
 8 tlLDQ-»0 7 AklQ5 xD ](n> ] . . ^ ^ 
 
 1> X j x 
 
 .•Ua*0 
 
 is 
 
 l ^or p when a man was drunk. 2 jZAjj a woman, 
 
 x - 
 
 or wife. that he would render hateful , Aph. conj. 
 
 13 
 
194 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 from ]mi . - 1 ]n 1 drinking; root, Heb. njjtP. 5 ’)2 AqZ)]Ld 
 food of barley-meed , a sort of coarse food; 
 
 roots ^>1 he eat, and . he pressed. Z? 
 
 desolate, Aph. of . 7 )^ xVno wheat. B ] i vnn 1 o?7. 
 
 honey. 
 
 o o 
 
 o 7 
 
 3 ^o r iD ]ocn ]^oo |ocn 1 ^oi5 
 
 7 0 -X 
 
 0 7 7 o o 7 7 o -X 7 7 7 00 
 
 jj] jio] \s]A^l yDO ]io$ 
 
 -7N v -^ ^ 
 
 0 0 0 0 7 
 
 . s .? 5 ]Ld Vsil t-»U 
 
 ’^cri? //£ raw. 2 ];-o> a field. 3 ^o^d something. 4 |Sd^ 
 lifl 7/77^7 where. 5 . > \ ^ 7727/ voice. 
 
 •x 7 o 
 
 0 x 
 
 0 7 0 
 
 .cnarA) ZoA *tdAd 1 ]Z5q_,.')A^ ]oai ^i] >r D 
 
 ^7» -7N X ~ 
 
 P 7 P P *\ 
 
 y£D y 5 w»Aao r s }ccn vj° 3 |ocns 2 ]j<Ti5a2> 
 
 k Ti n 
 
 •X 7 
 
 7 .m* w _,aioA| Oils, -ju_L£) 0 ]oCJl ^^AoZ] 
 
 * 
 
 . -n 
 
 Zuocn AZZAo 
 
 7 •• 7 7 
 
 •X P 
 
 ^oZ y wjjAj^Io za.isq qA\3 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 195 
 
 lie negotiated. 2 ]joi5cld disease . 3 1 o m v heavy. 
 4 oi-1d in Ethpeel, to he sick. in my place . 'yso 
 
 finite; hence . . ^W ) p it would he quite impos - 
 
 X 
 
 si hie; . m believed , here imper. Aphel of vn|. 
 
 y y y Y y V P 
 
 2 ^coq-.«ZZ> oA ^oUl oA 1 wfzuL-jZ.1 p A->f{ 
 
 ** ^ ^ 'n ^ x “ 
 
 ^ P P 7 • • * 7 *X P P P * 7 ^ ^ ^ 7 
 
 o"A 4 (-CP^^l1d ocno 3 |j^^£o ^q-A^joAo |oA\ro 
 
 « t * p p y ^ p *x *x # * *x • y *x 
 
 amAA A. | ooi ^iLqj* qAj <ooA v_»_x^) ocno 
 
 V, ^ X 
 
 x X ?l Vi -7N 
 
 / r * * * ' f * y y p p 
 
 »iol? A \\ln» p >. ».!.}>>&no locn ^j r .ocj A P] 
 
 'h ^ 'T' 
 
 7 7 *X 7 *X P P P 0 P y 
 
 .y^ojjo ^a^nj50 PI )L) p 
 
 T\ 'fs 
 
 p p» y *X 7 7 
 
 Aj) 6 ^.Acn ]ocn 5 yo)nV? >aAAo A 
 
 7 7 
 
 s'* ** 'JI 
 
 
 » .oi ^ he stole, he trusted. 3 | r ^_^co adored. 
 
 4 1 rn. JiCn extendeth or pointeth ; root *cd^. 5 he 
 destroyed , Palpel of pi ♦ Aj ^jAoi (things 
 
 x ** 
 
 that are) mine. 
 
 7 7 0 -X 
 
 7 7 •• p 7 
 
 7 p 
 
 noo « Po cnA,»/n.n? 2 ]ln\o 1 annuo Al^qAl }j^»1 
 
 •X 7 P 
 
 7 7 
 
 1^1 ^ nA Ai v OCnlOL looi JO.^JO 3 ]Zl^_.;.£0 PI cjuo 
 
 P 7 0 7 7 7 *X 77 7 0 0 7 
 
 1 /Ad 1 u>j? l-i---»l ooio ,_Al AjI AP 
 
 -T* 'T' 
 
 13—2 
 
196 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 7 P P_ 7 
 
 7 7 
 
 VOJ-^Z? \Q. noj-j loiZZo ooxo j^5cn ^_1 d oxo 4 
 
 o 7 p y 
 
 p 7 
 
 li-Vjl lloo 7 ,_^o ^1Q 
 
 7 
 
 'ooqj he took. 2 }Lo\o everything . 3 1A>^^d « roo/! 
 
 4 U^ in Pael, to migrate. \o-i_£ he prepared. j he 
 bore a burden. m mm, ox for nothing. 8 1t-^ Uoo 
 
 lit. rmr/ reward hath decayed , i. e. without reward. 
 
 THEOPHILUS. 
 
 Bar Heb. Chron. p. 132, 133. 
 
 p P -X P -X 
 
 7 
 
 p 7 P P 
 
 1^0150] |Sdo]Z ;0 jL_OolZ 1 Vi r ^Z\lD ]_LOl "jjOXO 
 
 ^ i -tv 
 
 ns p »x P 
 
 ^7 pi 
 
 7 P 7 
 
 ."UjOfiO} 4 . m >.ro 3 or^ I^oiSd 2 qjo 
 
 A_>U3omo ~jc7Li-k)Z |Io{ 6 ^oAoi> joAo axil Zulo 
 
 ^ 7 
 
 7 • P 
 
 •X o »X 7x7 ns 7 7 ns 
 
 ^.oail ocno . 1-kkOQ-» 6 b. ^.Loo 0X0 j-QjCO 
 
 iDal ^ v a^l ^Do^oV? _JaS 
 
 P II I 
 
 7 7 ... -n 7.7 I 7. •» -«7 .PP -X. 
 
 !xx»u>Z.|o oxol^oo ^5oxkio • .(j^5amo 
 
 pp P 7 -X-X7 -X "» x 7 i\ -n 
 
 jjai 9 ]_]_Lojoi 8 aiZo5Aj_k) «■ J. y^ CO OX- _j_ Id 
 
 7 7 P P P •• 7 7 7 P 7XPP 7 
 
 oxo_»Ao ]o^ lAkxu <-k> r -K>o> l^Ak) ♦U-^lZ^0j-^dd1> 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 197 
 
 y o •• y 
 
 -n 7 
 
 •x ti 
 
 .-»oio_,Aj_d cnkuo oiAjl^jIo ]r-»^ 10 *-ooVmJ? 
 
 7 • 7 7 
 
 ai\ Ijlojo ILjaolZ? oiZoZi ot-2ljlZid3 oiZAj] Z5,_»o 
 
 ^ -n 7i -n i 7 ” 
 
 7777 -X 7 £>7 7 
 
 Zj^LlO |n\VT)X 11 . iC7l > Ao\Vn Aj)j 
 
 P -7% p "* 
 
 f 1 ^ • ••? I P P ? P *X P P *X 
 
 ^-k.n.\o cn_»A^ v _ ,om » n » i m ]]? 1,^1 Uj5o]? |^5a^o 
 
 7X7 
 
 P P_ 7 
 
 P 7 
 
 <_k) ^Sol^o ]oiZL^ |j] Ipmk) 
 
 0 -X p-ny-x 77 1» P 7 7 p 7 
 
 (Ij^oIZ OOIO _L ,cn-,^l0 J-D ^k_*_jZAj? IjLH-*] 
 
 71 i -n • ^ ^ * i 
 
 >X 7 P -X 7 p p ‘PUP 7 
 
 ^i^aacn? 16 IZo—.v^l l?ai^ oiZaZ> ZZ*}j ,4 ]Aloy *._»_jl 2 d 
 
 V. xn 7 x 
 
 •XT' 7 7 71 • 71 p -X 7 P 7 » 
 
 wJOOIj^J3 0"L2Ljl AoiX AnZ^o M clZ> 3 16 ^oZ^ai 
 
 7 7 
 
 7 * P 
 
 ^..i >A^? ]A^aZ> Ijoio |rDo }]] 
 
 X 7t ^ 71 P 
 
 **oo 'ft o 7 •X7'* 7 o o 7 
 
 r _lD }_J01 17 |qXjj ]0Ol wTL2U O^-llD ^ZoLd IotZZv 
 
 7 7 77 -x PP7 
 
 vju .1 ^-Q.cdZ U 1j] Zfco 55A_»]o IcnZL 
 
 'TS • “ ^ Xi 
 
 'Tt 0 'ft 0 TS 
 
 7 • P 
 
 7 ** _ -X ^ 
 
 oai? oiuof U] ,-iZak> ]ooi 4-^ZaZu. A.\n n7‘|* ^lo 
 
 ^ 7> ^ 7 
 
 p 7*oo 7—o 7 P 7» 7 ^ 07 
 
 . » |j] ^o"| ]ArALo o] .-.Aj] U1 18 jllsA-g.vn *-*_j^3 
 
 7o • o o 
 
 7 0 7 
 
 W? -AjI l iAcl»3 |Ldo li -I ^ 
 
 * ■>. n\ 
 
 7 7 
 
 7i I 7 • 7 P 7 
 
 ♦. >da-i 3 ^ oai ]^ 2 lL \oiZ^d _jA1dZ ZZuAo 
 
 P 7 7 
 
 7 P P 
 
 7 -X 
 
 |_l!o 3 Zooi ] >.^£Q^o A^i lAoZuiD _-iAai A.iLn.» 
 
 t> • 
 
 I 0 0 •* V 7 7 0 0 0 o 0 T* 1) 7% 1> 
 
 A_»_Ld ]A1oq_* VV > Vn >Aoo .]joi ]ia^2)3 ouAd ]ooij 
 
198 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 I y o i i •• 7 i 7 P i p * 
 
 w_>?cniD v^)"j A_»_Ld jlAdo_» 5Ar^o tL^>o1Z o<n 
 
 T -A -A * 
 
 I p -A 7 7 -A -A p • P 7 7 7 7 7 
 
 .IL-^oU -nraQ5 ^OjId l,n\\ u.c-guo 
 
 7t * * X 
 
 ‘V* he knew. 2 qjoj^td| for .onnVnn in. (\mf astronomer. 
 
 x 
 
 3 %-^lo.j he adhered. 4 .m ,.cnSm heresy. 5 ^Ank) for 
 
 i 
 
 Z n i nAo^n description of which with j 1 times , may 
 
 be rendered chronicles. 6 ] I ^^5ZZL those per- 
 
 ^ i 
 
 sons , or things worthy of praise. 7 ^cn*) 7 he translated\ 
 Aph. of ^oi. 8 oiZo5A1lo AZs excellence , from 5^u . 
 
 X 
 
 « p »7 y ^ y 
 
 9 t.iAo| «rA 10 he went a journey. 11 he has 
 
 influence. 12 Aph. he destroyed. 13 ^oo? he cast 
 
 away. ^Alo] « 15 Uo r ^j legation. 16 .,n; f vnX 
 
 /o Z/w/ mistress. he cursed. . ^rn ; rn he hastened. 
 17 (o.\-kj fate. 18 UidA^uLd he fulfilled, the Eshtaphel of 
 
 P 7 
 
 (Ed ; lie cut , or decreed. 
 
 LIFE AND WRITINGS OF BAR HEBRiEUS, BY HIS BROTHER 
 
 BARSUMA. 
 
 7 ,X1 ' P 7 -X 7 7 7 p p 
 
 r-^ ocn? (.loAcAd? w_»oia.»o] \>oiAo |^1 d ]ai _1 dc 
 • *“ ^ \ 
 
 ^ p »x ** 
 
 2 au r JOk 
 
 501 ..\V? 
 
 ^ P 7 
 
 Edo^ 
 . ]ooi 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 199 
 
 7 7 0 7 i\ o 
 
 0 17 7\ y 
 
 A_*A ?0 "|Aj_» l?CTLO locn 4 ^01 A_»|j_xAd 1 r 3 
 
 ^ Jr .cn ]ocn ^jOioAjI : cnxio 5 qjoioAjl1qX ]Lqd5o^) 
 
 “ ” x -n • -ft 
 
 V—^ lAii MIL 
 
 7\ 7\ 
 
 
 7 -X 
 
 t A A *0 • Y *A % •• 
 
 j-AZ!loo (j^o o (_j5cl£d ,_k) (xn 
 
 • • o 7 
 
 
 0001 
 
 •X 7 7 7 e *X P 7 p -x p 7 • y 
 
 ^jOiq_»j| »n.« kjZ.] : \^ak>5 ]5Z]? ]Zo.« ijJ ,__.a X^loo 
 
 P 1* 7 
 
 P 7 
 
 P -X 
 
 ^oXaj 9 ]_»j_ml_03 w._. 1 kA ]kA? jAd]o l^o? Vio 
 
 * •• xb • 'h n\ x 
 
 7 o TS 7 c> o 7 i\ • o •• o 7 7 •• 
 
 . IjJCjA j.i cnAXk) |tl£UO jm » .. 
 
 1 * .... » ■ X 
 
 p 7 I 7 -T> 7 7 7 1\ 7 7 7 7 
 
 |Aai(1d ]j. ^£1^10 
 
 7 *77 7 *X 7 P I 7 7 7 •• 7 7 
 
 " *>” vV i-xo505*|3 lAj-jjk) CTL^^O 
 
 .-np 7 .n -*1 • P . » P .7 » P p *X 7 
 
 t|.i >; <^)k? cao |ccn n .5oi ZL(j-»-io|? pen _k) ,qjdioA_*_j 
 
 •* Ns IX •* * ^ 
 
 *t\ 7 7 7 7 7 «X 7 7 
 
 ._LoAZ^ _qi»>jo l 4i]o 12 ctl1£l* w^oiajj] _Ao ivXZ] po 
 
 ^ • • 'K V •• 'TS • -7\ 
 
 p 7 p P 
 
 ]?Aj-Lo : ]jaki ,-Aoo |xd5 ^1d ^LoZ loai po 
 
 i> -n Tt •• x 
 
 P .. •• 7 « "X P 7 * P P .7 7 « •• p 7. 
 
 kico? (jloi AqjloAuLo} pdAh-13 ctijlIo qjlxoZ. 14 P-j-/ 
 
 • *r\ -n -?> • t> 
 
 •X -X-ft » P 7.PP7 71 p » « ' x 
 
 ^O^OU ^QJOI ^|j ^£1C7U U_JD^CO Aj(j3Q-C0J2) 
 
 • •• • ^ • <h T 
 
 7 p 
 
 •X 7 
 
 ^aik) ] r jjAoo • . ^ oai . 15 v a i ^Ajo oiro 
 
 ^jlAOQj OJ^j y»-t } ] A\ » nra ^.AjO 16 ] Avn^X_u ]APkio 
 
 •X p 7 
 
 Tt 7 0 7 
 
 1 AZkZ jjnD airo ojl£30 oj_ZAoA.*_ kA fcoA 
 
200 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 TV 7 "X P 
 
 p 7 
 
 ]A^jro 18 w.a....i3] laloAo p IAojo __p . 17 1 ^\d 
 
 •• • X -n 
 
 • 7 o »X p x 7 77 n> is 
 
 . ocn |_»AX aiVo 19 ]Zq1q-^1cl^jd ^cn\La>)o 
 
 7 7 
 
 7 P 7 P 7 
 
 •X 7 
 
 Up \ ]AjlJ 5 20 aj»Ar)Z1o IZaco") oZ] jrm.n r -^ i*oo-i-oo 
 
 07*0 o • p *x 7 77 
 
 loan adI . "jocn UjAlo U ocno . 21 i^omkiiDJo 
 
 ~ “ TV "V TV V, Tv * 
 
 7 p 7 0 P 7 P V P P T • 7 P * 
 
 5^.1 wlZ p .Via ^ Vfe^O’O IjTLL 22 }j<TliO y> i-i_^ 
 
 p 7 TV p 7 
 
 P 7 
 
 ocn t A\^ -,A_» ]Aj-» l?aioo : ]ocn w-.cnoA^] U’l 
 
 V" 
 
 I^Zo 1H* r k> 23 Ql^oSo ai^£) 
 
 7 7 m. 0 **7 
 
 •* P X 
 
 p 7 P 
 
 • •7 P O 
 
 p . 2 ‘ ^-kkIo] j-L2cn ,__lAdcl_» 1A1Z ^jActlo ;1dUqV 
 
 • ^ 
 
 <r 
 
 777 -X P * 7 .P } P7 7 * f« 7 « 
 
 ^Djjo wOoAoj? (m-i_4^oo p«-^ p^o ^ ^o(u.o XloZ. 
 ]Aj-Ol ]A^» Vo jj] ,w»^dZ*| y O,. t. V?\Zo 25 mA » \ n 
 
 “ TV '-* * TV I TV 
 
 p p -7VP7TV P * P 7 
 
 UIqjcdj 26 aiA-»-. ]ijukL»? cHj-.Ud ]ccn ^»]Sd ^ZjZo 
 
 TV TV V I X “* -TV TV 
 
 P 7 7 7 7 D 7 • p 
 
 ^yS\ 27 wa-jALoXZ .w-»-^o]o .]ccn ^o]o 
 
 ..7 P 7 P»« 7 7 • -X • Tv 7 P 
 
 Uajboo Uv-*?° 1j-££Lk» 1aVZ*|o ZoAo] ^jAon » jJo 
 
 7\ I 
 
 7 7 
 
 7 > 0 0 
 
 o y 
 
 W >.olo ♦ ^ Jl _.oo;-L ^OjAd il *|aio ,]Zak) _Ld 
 
 ^ X • * 'tX •• 
 
 ]ZuaQ-a_Lo r k> jjqV ^iolZZo looZ ]3o uQioiVZlo V_i_ajZ] 
 
 IX 7X *T\ lx * ‘T\ 
 
 7 0 7 0 0 0 »X lx 'Tx 'rx 7 
 
 ^]}0 r _iAcn po . (] . UnXio ocn Lpj IsOyioj y_»] 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 201 
 
 P y 
 
 •X P 
 
 V • 0 •• 0 0 
 
 •_0 ^ lk)CL. ot^id ]oci ;lo] U-lji janoi __iAcn 
 
 o 7 
 
 7 P 
 
 ]ZolO o] ]ooi lOD Uo ^.-kk^.O 
 
 x x " x x 
 
 7 o o o o 7 7 o o o •• p 7 7 
 
 j.Sd"|o *U_£d)o ]i ■ Vxa-So pj^-LmX *)j_o Ijj^o n? 
 
 P P -X 7 7 
 
 7* P XX 
 
 .oiAXkA p5oj* ,^v n :]j] £o)> ^o, 1 d *jzoLd .orZ> 
 
 0 7 
 
 7 •• 7 
 
 P P 7 
 
 IIqjjJ ]_»-0 Q_L ^._»]o ^01OlDQ_* 28 ]^lm 
 
 7 P 
 
 P 7 P 
 
 7 p 
 
 jAki») $A^ 1,-4 jo j-Loaio : 29 ]_L_. ^jooi 
 
 7 P X P 7 
 
 lm^ ^_,3Z *_Q0] .io?1 wi-.] so 1ZqJ-_,5Q1d 
 
 x x x • x x 
 
 0 O 7 p .x x 7 0 7 7 o •>. 
 
 ]-i_CD5arA U-.co3o 
 
 -n x 
 
 y »x y y •• y p o *x y 
 
 !>a\-»1o oiAjAt) 31 w£qj3o <^\o 
 
 •x 
 
 7 •• 7 
 
 7 • 
 
 •X 7 0 7 0 *X 7 7 • P 
 
 Q_»^ZZ Vo OOOl loQ-KKiOj . jiclo ^010,-1-kAZZl , oe^Cn 
 
 
 P *x 
 
 ♦X 1% TV 0 
 
 ^oooiZj ]kAp? ^So Ijj-kj ,_1o 
 
 T T • •• 
 
 y p •• y p 
 
 •x y p ^ 
 
 32 
 
 q-j5. |_*o> .qjoi .loai*) .cidAj-j.£d |j] ^ 0] 
 
 p 7 
 
 X 7 
 
 7 P 7 
 
 •X 7 •••X 
 
 't-OA ^ 000 ^oai_»--a^? 1^0,\ aj.Lo5lo v ooi_»-®q_cl\ 
 
 i P P -X 7 
 
 •• P P 
 
 7 p 
 
 7 7 
 
 "jocn iL. y 001 yD v x\t A2 xZ ] » w _lD ,^V > 
 
 ~ 'ft * * X 'ft 'ft * 
 
 pp y pp»»i •• y p »x pp»x 
 
 : l^lo 33 UjoZ ^lo 
 
 P7 P7P-X7 P 7 P p I 7 7 0 
 
 ]Cnv*» ]o3 ]-»Q.Cn^o ]. ,m in ] . m^lji ], » ^Vn\ U1 
 
 p p 
 
 P •• -X 7 P 
 
 7 0 
 
 aijAo ZclX w_».j^»o ja-0cm0-.p U-»-^Ado Li ->Z^d 
 
 XX * X X I v, X . 
 
202 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 7 7 
 
 •X P 
 
 P p y 
 
 34 ^_»^D5 .1^1 Aj_»? iclIjoAo ^Al iZ ]AXZ> 
 
 > O i 
 
 • y p y 07 o y o o v 7 
 
 oaxo ]oai «_»aioA-.1 ) 55 ] o^oZLo "|ox_Z\ ^ai_. 
 
 *" "■ *» ~ 
 
 P *X ^ ° 7 PI 
 
 1 vOCLSU (L ^£10 
 
 7 7 7 
 
 • Ti p 7 
 
 OXO jjLOl 
 
 r *x p 
 
 y y 
 
 p *x 
 
 }_»0 OJ uaUJO « 36 *|ZqJ-kj llo") : joo.«.\ 
 
 7 7 
 
 P 7 
 
 7 7 
 
 5 r _»o . ] i ]A » \n\ ]iai aiZo a^±ol]o 
 
 P -X 
 
 p 7 p .. 7 
 
 •X 7 
 
 ] tt i.no : }oj |ja_.-^05 ]L.qjqdo oiZaX? ]o.>.,\oA-Q 
 
 • • t\ n\ ns \v 7 ) 7s 
 
 •• y p y 7»yi p •• y p y *x 
 
 v .\ >? 37 ^k> : }».ito?|> c tl±d 
 
 7 7 
 
 7 7 
 
 •X 7 
 
 
 38 
 
 P *7 7 7. 
 
 ■ • ^ 1 _-»Z|lO Q-mlJ. nZI po . O O-i. .j^Z] 5Q-k>Ao 
 
 y y 077 o 7 
 
 o »x y 
 
 0*1 . jlDj-LO ,-LO ]Zcl\^0 
 
 akio 
 
 P -X P 7 
 
 7P P7 P p 7 P y 
 
 lV-^o?5 IIdojA o] : ]L I^o^o Ij^o]? ]Soq->A 
 
 PX7 PP *X 7 7 77 P p P 
 
 V*-»rO ]joi> 39 ? ]ZolD5 
 
 • * 7S 
 
 o p*x? 07 •• y y •• 7 y y y ?> 
 
 ]lo]o ]Zo_^o |jLa.cnSo\ ^iio tUkA rJ _K>2’)> 
 
 -7v p ^ 
 
 p •• y 
 
 p »x 'n 
 
 p p •• "ft 
 
 ]_i_ja_»o cl_»ASq_» .1Aj^j)Zo 
 
 •x y p ** 
 
 •x •• p y 
 
 . |o)i ^cna-ioZ^o ^ooiZoZl* VuxSdjIo 
 
 • ” ^ n 
 
 y»y^p >*% 7 • ^ * x ^ * 7 -7 ^ y • 
 
 |ocn (J p^Ojiao pO oij-^-OA 
 
 •X 7 777 «PP 7 7 • P*XPP*X 
 
 aj_Lo . ox^jjiQo axo ]ccn jlaXs ).m inn 
 
 X 7 I* P 7 P • • 'X 7 p P7 p 
 
 40 a_.5;_..Z’)5 ]v-»^ r - i^oaoJL^ |1 qj.£clk> ]^vV i jJ? 
 
 v< ■ « X ..... 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 203 
 
 0 *x *x 
 
 0 0 P y 0 0 
 
 : ]cn ,i.V)Z b^ ^-*1? ^Ao 
 
 O 'D 'Is 
 
 0 0 »X 7 •• 7 • 7 
 
 P o 
 
 r-Kj 41 . » m^n ] .-nn 1 \ VJ>50J5 ,_Ao ^OCTLC) ^£) ]]< 
 
 7 p 7\ i\ 7 7 
 
 7 o 
 
 0 P -X 
 
 oi loau jn ms ,-iO o] 1Zj-L ,_Ld i3"|oo._» 
 
 „ X •• 
 
 P777 P 7 p p7 o 7 
 
 1 APyloSoo IAjA-^o 42 ]A_i_JLkii.Z Nl 1 «jdAd5 o] 
 
 o p y o 
 
 y o y op o 
 
 ]cnJZ\ "jocn 43 >nA^? Ijcti loai ^As? ]Ad 
 
 0 -7 
 
 ‘•0 7 .. p -x -X -X 
 
 lorn oA-»l p <_Aco : j_»i^o 
 
 X Xv 'Is 
 
 0 0 0 
 
 7 7 7 P 7 
 
 _Ad U ]A-»^1 44 ]ASo.» 1 \ |k)A >;-rnv ^ 
 
 7 7 •• P 7 P -X 
 
 7 P P 
 
 i-HL|o ]jdAid 5 ]L.aco Aacoo ^Arfjo *1 A£uAdo 
 
 • * X, • -n • 7 p • x -i» 
 
 •liill «ftii ^so 
 
 ^ T\ 
 
 1 . o : « history. 2 au r jai AZv death , from Jll he died. 
 
 o y '7s 
 
 3 j_»o ^ASd]? of the when and the where and the how , 
 ?7 zms. 4 _^<n he meditated. 5 . <> Ohald. 1W in Ethp. 
 
 he evaded. 6 ^_, r _»oi then. summer. 8 ^ Ac 7 
 
 rushed on suddenly. % chance. 10 ./ \A^\ he 
 
 incited. 11 ^055 whether ? 12 ctlLoj® Atf /ooA himself 
 off. 13 ]-A j ]j 2 ) honour. 14 jl_L£ Arabs. 15 he took 
 
 X ^ ^ 
 
 pleasure. 16 ] l -n > v .> * elegant. 17 I 21 S.Q leaves. la —^ ie 
 
204 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 perceived. 1!) ~p o^o. vn heat , from fever. 20 ^Ad he 
 
 x 
 
 contended. 21 lie used medicine , from feoco flwe- 
 
 dicine. 22 }jcni Aph. part, from jiai /o profitable. 
 
 'IS 
 
 CTL^alD his constitution of body , from mixe( ^ 
 
 he was infirm. 25 ] A»\ n cell. ^\Lm^the pulse. 
 27 S n^\i he vexed. 28 ] • An \ grass. 29 ]v. he flourislieth. 
 
 I X 
 
 ]Zq_L»5q1o confession; root . 31 *cqj5ql£) government. 
 
 i 
 
 it rent or cleaved. 33 ] » in ) conversation, from ]JZ 
 iteravit. 34 l<TL^\^)cnJ Mar Yaballoho. ]o> VnA-o 
 
 — i 
 
 a laudable catholic. 36 ]loU^ a shop. fo 
 
 x ^ 
 
 P mm 
 
 from ours , i. e. the church of the Jacobites, o") 
 
 30 
 
 32 
 
 ? , pp 
 
 38 
 
 )vn n 1 \ O day of perdition! he rushed 
 
 suddenly. 40 deprived. 41 ]3po_* ^ an 
 
 answer to one question. 42 | A^iVnO sensible. cnA^^j 
 
 43 1oai whom (God) hath adorned. 44 ] Acn I i breath. 
 45 ]iiS « foreign language. 
 
HYMN OF EPHRAIM 
 
 ON THE 
 
 HOLY TRINITY. 
 
 o TS 
 
 • IjAj 
 
 7> -ft 
 
 ]oOU 
 
 4 
 
 » -X 
 
 . ] A_» QJD5 
 
 ■U-J 
 
 o • 7 
 
 . 8 ] 1 \Vi 7 
 
 !>OQ-k*Z 
 
 
 Q\ 0 •• 7 
 
 .|c»An^ 
 
 I 
 
 ^Oa_CO 
 
 'Ts 'TS 
 
 .loCTU 
 
 P 'A 
 
 ioA_»o 
 
 
 •K 7> 7 7 
 
 . 2 pAlo ^mnnn - 
 
 ^ * •• P 
 
 •W 2 
 
 •X 
 
 ^OQ_kjZ 
 
 
 'h o 
 
 *r-*r* 
 
 i 7 
 
 o o *7 7 
 
 .1/LlSOO 'Yl 
 
 
 • ‘Ts •• X 
 
 1&1 
 
 .lloda 
 
 ^L]l 
 
 5 
 
 . ojcn 
 
 uo 
 
 7 x 
 
 7 7 
 
 
 * 7 
 
 . 001 
 
 • 
 
 p V 
 
 H? 
 
 7 X * 7 
 
 .Aotl ^lo 
 
 
 7 P *X 
 
 2 <}]? 
 
 9 ]oZAj 
 
 o 7 
 
 liolj 
 
 
 * 7 
 
 . 001 
 
 o 7 
 
 1 i^>0 
 
 .£d| 
 
 •»» 7 p 
 
 > 
 
 
 p p «X P 
 
 ♦I^lqq-1 5 ]]> 
 
 • 
 
 
 6 
 
 P 7 
 
 P I 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 7 7> » 7 
 
 3 ^)|0 
 
 
 P *x *x 
 
 ."|icnQ_UD ooi 
 
 I 
 
 I>CLiu£D 
 
 'TS 'TS 
 
 ♦ loou 
 
 P 7 
 
 kol? 
 
 
 .a 
 
 0 7 7 7 
 
 
 7\ • • 7 
 
 jl-Vo 
 
 •':k 
 
 P •• 
 
 l 1 . , ^ 
 
 o o 7 
 
 - 1U 
 • 
 
 
 ^ X 71 
 
 * 4 ° 
 
206 
 
 EXERCTSES. 
 
 0 0 *X 7 
 
 ,|nnoi 11 
 
 ns •• o x x 
 
 ♦ toAD ■ajiO.i.CO 
 
 P P Tl 7 
 
 ♦ }jL_> 
 
 P X 7 7 
 
 »'|A_»]_kkLo vj_» | 
 
 . 16 V»oAd2 
 
 Tl 7 0 7 
 
 . CTULjJL 12 V»-2L*3 
 
 P -X 7 7 
 
 .]Zl»clo _g^o 
 
 
 * * * # 
 
 ♦ 
 
 o 7^0 
 
 .^-SoZ 
 
 • 
 
 ** m. o 0 7 
 
 1001 12 
 
 P 7 -X X 
 
 ♦ ^SdZ ooi ^Q-i-oo 
 
 oo 0 7 
 
 •U” u?? 
 
 ^ p «x y ^ *x 
 
 *froj3 0~L-»-l00> 
 
 \ l ' x ' x ■’* 
 
 ♦ |A_»o_o <q_lqj 
 
 P 7, -X X 
 
 .^_LoZ ocn 
 
 op 7 P 
 
 Vo 
 
 p 7 71 y 
 
 .1^) OlSO^* 
 
 ™ *X ^ <X 
 
 cnZ^D ^_1d 1s ^cl0j 
 
 . P -X -x . y 
 
 . £_®30-O «-^o0330 
 
 •X « * p 0 7 
 
 ^o L |ooi 13 
 
 71 • • P I X 
 
 ♦ ]ot!cl® »x_m 
 
 
 •X •• 7 P 7 
 
 ♦ ^ooijAZiZ? 
 
 ♦ l_i—»-» |l Q1 
 
 7 7 P 7 
 
 .r-KJ JL\ZD 
 • • 
 
 0 0 •• P 
 
 ♦ lASoa^ro Vo 
 
 'h 
 
 P -X P 7 
 
 «]Zo iSn->OLQ 
 
 0 Tl p 7 
 
 .}mSn^ ]Zoio 
 
 »jA,'PVivV>\ 
 
 .*■*^2 0C7I _kkTL2) 14 
 
 7 ^ o'* 
 
 .A\l ]AXl 
 
 0 0 ' 7> 
 
 •V^ vr^ 
 
 a 
 
 * o 
 
 r> 
 
 *o 
 
 ■ *0 
 
 ♦ 
 
 P ”7\ 0 •• 7 
 
 ♦ "jA.a.inX U-io 
 
 .7 .X 71 p 
 
 .!>QA 001 *-0>l? 
 
 p Tl op 
 
 ♦ ] X.C1.9 Vo 
 
 »\ 'TX 'TS -7\ 
 
 .^qj! l$CJ? 
 
 •> P -X 7 ft 1 
 
 ♦ 19 ]ZqlCiSD Vi 1-0,1 
 
 •x 'H “7s 'TX 
 
 • <oj1 Uru; 
 
EXERCISES. 
 
 207 
 
 .ctlmA 2> Z 22 *^oi5 19 
 
 .OlZl 001 «->^Ag) 15 
 
 .w; ? H 5 A 1 
 
 i y p y 
 
 ♦ 20 ,-»__^-ro I^jeA 
 
 p -i. ^ "i 7 
 
 . OULlO «_Q£0|O 
 
 •x y y -?i 
 
 . w_*01CL^i3 VJ> 
 
 p . 0 -!> 7 
 
 p p y p 
 
 ."IZv-K^ro oirD 
 
 p y p y 
 
 ]oai> 
 
 p p y p 
 
 .]Z^ClT0 Uo 
 
 .ot_k»A£) vT^oZ 22 ^oii 20 
 
 •W*^ 18 
 
 •tau^a 4iZ 
 
 . •T'p-x y 
 
 ♦ }l *AoV> rLo 
 • 
 
 p -x p y 
 
 . ]Zq.J_SQ-*015 
 
 p p x y 
 
 .^o ? y w-*^]o 
 
 p *x y x 
 
 .]A_®clq 
 
 ^ 7 pi 
 
 P P »X P 
 
 • UO-OOL iU 
 
 y y p -x 
 
 23 • xt, \ ]_»^k£I)Q_® 21 
 
 • 
 
 1\ * 0 7S I 
 
 17 
 
 PI 0 0 
 
 .IjjAd }joi 
 
 
 •x y -x y 
 
 .001 —K t 001 
 
 • • * 
 
 ■s p P ■» * « 
 
 y p -x -x 
 
 ♦ \joAj0 Q_a001 
 
 .lia*. ■ «^io 
 
 .. i y ^ * 
 
 .l^ao i^lo 
 
 4^)U W^oa-» 22 
 
 ^7 ^7 
 
 . 0T-*jA£D iO.-O 18 
 • 
 
 n\ i n\ y 
 
 ♦ ot-»A-»]^ lmo> 
 
 y •• y p y 
 
 . ^oiaioj^l? ]i^A 
 
 p y » *x 
 
 ♦ 1;*^ (j^JDCL® 
 
 p p is y 
 
 . iO?y OlXcL^ 
 
 -x y -a y 
 
 .oijXi-o }mrD? 
 
 y x P 7 
 
 . w_»010Aj1 U rO 
 
 p -T> P -X 
 
 .]LoA-» !>oZgl>^kH; 
 
 «P I y -n 
 
 ♦ 2l 
 
208 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 P y 
 
 ■£o 24 
 
 P P P 1\ 
 
 .(loo |-qA-» 
 
 ^ I «x 7 
 
 ♦ <00 lO ) 
 
 p p -n "*> 
 
 .^Ano }mnl> 
 
 P -X 7 *i 1 
 
 . wi_xjjcq_» ^Ld |o 
 
 p p x 7 
 
 • AU ^3oZ 23 
 
 7 7 
 
 P 7 I 7 
 
 ."I^A ^?oZ 
 
 7 7 p 
 
 ..no\A1 d U? 
 
 * P *X 'X 7 
 
 .(-•300 O.J03 !>ol 
 
 1 ] m » i sign or symbol, banner, or standard. 2 AAd 
 
 X 
 
 sordid, blind, ignorant. vigils, ^oor/ angels. 
 
 X 
 
 p p ^ p p p <X o *rs -ts 
 
 4 ]. ^\n^ ]j 5 indivisible. 5 )n.n n\ }]> inscrutable. 6 l’l^ 
 
 ^ ** o V p 
 
 arrows. 7 ^o q_k»Z between. 8 P Vn orators. 9 ]oZ 2 V 
 
 grieveth. 10 ]Z ;Alk 3 instrument. 11 utility . 12 ] A 1 
 
 right, sincere. 13 5o^ Ae painted. 14 ,vnx he baptized. 
 
 15 30? he agitated. 16 ]_ioAr>Z contention. 17 ]_i53 $33 wz’Z/z- 
 omZ investigation. 111 should depart. 19 ]v n^vn 
 
 fountain, from mtoj- g0 • » much, to be construed 
 
 with . 21 ]A-i__kj 3 22 ^(ji5 /*£ prompt, for 
 
 1 
 
 promptly. This verb is used as an adverb to the 
 next. 23 AAjA Zo 7/iw «r//o formed. 
 
 THE END. 
 
Works published by John W. Parker, 
 
 West Strand, London. 
 
 Select List No. III. 
 
 A RUNDINES Cami, sive Musarum Cantabrigiensium Lusus Canori, 
 
 Li. collegit atque edidit IIenricus Drury, M.A. The Third Edition, thoroughly Revised 
 and Enlarged, 12s. 
 
 Becker’s Gallus; or Roman Scenes of the Time of Augustus, with 
 
 Notes and Excursus illustrative of Manners and Customs. Second Edition, Enlarged and 
 Improved. Translated by the Rev. F. Metcalfe, M.A., Head Master of Brighton College. 
 Post Octavo, with Coloured Illustrations Nearly ready. 
 
 Becker’s Charicles; or, Illustrations of the Private Life of the 
 
 Ancient Greeks. Translated by the Rev. F. Metcalfe. Post Octavo, with Illustrations, 12s. 
 
 A Complete Creek Grammar for the use of Learners. By J. W. 
 
 Donaldson, B.D., Head Master of King Edward’s School, Bury St. Edmund’s. Strongly 
 bound, 4s. 6c?. fe- 
 
 The Agamemnon of iEschylus, the Greek Text, with a Translation 
 
 into English Verse, and Notes, Critical and Explanatory. By John Conington, B.A., 
 Fellow of University College, Oxford. 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Antigone of Sophocles, in Greek and English, with Critical 
 
 and Explanatory Notes. By J. W. Donaldson, B.D. Octavo, 9s. 
 
 The Phsedrus, Lysis, and Protagoras of Plato; a new and literal 
 
 Translation, mainly from the Text of Bekker. By J. Wright, B.A., Trinity College, 
 Cambridge. 4s. 6d. 
 
 Aristophanis Comoedim Undecim cum Notis et Indice Historico. 
 
 Edidit Hubertus A. Holden, A.M., Coll. SS. Trin. Cant. Socius. Octavo, 15s. 
 
 C. Cornelii Taciti Opera ad Codices Antiquissimos exacta et 
 
 emendata, Cominentario Critico et exegetico illustrata. Edidit Franciscus Ritter, 
 Professor Bonnensis. Four Volumes, Octavo, 28s. 
 
 In this Edition of Tacitus is given a complete collation of all the older and only important MSS., with the emen¬ 
 dations of Professor Ritter, and offormer Editors, followed by a Commentary, containing an explanation of all diffi¬ 
 cult passages, and a justification of new readings introduced. The true reading has been restored in more than one 
 hundred and eighty passages, hitherto regarded as hopelessly corrupt. Also, a Life of Tacitus, a criticism of his writ¬ 
 ings, and of the original form of the Works still extant, with Indices to the Text, and the Notes by the Editor. 
 
2 
 
 Select List, No. III., of Works 
 
 Sophoclis Philoctetes. With Notes. By W. IIaig Brown, B.A., 
 
 Fellow of Pembroke College, Cambridge. 2s. 
 
 Sophoclis (Edipus Tyrannus. With Notes. By W. Haig Brown, 
 
 B.A. 2s. 6d. _ 
 
 The Fables of Babrius, from the newly-discovered Manuscript; 
 
 with the Fragments of the lost Fables. Edited, with Notes, by G. C. Lewis, Esq., M.P., 
 M.A., late Student of Christ Church. Post Octavo, 5s. 6d. 
 
 Pindar’s Epinician Odes, and the Fragments of his Lost Compo¬ 
 sitions, Revised and explained ; with Copious Notes and Indices. By J. W. Donaldson, 
 B.D., Head Master of King Edward’s School, Bury St. Edmund’s. Octavo, 16s. 
 
 A Commentary on the Book of the Acts of the Apostles. By the 
 
 Rev. W. Gilson Humphry, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, Examining 
 Chaplain to the Bishop of London. Octavo, 7s. 
 
 The Cambridge Greek and English Testament, in Parallel Columns 
 
 on the same Page. New Edition, with Marginal References. 8s. 6d. 
 
 The Greek Text of the Acts of the Apostles, with Notes, Original 
 
 and Selected. By H. Robinson, D.D., Rector of Great Warley. Octavo, 8s. 
 
 Theocritus. Codicum Manuscriptorum Ope Recensuit et Emen- 
 
 davit Chris. Wordsworth, S.T.P., nuper Scholse Harroviensis Magister. Octavo, 13s. 6d. 
 
 The Iphigenia in Aulis of Euripides. Cambridge Edition, with 
 
 English Notes. Octavo, 6s._ 
 
 The Iphigenia in Tauris of Euripides. Cambridge Edition, with 
 
 English Notes. Octavo, 5s. 
 
 Select Private Orations of Demosthenes, with English Notes. By 
 
 the Rev. C. T. Penrose, M.A., Head Master of Sherborne School. 5s. 
 
 The Frogs of Aristophanes, with English Notes. By the Rev. 
 
 H. P. COOKESLEY. 7S. 
 
 Homer’s Iliad: With Anthon’s Notes and Homeric Glossary: 
 
 Edited by J. R. Major, D.D., Head Master of King’s College School. 6s. 
 
 Xenophon’s Anabasis, I. and II. With English Notes, by Dr. 
 
 Hickie, Head Master of Hawkeshead School. 3s. Qd. 
 
 The Aulularia of Plautus, with Notes by J. Hildyard, B.D., 
 
 Fellow of Christ’s College, Cambridge. 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Mensechmei of Plautus, with a Glossary and Notes, by J. 
 
 Hildyard, B.D. 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Phenomena and Diosemeia of Aratus, translated into English 
 
 Verse, with Notes, by J. Lamb, D.D., Dean of Bristol. Octavo, 7s. 6d. 
 
Published by John W. Parker. 3 
 
 The iEneid of Virgil, with Anthon’s Notes. Edited by J. R. 
 
 Major, D.D., Head Master of King’s College, London. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Select Epistles of Cicero and Pliny. With English Notes. By 
 
 the Rev. J. Edwards, of King’s College, London. 4?. 
 
 The Speeches of Demosthenes against Aphobus and Onetor. 
 
 Translated, with Notes explanatory of the Athenian Laws and Institutions, by C. R. 
 Kennedy, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Post Octavo, 9s. 
 
 Bceckh’s Public Economy of Athens. Translated by G. C. Lewis, 
 
 Esq., M.P., A.M., late Student of Christ Church. Octavo, 18s. 
 
 The New Cratylus; Contributions towards a more Accurate Know¬ 
 
 ledge of the Greek Language. By J. W. Donaldson, B.D. New Edition, in the Press. 
 
 Stemmata Atheniensia; Tables of Biography, Chronology, and 
 
 History, to facilitate the Study of the Greek Classics. 5s. 
 
 A Selection from the Greek Verses of Shrewsbury School; with 
 
 an Account of the Iambic Metre and Style of Greek Tragedy, with Exercises in Greek 
 Tragic Senarii. New Edition, revised. 8s. 
 
 Characteristics of the Greek Philosophers, Socrates and Plato. 
 
 By the Rev. John Philips Potter, A.M., late of Oriel College, Oxford. 4s. 6d. 
 
 Dahlmann’s Life of Herodotus, drawn out from his Book. Trans¬ 
 lated by G. V. Cox, M.A., Esquire, Bedell, Oxford. Post 8vo, 5s. 
 
 A Life of Aristotle, including a Critical Discussion of some Ques- 
 
 tions of Literary History connected with his Works. By the Rev. J. W. Blakesley, 
 M.A., late Fellow and Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Schleiermacher’s Introductions to the Dialogues of Plato; trans¬ 
 
 lated by the Rev. W. Dobson, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Travels in the Track of the Ten Thousand Greeks; a Geogra¬ 
 phical and Descriptive Account of the Expedition of Cyrus, and of the Retreat of the Ten 
 Thousand, as related by Xenophon. By W. F. Ainsworth, F. G. S., Surgeon to the late 
 Euphrates Expedition. Post Octavo, 7s. 6d. 
 
 The Classical Museum; a Journal of Philology, and of Ancient 
 
 History and Literature. Yol. I., 12s. 6d.; also Nos. I. to IV., 4s. each. 
 
 The Student’s Manual of Ancient History; containing the Poli¬ 
 tical History, Geographical Position, and Social State of the Principal Nations of Anti¬ 
 quity. By. W. C. Taylor, LL.D. Fourth Edition, 10s. 6d. 
 
 The Student’s Manual of Modern History; the Rise and Progress 
 
 of the Principal European Nations, their Political History, and the Changes in their 
 Social Condition. By W. C. Taylor, LL.D. The Fourth Edition, 10s. 6d. 
 
4 
 
 Select Works published by John W. Parker. 
 
 Classical Texts. Carefully revised from the best Editions. 
 
 Cicero de Senectute. Is. 
 
 Cicero de Amicitia. Is. 
 
 Cicero pro Plancio. 1 s. 
 
 Cicero pro Milone. Is. 
 
 Cicero pro Mursena. Is. 
 
 Cicero de Officiis. 2s. 
 
 Ciceronis OratioPhilippicaSecunda. Is. 
 Taciti Germania. Is. 
 
 Taciti Agricola. Is. 
 
 Excerpta ex Annalibus Taciti. Edited 
 by Professor Pillans. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Caesar de Bello Gallico. I. to IY. Is. 6d. 
 Iloratii Satirae. Is. 
 
 Terentii Andria. Is. 
 
 Virgilii Georgica. Is. 6d. 
 
 Ovidii Fasti. 2s. 
 
 Platonis Phaedo. 2s. 
 
 Platonis Menexenus. Is. 
 
 .ZEschyli Eumenides. Revised by J. 
 
 W. Donaldson, B.D. Is. 
 Euripidis Bacchae. Is. 
 
 Excerpta ex Arriano. 2s. 6d. 
 
 A New Hebrew Lexicon.—Part I. Hebrew and English, arranged 
 
 according to the permanent letters in each word (by means of which arrangement the root 
 is more readily found than by any former method.)—Part II. English and Hebrew. With 
 a Hebrew Grammar, Vocabulary, and Grammatical Analysis of the Book of Genesis. Also 
 a Chaldee Grammar, Lexicon, and Grammatical Analysis of the Chaldee Words of the Old 
 Testament. By the Rev. T. Jarrett, M.A., Professor of Arabic, Cambridge. Octavo, 2 Is. 
 
 Hebrew Grammar; designed for the use of Schools and Students. 
 
 By the late Chistopher Leo, of Cambridge. Octavo, 12s. Cd. 
 
 The Guide of the Hebrew Student; Containing Easy Passages in 
 
 pure Biblical Hebrew, with Keys and Glossary for English Learners. By H. Bernard, 
 Hebrew Teacher in the University of Cambridge. 10s. Qd. 
 
 An Analysis of the Text of the History of Joseph, upon the Prin¬ 
 ciples of Professor Lee’s Hebrew Grammar. By Alered Ollivant, D.D., Regius Pro¬ 
 fessor of Divinity, Cambridge. Octavo, 6s. 
 
 The Psalms in Hebrew, with a Critical, Exegetical, and Philolo¬ 
 gical Commentary, intended for the Use of Students. By G. Phillips, B.D., Fellow and 
 Tutor of Queen’s College, Cambridge. Two Volumes Octavo, 32s. 
 
 The Book of Solomon, called Ecclesiastes—the Hebrew Text 
 
 and a Latin Version—with Notes, Philological and Exegetical, and a Literal Translation 
 from the Rabbinic of the Commentary and Preface of R. Moses Mendlessohn. By the Rev. 
 Theodore Preston, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College. Octavo, 15s. 
 
 A Practical Arabic Grammar. By Duncan Stuart. Octavo. 16s. 
 
 The Elements of Syriac Grammar. By G. Phillips, B.D., 
 
 Fellow and Tutor of Queen’s College, Cambridge. Second Edition, with Additions. 
 Octavo, 10s. 
 
 The Chaldee Text of Daniel V., and the Syriac of St. Matthew, 
 
 VI. Analyzed. By the Rev. T. R. Brown, M.A. Octavo, 3s. 6d. 
 
 Parker's Catalogue of Books , in all branches of Education , 
 
 including those published under the sanction of the Committee of Council on Education ; 
 and the Publications of the Committee on General Literature and Education, appointed by 
 the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, may be had on application. 
 
_ 
 
 _ 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
t 
 
 ** , 
 
 w 
 
 • 
 
 Date Due 
 
 -FAni.il ty 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JUNIOr^l 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mr * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 <f) 
 
 
 V